Home

GSK980MDa1 Milling Controller User Manual

1. are initialized to null When the power is display 500 999 turned off data is S stored c 31000 3015 G54 G55 output mm 3 Store G54 G55 read all 16 bits of 1032 f only a signal at one time U 1100 1115 m G54 G55 input 9 variable o G54 eae be ora o oP ERREUR F r wri 1132 C234 eatis uia me earners Readiwr E signal at one time ite 3 E A 2 41133 S oe G56 99 write all 32 bits of E a signal at one time t Tool length ti 42001 32032 di em ool length compensation wear 9999 999 9999 999 NIRE variable ite 42201 42232 Tool length compensation 9999 999 9999 999 CUN 42401 42432 Cutter compensation wear 9999 999 9999 999 CUM 42601 42632 Cutter compensation wear 9999 999 9999 999 de Automatic operation 0 1 2 3 Read wr t x 3003 3004 contro Seer ite Automatic operation 0 7 Read wr control 3004 ite Th f i 43901 e number of machined parts 0 99999999 oe G00 G01 G02 G03 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 Read 4001 G86 G88 G89 G110 G111 modal G code group1 RS G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 4 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 G17 G18 G19 4002 Read modal G code group 2 Mi 44002 44003 d G90 G91 4003 Read modal G code group 3 only G94 G95 4005 R modal G code group 5 d only 2 21 4 4005 4007 NONO SOUS modal G code group 6 lis G40 G41 G42 4007 R modal G code group 7
2. 1 1 Panel Division This GSK980MDa adopts an integrated panel which division is as follows Flash Port SSL GNO sess IN 6750 om om om ow OF om K State indicator ES T e f h BI FAS 118 13 pue Edit keypad eli To frg M j TE um EE aer Jan vo EVE renes Display ASHE hua io nx Ore xt rien rogo Ve FOU Vu2596 US zu10096 Hg E 4 LA M 163 lt o c 3 D F O So g a o 3 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK 1 1 1 State indication e machine zero return TA b v6 15 b MM Rapid indicator finish indicator Single block indicator Block Skip indicator Machine Lock indicator MST MST Lock indicator Dry Run indicator 1 1 2 Edit P W e ae For CNC reset feed output stop etc Address input Address Double address key switching between two sides by pressing repeatedly Double address key switching between two Sign key characters by pressing repeatedly 164 Chapter 1 Operation
3. PRG STATE 006606 NOBOBO GHA GLY G98 G54 ABSOLUTE Node of fixed cycle G2 640 G49 69d 698 X a m X V y aaga li Pel00 S 09 N30 Z r PRG F 100 EE IMS a ACT F 0 INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 156805 GHG X58 YEA Z100 RAP OVRI 168 SPI OVRI 186 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 6 06 02 MDI see TOI Hae S z a o oO 3 3 press i by sequence the page is as follows O FRG STATE 006606 NOBOBO 5 ABSOLUTE Mode of fixed cycle A a n Po uds E X a m X V m y a aaa a FO100 S 09 N30 S PRG F 188 ANN Uu a ACT F 0 INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 1504 GHG X58 YEA Z10060_ RAP OVRI 186 SPI OVRI 186 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 6 06 02 MDI see Tal Hae am INPUT 4 At last press 1 the page is as follows FRG STATE 006606 NOBOBO GHG GLY G98 G54 ABSOLUTE Node of fixed cycle G2 640 G49 694 698 X a m X V y a aaa Pel00 S 09 N30 0 088 PRG F 188 R a ACT F 0 INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 156805 GAG bea YSA 71000 RAP OVRI 168 SPI OVRI 186 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 60 00 02 MDI see TOI Hae 5 5 OUT Key Start When the OUTR of the K parameter K0010 is set to 1 the current words inputted 213 GSE m may be executed by pressing key in MDI mode It is the same as um C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual lt o c 3 D F O Ke gt 9 a o E 214 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management CHAPTER6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGE
4. Offset clearance Offset value 0 10 000 7 10 000 20 000 6 20 000 30 000 4 Machine Offset Offset Drive unit current Drive unit current coordinate parameter valie command pulses command pulses after system No before offsetting offsetting Reference 000 000 00000 00000 point 0 10 000 001 7 10000 10007 20 000 002 6 20000 20001 30 000 003 4 30000 30005 MEME 004 2 Data parameterNe125 screw pitch error origin 260 Ne0120 compensation interval 210 000 When the screw pitch error origin is set to 60 For the positive moving the compensation value for the 1 section is set by the position N2061 in the compensation table The compensation value for the 2 section is set by the position Ne062 in the compensation table The compensation value for the Nth is set by position Ne060 N in the compensation table 345 M eunjoA gt m rr D et 5 M SUNIoA gt o p A D et 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual For the negative moving the 1 section error compensation is set by position Ne060 in the compensation table the 2 section by position Ne059 The Nth section error compensation is set by position Ne060 N in the compensation table By taking the machine zero as the reference point the screw pitch error origin moves from the positive coordinate system of machine zero to compensate the corresponding position No 061 in the com
5. 177 1 3 4 Alarm interface i re etre iot aii 181 1 3 5 Settihg Interface criteria beds 183 1 3 6 BIT PARAMETER DATA PARAMETER PITCH COMP interface 188 1 3 7 CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE machine soft panel VERSION MESSAGE Interface nete aee taf DA PER ne eoa e tds 190 1 4 Listo general Oper iii tete Fere ree Tenet eA nee ne Dd haear 193 CHAPTER 2 POWER ON OR OFF AND PROTECTION sees rennen 199 2 1 System Power Ollanta ier be en COR EE bon 199 2 2 System Power Off eie reme bene ce awed Ria 199 2 3 Overtravel Protection ecu aede eene reet er x IRE HOY oe eee ud aaepe ager uide ped 200 2 3 1 Hardware overtravel protection oocooocccccccccccncccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononinnnn 200 2 3 2 Software overtravel protection ssssssssssssesseseeeee eene 200 2 4 Emergency Operation essssssssssssssesesee Ea aaa a A nnn aa eaa nennen nnn 200 ZA ARES ii eene ad 201 2 4 2 Emergency stop tnde e te teh eet be Pat rete enire te be de Pacis Pasa 201 243 Feed hold eei ho uere IR Este eee DANI PP RERKR TES ais 201 2 4 NA 201 CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION 2 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee seen enna nnne nenes 202 3 1 Coordinate axis moving enne nememrnnn nn nen enn nnne nnne 202 3 1 1 Manual feed ce Ce e iaa 202 34 2 Manu al rapid traverse eee dates d ede te but d rate 202 3 1 3 Manual
6. As rotary axes are not involved in metric inch interconversion the rotary axis increment parameter unit is determined by increment system types The ranges of rotary axis increment parameters are the same as that of metric machine tool Machine Increment Rotation axis Rotation axis tool type system speed unit parameter range Metric 1u IS B gt 0 001deg O 99999 999 inch 0 1u IS C 0 0001 deg machine O 9999 9999 tool system e Coordinate data G54 G59 The unit of linear axis coordinate data is determined by metric inch input system namely mm for metric system inch for inch system The ranges of linear axis coordinate data are codetermined by metric inch input system and increment system It is the same as command data input ranges Shown as follows SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 e GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K Increment system Linear axis coordinate data range Metric input 99999 999 99999 999 mm 1u IS B ea Inch input 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch G20 Metric input 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 0 1u IS C 521 Inch input 999 99999 999 99999 inch G20 As rotary axis is not involve in metric inch interconversion the unit of rotary axis coordinate data is deg The ranges of rotary axis coordinate data is the same as linear axis coordinate data ranges in metric system
7. Initial point level 1 ay ats Y Point R plane 1 1 1 1 ki i y x 1 i 1 i 1 1 Point Z Z Point Z Related Explanation 1 Same as G73 after feeding for Q it returns to the point R plane at the rapid traverse firstly and then rapid feeds to d mm to the end surface then cutting feed is applied and the cycle is performed in turn The Q value should be positive even if the negative value is specified and the sign is also disabled Q value 0 001mm is defaulted if Q value is not specified d is set by the parameter No 52 its default value is 1000 and the unit is 0 001mm If the cutting depth is less than the Q value then cutting to the bottom of a hole at the first time and rapid traverse retraction is not performed 2 The command P is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 7 Boring cycle G85 Format G98 G99 G85X Y R Z F L_ Function After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R the boring is performed from point R to point Z thereafter Cutting feed is performed to return point R plane when the Z point has been reached the bottom of a hole Explanation Command explanation for the canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 66 Chapter 3 G Command Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse lt 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 2 3
8. SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 e GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual new one is ineffective which is effective till the program is executed again b If different compensation values are commanded in different blocks of a program different compensation value will be compensated to the corresponding block But if it is an arc the alarm will be generated For details refer to the following explanation c about arc data error in C type cutter radius compensation e When the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc When the end point for the programming arc is not on the arc the tool stops and the alarm information shows end point is not on the arc Two same points in the starting is shown an example EFE ne N1 Pa Pl NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 N1 G91 G1 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 without moving N2 G90 X0 YO N3 X50 Te REPE The above mentioned program may occur the two same points when starting and the compensation may not perform The transit point P1 between NO and N1 and the transit point P2 between N1 and N2 are shared a same point NO G90 G00 X 50 Y 50 N1 G1 G41 XO YO D1 F800 N2 G91 XO YO without moving N3 X50 The last two same points may occur when starting at the last program in the case of the compensation has been performed The section without moving which is regarded as the movement 158 Chapter 6 Cutt
9. Type Sign Meaning Corresponding PLC CNC pin out state diagnosis GEAR1 Spindle mechanical gear signal 1 CN62 9 Y1 0 Output GEAR 2 Spindle mechanical gear signal 2 CN62 10 Y1 1 signal GEAR 3 Spindle mechanical gear signal 3 CN62 11 Y1 2 GEAR 4 Spindle mechanical gear signal 4 CN62 12 Y1 3 S01 Command signal for spindle gear signal 1 S02 Command signal for spindle gear signal 2 Command S03 Command signal for spindle gear input signal 3 S04 Command signal for spindle gear signal 4 S00 Command signal for spindle gear signal cancellation Control parameter Srs JESSIE pesa E dE 1 RI on Corresponding F200 4 F signal ACS 1 Analog voltage control for spindle speed 0 Switch value control for spindle speed olija po yeco XIGNHddV Corresponding F211 4 F signal ESCD 0 The S code not closed when stopping urgently 1 The S code closed when stopping urgently DT0019 S code performance time DT0024 Delay time for spindle gear shift 363 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System e Logic control The GEAR1 GEAR 4 output are disabled when CNC is power on When any of commands S01 S02 S03 and S04 being executed the corresponding S signal output is validated and the rest 3 S signals output is cancelled at the same time When the S00 command is executed the GEAR1 GEARA output are cancelled and only one of them is effective at the same time 5 3 4 Cycle
10. 6 Ifthe two passwords input are not identical CNC prompts PASSWORD CHECKOUT ERROR the page is as follows AUTH OPERATION 00000 NOO000 lt e c 3 D F O x Co i e o E Backup PAR User Resume PAR User Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo CURRENT LEVEL 3 SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD gt UPDATE PASS PASSWORD CHECKOUT ERROR Modify parameter and edit program MDI 50000 TOO Hae 9 2 3 Lower level set The demotion of the operation level is used to enter a lower level from a higher level the steps are as follows 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page key in the password by the method in Section 10 3 2 2 Move the cursor to the SET LOWER LEVEL line if the current CNC operation is the ge level the page is as follows 254 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore AUTH OPERATION 00000 NOO00600 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Modify parameter and edit program MDI 50000 TOO Hae DATA INPUT 3 Press key the CNC prompts CURRENT LEVEL TO 4 OK the page is as follows AUTH OPERATION 00000 NO00000 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo CURRENT LEVEL 3 SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PAS
11. GSR USER MANUAL GSK 980MDa Milling CNC System Wa SAS OND Puipiiy eawo8g6 MS9 WISI 12S SBR A GSK CNC EQUIPMENT CO LTD Add No 7 1 Street Luochong North Road Luochongwei Guangzhou 510165 China Http www gsk com cn E mail sale1 gsk com cn Tel 86 20 81796410 81797922 Fax 86 20 81993683 enue y 4esf All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Temporary Edition 10th Jun 2010 v Iepmpereisasio grp 2 e rz ea r os o oen BAE gga GSK HTTP WWW GSK COM CN E MAIL SALEIOGSK COM CN cn r lt Marz iu Ec E3BRZS El A This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of this CNC system in detail However it is impossible to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable operations due to length limitation and products application conditions Therefore the items not presented herein should be considered impractical or unallowable ae Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd It is illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability 5K G6 GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Preface Your Excellency We are honored by your purchase of products from GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd This manual introduces programming operation and connection of GSK980MDa CNC Milling Machine in detail To ensure saf
12. 0 Output axis pulse by pulse and direction do not need restart kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk L2 L1 LO Interface language selection 307 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Language L2 L1 LO Chinese 0 0 0 English 0 0 1 Frence 0 1 0 Spanish 0 1 1 Germen 1 0 0 Italian 1 0 1 Russian 1 1 0 Korean 1 1 1 3 1 2 Data parameter CMRX X axis multiplier coefficient CMRY Y axis multiplier coefficient CMRZ Z axis multiplier coefficient CMR4 4 axis multiplier coefficient CMR5 5 axis multiplier coefficient 1 32767 CMDX X axis frequency division coefficient CMDY Y axis frequency division coefficient CMDZ Z axis frequency division coefficient M eunjoA CMD4 4 axis frequency division coefficient CMD5 5 axis frequency division coefficient Setting range 1 32767 gt m rr A D et O 5 setting range 1732767 CMR _ 5x360 Zy CMD xL Zp Electronic gear ratio formula S min command output unit Zw belt wheel teeth of lead screw a motor rotation angle for a pulse Zp Wheel teeth of motor belt L Screw lead X axis max rapid traverse speed Y axis max rapid traverse speed E E 4 axis max rapid traverse speed 016 5 axis max rapid traverse speed Setting range 10 99999999 Unit mm min 70 E L2 i 3 308 Chapter 3 Parameter Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of X axis rapid traverse Acce
13. e Control parameter AAA TT RESB 1 Reset and cursor return is active 0 Reset and cursor return is inactive 369 gt a y e Z J a G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System e Function description When RESB of K10 is set to 1 by pressing the reset key in auto mode the system reset and cursor returns to the beginning of a program 5 3 16 Rigid Tapping e Relevant Signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input VPO spindle V P output signal CN15 6 X5 1 signal Command M29 rigid tapping signal input Output VP spindle V P switch signal CN15 20 Y5 0 signal TAP TAP signal CN15 21 Y5 1 e Function description When M29 is executed VP signal is output and servo spindle switched form velocity to position and then servo spindle VPO signal is output PLC received the signal and set G61 0 to 1 The execution of G61 0 is finished and Y5 1 and G61 0 output simultaneously The sequence is as follows Neg RIAP FTA 3 RGTAP 661 0 FIN 64 3 Servo Spindle V P Switch B spindle rotation 5 3 17 Spindle Exact Stop Relevant Signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input spindle exact stop signal X25 7 signal Output spindle exact stop indicator Y21 3 signal e Function description 370 Appendix When 4th and 5th axis is valid and the corresponding state parameter RCS4 RCS5 is 1 by pressing spindle exact
14. 2 tort ianareo te eie iii 366 5 3 8 Machine EOoCk 5 ie dice 367 5 3 9 MS TOC Kae ee hh oe Sas O A aC nM 367 5 93 10 Single BIOGCK 5 eee der cas itte toe aluet E asd 367 sos AB dip ne Pn ae eee 367 5 312 Optional SIOD e cit i Fe eode RR ee i RA HE rics avian aes 368 5 3 13 Stroke Limit and Emergency Stop cccooooccccnnococcncnonoconononnnncnonnnncnnnn nano emen 368 5 39 14 Tri color IndiCator 1e e ponit iod 369 5 3 15 Reset and Cursor Return sssssssssssssssssssseeene ener nnne nes 369 5 3716 Rigid Tapper ias 370 5 317 Spindle Exact Stop a teet de cett ont teri eae RETE Ree 370 5 3 18 External MPG control essere nennen enne nennen 371 5 4 Standard Ladder Diagtam 5 5 rn terr n Pen e adi 371 XVI VOLUME PROGRAMMING 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING FUNDMENTALS 1 1 Introduction euin oA GSK980MDa Milling Machine is a new generation of CNC system developed by GSK Company As the upgraded version of GSK980MD it supports milling boring and drilling cycle It employs 32 bits high capability CPU and very large scale programmable device FPGA applies real time multi task control technology and hardware interpolation technology and is able to perform um level precision motion control and PLC logic control GSK980MDa is the optimum choice for upgrading CNC milling machine v
15. X In RELATIVE POS page press and hold x key till the X in the page blinks press key to clear X coordinate sf In RELATIVE POS page press and hold amp key till the Y in the page blinks press i key to clear Y coordinate H In RELATIVE POS page press and hold key till the Z in the page blinks press key to clear Z coordinate The method for X Y Z axis relative coordinates divided by 2 X In RELATIVE POS page press and hold x key till the X in the page blinks press key X coordinate will be divided by 2 Y du In RELATIVE POS page press and hold amp key till the Y in the page blinks press key Y coordinate will be divided by 2 In RELATIVE POS page press and hold key till the Z in the page blinks press key Z coordinate will be divided by 2 174 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 3 INTEGRATED POS display page In INTEGRATED POS page the RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE coordinate DIST TO GO only in Auto and MDI mode are displayed together The displayed value of MACHINE coordinate is the current position in the machine coordinate system which is set up according to the machine zero DIST TO GO is the difference between the target position of block or MDI and the current position The display page is as follows INTEGRATED POS 00000 NO0000 eum eub muss D X
16. EH E RESFR 5 5 e Specify M29 and G74 G84 at the same block G84 shows a sample for the following time sequence M29 NENNEN RTAP F76 3 ael MES e a O ras i 4E 4 Eri tl bribe tee RGTAP G61 0 FIN G4 3 E 5 l PA EA IERISEFRIS AS e The explanation of time sequence The spindle rotation operation means that the rotation axis is shifted to the position control mode namaly the servo spindle is needed to send a switch signal in position mode and check the position mode arrial signal of servo spindle 3 21 6 The cancellation of rigid tapping mode The rigid tapping mode is canceled by G80 Specify other canned cycles by G codes The other G codes of group 1 CNC resetting 103 SWIN OA U A O e 9 3 gt 2 O SWIN OA v e a fb 3 gt 2 ae GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual The signal descending of F76 3 along the signal with canceling the rigid tapping of PLC if the state RTCRG of parameter 025 is equal to 1 the system is then performed the next block without waiting for the rigid tapping mode signal which G61 0 is set to 0 When the state parameter 025 2 CRG 0 the time sequence is as follows G80780124 Gf f RTAP F76 3 SJE SEAR UH RGTAP G61 0 Hie eH E Ee oh aS When the state parameter 025 2 CRG 1 the time sequence is as follows G803X0 12H
17. G98 R plane i i G99 b oint Z 71 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 4 SWIN OA U o e E 3 3 2 o Related Explanation The P and L are disabled in this cycle but the P value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value For example A round inside groove rough milling is specified in canned cycle G111 see the following Figure G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO positioning at the rapid traverse rate G99 G111 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 W20 Q10 K10V10 F800 D1 Rough milling cycle inside the round groove D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 Canceling canned cycle returning from the point R plane M30 72 Chapter 3 G Command Note Set the 97 parameter value to one which is more than 10 by G110 and G111 it feeds helically along Z axis Rough milling machining can be directly performed for non groove workpiece See the following figure for helical cutting path Tool diameter 2r Tool Helical cutting lead parameter 97 Workpiece 3 15 2 12 Fine milling cycle inside full circle G112 G113 Format G112 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D F G113 Function A fine milling inside the full circle is finished with the specified radius value and direction the tool is retracted after the fine milling Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 G112 Fine milling cycle inside the full circle in CCW G113 Fine milling cycle inside the full circle in CW
18. Increment Rotary axis coordinate data Input type system range Metric 1 u IS B 99999 999 99999 999 deg inch input 0 1u IS C 9999 9999 9999 9999 deg Tool compensation data The unit of tool compensation data is determined by metric inch input system namely mm for metric input inch for inch input The range of tool compensation data is limited as 9999999 determined by inch input system and increment system It is smaller than command data Shown as follows Increment Tool Tool Input type system compensation compensation data unit data range Metric 1u IS B 9999 999 input 0 1u IS C mm G21 999 9999 Metric 1u IS B 999 9999 input 0 1u IS C inch G21 99 99999 e Screw pitch error compensation data The unit and range of linear axis screw pitch error compensation data is codetermined by machine tool type and increment system Shown as following table Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals Increment Linear axis Linear axis Machine system screw pitch error screw pitch error tool type compensation data compensation data unit range 5 Metric tool 1u IS B 0 001mm 255 255 o machine B 0 1u CIS C 0 0001mm 2550 2550 system 3 Inch tool 1u IS B 0 0001inch 255 255 machine 3 i 0 1u CIS C 0 00001inch 2550 2550 3 system 3 5 e Rotary axes are not involved in metric inch conversion The unit of rotary
19. O o o 3 3 Remarks G17 Offset plane selection command XY plane G18 Offset plane selection command XZ plane G19 Offset plane selection command YZ plane See the Fig 6 2 G40 Cutter radius compensation cancellation G41 Cutter radius compensation left along advancing direction G42 6 1 4 Compensation direction Tool compensation direction is determined according to Cutter radius compensation right along advancing direction the relative position of tool with work piece when the cutter radius compensation is applied See the Fig 6 2 7A TA 0 gt THE 0 0 gt Y Y C C R D G gt bd P V D Y b o CN y ms Nun NEL x Y G421537 INES x Y G4115 A 3377 pa f Ac DU 143 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 6 1 5 Caution e In initial status CNC is in cutter radius compensation cancellation mode CNC sets cutter radius compensation offset mode when the G41 or G42 command is executed At the beginning of the compensation the CNC reads two blocks in advance the next block is stored in the cutter radius compensation buffer memory when a block is performed When in Single mode two blocks are read after the end point of the 1 block is performed it is stopped Two blocks are read in advance in successive performance So there are a block bein
20. 126 Chapter 5 Macro Program 5 2 4 System Variables System variables are used to read and write CNC internal data such as tool length compensation value tool nose radius compensation value Some system variables can only be read c System variables are the basis of automatic control and general purpose machining program 3 development x y t e Interface signal The macro variable corresponding to interface signal is the 9 exchange signal between PLC and custom macro program Variable No Function 5 1000 101 A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a e 5 custom macro Used to read signal bit by bit A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a 1032 custom macro Used to read al 16 bits of a signal at one time 44100 2414 A 16 bit signal can be sent from das o a 5 custom macro Used to read and write signal bit by bit A 16 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a 1132 custom macro Used to read and write all 16 bits of a signal at one time A 32 bit signal can be sent from the PLC to a 1133 custom macro Used to read all 32 bits of a signal at one time Note Please refer to the GSK980TD PLC User Manual for the relationships between variables and F G signals e Tool compensation value tool compensation value can be read and written Compens Tool length compensation Cutter ation No compensation Geometric Wear H Geometric Wear D CH D 01 2201
21. Explanations When tapping feed is performing the speed override can not be adjusted when the retraction is 100 Chapter 3 G Command performed the speed override value is set by data parameter 084 when the data parameter 084 is set to O the override value is fixed as 100 The linear acceleration or deceleration constant value in tapping feed is set by data parameter 082 the linear acceleration or deceleration constant in retraction is set by data parameter 083 if the 083 is set to 0 the acceleration or deceleration constant in retaction is then set by data parameter 082 The start speed both tapping feed and retraction are set by data parameter 081 and the retraction distance d is set by data parameter 085 3 21 3 Address Explanation Specified Address Command address explanation content Hole position data X Y Specify the hole position by the absolute value or incremental R From the initial plane to the point distance Depth of a hole the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole Specify the dwell time at the bottom of the hole or at point R when a return is made The dwell does not perform when it is not input or the value is O Tool infeed value of peck tapping Aparture It indicates that the consecutive maching cycle of L holes are performed machining on this line segment from start the start position of block to XY data coordinate position The continued drilling may not perform if it is not
22. Insertion state insert blank automatically and deletion can be done can not be to separate words by pressing O inputted Blank can not be inserted Only input character O Special symbols Macro edit state f automatically can be inputted 6 1 5 Deletion of the character Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode 2 Press key to delete the character before the cursor press key to delete the character where the cursor locates S 9 o o t y 9 6 1 6 Modification of the character Cancel or delete the character and re enter new ones 6 1 7 Deletion of a single block This function is only applied to the block with a block No N command which is at the head of a line and followed by blocks which are divided by space Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode 2 Move the cursor to the head of the block to be deleted column 1 where N locates then press key Note If the block has no block No N key in N at the head of the block and move the cursor to N then press key 6 1 8 Deletion of the blocks It deletes all the content including the specified block from the current character where the cursor locates to the block with the specified No searching downward and the 221 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual specified block must has a block No PRG CONTENT SEG5 LOLs C 00008 CNC beees CNC
23. LE 1 The increment system is IS C 0 1U 0 The increment system is IS B 1U In different increment system different pulse output type enables different output speed Selected by bit ABPx of parameter NO 039 TAS TABA JABPZ ABPY ABK ABPx 1 The impulse mode of axis is AB phases v e le fb 3 3 2 0 The impulse mode of axis is impulse and direction 1 3 1 Speed of Increment Systems Speed putpuumoue 1u IS B 0 1u IS C Metric machine Inch machine Metric machine Inch machine system system system system mm min inch min mm min inch min Pulse direction 60 000 6 000 6 000 600 AB quadrature 240 000 24 000 24 000 2 400 phase 1 3 2 Unit of Increment Systems In different increment system the least input output increment varies with metric inch system The specific data is shown as follows 1 u IS B Least input Least command increment for input increment for output m 0 001 mm 0 001 mm Met Metric input G21 E putt 0 001 deg 0 001 deg means 0 0001 inch 0 001 mm system Inch input G20 0 001 deg 0 001 deg Inch 0 001 0 0001 inch i A Metric input G21 mm Shen machine 0 001 deg 0 001 deg C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE t i i system Inch input G20 0 0001 inch 0 0001 inch 0 001 deg 0 001 deg Ei fa
24. There are two kinds of modes for commanding axis offset one is absolute command the other is 3 incremental command The absolute command is programmed by coordinate value of the terminal 3 position by the axis movement The incremental command is directly programmed by the movement 3 value of the axis They are separately specified by G90 and G91 commands 3 Example amp Y End point T0 0 A HOOP Start point X 40 0 100 0 The above movement is programmed by absolute and incremental commands which is as follows G90 X40 0 Y70 0 or G91 X 60 0 Y40 0 3 17 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92 Function The workpiece coordinate system is set by setting the absolute coordinate in current position in the system It is also called floating coordinate system After the workpiece coordinate is set the coordinate value is input in absolute programming in this coordinate system till the new workpiece coordinate system is set by G92 Command explanation G92 which is a non modal G command X The new X axis absolute coordinate of current position Y The new Y axis absolute coordinate of current position Z The new Z axis absolute coordinate of current position Note In G92 command current coordinate value will be not changed if the X Y and Z are not input the program zero is set by the current coordinate value When the X Y or Z is not input the coordinate axis not input keeps on the original set value 3 18
25. c 3 D O D 9 Ss o gt interface 2 Tool life management display the 1 page The 1 page for tool life management interface displays the life data of the current tool and the tool group list that has been defined This page is mainly used for monitoring the tool life data by group units The data monitoring of each tool in a group group number setting and tool life management data are displayed in the following page 179 C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK T LIFE MANAG 00003 NO00000 Cur T State Tool Group Life Used Mode State Defi Group MDI so000 TOO Hag i Display explanation lt Current Tool State gt It displays the life data of the current tool which is being used Mode It displays the counting unit of life data 0 minute 1 times State It displays the tool status O Unused 1 Using 2 Over 3 Skip lt Defined Group No gt It only displays the group numbers which have been defined and lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E the undefined are not shown The group number with the backlight means that all the tool life in that group has expired ii Deletion of all defined data CANCEL G In this page press keys it may delete all the data which have been defined including group number group tool numbers and life values etc Tool life management interface the 2nd page The 2 page
26. euin oA D 2 O te 9 3 3 J te SWIN OA v 3 fo e o E 3 5 e 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 5 MACRO PROGRAM GSK980MDa provides macro programs which is similar to high level language Variable assignment arithmetic operation logical judgment and conditional branch can be realized through custom macro program It is in favor of the programming for special parts lessens the complex operation and simplifies the custom program Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms However macro program allows variable assignment arithmetic operation logical judgment and conditional branch which makes it easier to program the same machining process C Macro program body P 09011 Pd X 1Z 4 G65P9011A1015 0 10 and 5 respectively call macro EN program and define variables 1 Variables 1 and 4 can be and 4 used to replace the unknown movement distance It is easy to machine the screw holes distributed in circles shown in the figure above After a macro program used in circular holes is programmed and edited it can be performed if the NC system has circular hole machining function By the following command programming personnel can use circular holes function G65 PpRrAaBbKk p Macro program number of circular holes r Radius a Start angle of the hole b Angle of holes intervals k Holes number In this way users can impr
27. 01811 Initial speed of linear acceleration deceleration in rigid tapping Setting range 05000 Unit mm min Acc amp dec time constant in using CS function 0 8 2 Linear time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms 0 8 3 i i Time constant in rigid tapping tool retract Setting range 0 4000 Unit ms 082 setting value is used when it is set to 0 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract 0 override is set to 100 Setting range 0 200 0 override is set to 100 i Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping high speed standard Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm M euinjoA One rotaton increment of the 4th axis One rotaton increment of 5th axis Setting range 1 9999999 Unit 0 001deg gt o p D et E 2 0 1 i i Amount of valid keys pressed simultaneously Setting range 2 5 Define the name of the 4 axis A 65 B 66 C 67 Define the name of the 5 axis A 65 B 66 C 67 Setting range 65 67 65 A 66 B 67 C 327 M eunjoA gt a p A D et 5 GGG CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND STEPS The trial run methods and steps at initial power on for this GSK980MDa are described in this chapter The corresponding operation can be performed after the debugging by the following steps 4 1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limit This GSK980MDa sys
28. 101 ASIN 103 Note 1 When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 0 the output range is 270 90 When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 1 the output range is 90 90 Note 2 Arcsine operand J cannot exceed the range 1 1 otherwise an alarm is issued WnjoA U e e 9 3 3 e 18 Arccosine 1 COS J unit deg G65 H33 P I QJ example G65 H33 P 101 Q 103 101 COS 103 19 Arccosine ACOS J G65 H34 P1 QJ example G65 H34 P 101 Q 103 101 ACOS 103 Note 1 Arccosine operand J cannot exceed the range 1 1 otherwise an alarm is issued 20 Tangent Zl TAN ZJ deg G65 H35 Pil QJ example G65 H35 PH101 Q 103 101 TAN 103 Note J cannot be equal to Ktr Tr 2 K 0 1 2 3 otherwise the result is wrong 21 Arctangent Zl ATAN J K unit deg G65 H36 PI Q J R K example G65 H36 P 101 Q 103 R3 101 ATAN 103 3 Note 1 When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 0 the output range is 0 360 When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 1 the output range is 180 180 22 Conversion from BCD to BIN 1 BIN J G65 H41 P I Q J example G65 H41 P 101 Q 102 101 BIN 102 23 Conversion from BIN to BCD 1 BCD J G65 H42 P I Q J example G65 H42 P 101 Q 102 101 BCD 102 24 Unconditional branch G65 H80 Pn Pn sequence number example G65 H80 P120 Go to N120 block 25 E
29. T letter O up down moving keys on pages program content edit to the block where the execution stops last time Switch to the pages coordinate amp program machine zero Perform machine zero operation After machine zero is performed press conversion key It prompts at the bottom of the screen Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time It will recover the mode before power down Y N gt Input Y Ensure that tools moving path is in a safe range at this moment Coordinates start move it locates to the block where it stops last time and recovers the mode before power down 5 Switch to auto mode press cycle start key to execute the block continuously where it stops last time 7 4 2 Interruption at power down on DNC auto operation Operation method Auto lt o c 3 D F O Ke 1 9 a o 3 1 Switch to coordinate program machine zero return after power on 2 Execute machine zero return 3 After machine zero return is finished press conversion key It prompts at the bottom of the screen Locate to the block automatically where it stops last time It will recover the mode before power down Y N Input Y Make sure tools moving path is in a safe range at this moment Coordinates start move it locates to the block where it stops last time and recovers the mode before power down Switch to the highlighted block when DNC CNC power down Search for the interrupt
30. 2 te G02 R G18 Xx Z Y p G03 IK Arc interpolation in YZ plane X axis linear interpolation linkage R G02 E G19 Y ZX Fo G03 IK Function Only two axes of circular interpolation can be linked for controlling tool movement along with the arc on the selected plane in any time If the 3rd axis is specified simultaneously in linear interpolation mode it will be linked by linear interpolation type to constitute helical interpolation G02 movement path is CW from start to end points G03 movement path is CCW from start to end points 36 Chapter 3 G Command Explanation G02 and G03 are modal G commands R is arc radius the value range are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm When the circle center is specified by address J and K they are corresponding with the X Y and Z axes separately SWIN OA is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in the X axis direction I center point coordinate X X coordinate of arc start point the value range are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm E a o e o 3 3 5 e J is the difference between the center point and the arc start point in the Y axis direction J center point coordinate Y Y coordinate of circle arc start point the value range are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm K is the difference between the center point and circle start point in the Z axis direction K center point coordinate Z Z coordinate of circle start poi
31. Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals Y axis machine zero return type B Z axis machine zero return type C Z axis machine zero return type B 4th axis machine zero return type C 4th axis machine zero return type B 5th axis machine zero return type C 5th axis machine zero return type B LLL TEST ze xz Tz Dux The deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal The deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis are connected independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required The deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal The deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis are connected independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required The deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PCZ of Z axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal The deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PCZ of Z a
32. Command Fun 3 axes hold on at the initial position the next block continued X axis reference point return Y and Z axes still in the original position Y axis reference point return X and Z axes still in the original position Z axis reference point return X and Y axes still in the original position X and Z axes reference point return simultaneously Y axis in the origind G28 X and Y axes reference point return simultaneously Y axis in the origing G28 Y and Z axes reference point return simultaneously X axis in the origing X Y Z G28 X Z X Y X G28 X Y and Z reference point return simultaneously Process for com mand action See the figure 3 10 1 Positioning from current position to intermediate point of command axis at the rapid traverse rate From point A to B 2 Positioning to the reference point from intermediate point at the rapid traverse rate From point B to R 3 If the machine tool is unlocked the zero return indicator lights up when the reference point return is finished 43 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual R Reference point O A Start point S uc c ken DA CO B Intermediate point Fig 3 10 Note v 3 o e Q o 3 3 5 e After power on if G28 is executed prior to the manual machine zero return the process of G28 machine zero return should be consistent with manual machine
33. J example G65 H23 P 101 Q1 2359 101 1 2359 101 1 12 Rounding up Zl FUP J G65 H24 P I QZJ 13 Rounding down 1 FIX J G65 H25 PH QJ With CNC when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer Conversely when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Be particular careful when handling negative numbers Example suppose that 1 1 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 14 Natural logarithm 1 LN FJ G65 H26 Pil QJ example G65 H26 P 101 Q 102 101 LN 102D Note when the antilogarithm j is zero or smaller otherwise an alarm is issued 15 Exponential function 1 EXP J G65 H27 PH QJ example G65 H27 PH101 Q 102 101 EXP 102 133 SWIN OA a o e Q o 3 3 5 e C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 16 Sine 1 SIN J unit deg G65 H31 P l Q J example G65 H31 P 101 Q 103 101 SIN 103 17 Arcsine 1 ASIN J G65 H32 Pil QJ example G65 H32 P 101 Q 103
34. Setting range 7 255 3 2 6 Tool function M eunjoA LIFJ 1 Tool life management group skip valid 0 Tool life management group skip invalid MDITL 1 Tool life management valid in MDI mode 0 Tool life management invalid in MDI mode LIFC 1 Tool life counting type 2 by times 0 Tool life counting type 1 by times NRC 1 Tool nose radius compensation valid 0 Tool nose radius compensation invalid TLIF 1 Tool life management valid 0 Tool life management invalid Es d L TMANL 1 Manual tool change for T code 0 Auto tool change for T code Total tool number selection gt o p D et E Setting range 1 32 319 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 2 7 Edit and Display PROD 1 Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is programming position 0 Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is position involving tool offset A ORT ORZ DRY OR DISP 1 Enter absolute page after power on 0 Enter relative page after power on O71 EBCL 1 Program end sign EOB displays semicolon 0 Program end sign EOB displays asterisk Re L2 L1 LO Interface language selection Language L2 L1 LO Chinese 0 0 0 English 0 0 1 lt Frence 0 1 0 2 Spanish 0 1 1 2 Germen 1 0 0 Italy 1 0 1 Russian 1 1 0 Korean 1 1 1 gt m p A D et O 5 Block No i
35. The spindle speed is controlled by S command there are two ways to control spindle speed for GSK980MDa Spindle speed switching value control mode the Soo 2 digit command value command is processed by PLC program for exporting the switching value signal to machine so that the step speed change of the spindle is achieved Spindle speed analog voltage control mode the actual spindle speed is specified by the S 4 digit command value the NC outputs the 0 10V analog voltage signal to the spindle servo device or inverter for achieving the stepless speed regulating of the spindle 2 2 1 Spindle Speed Switch Value Control The spindle speed is on switching value control when the BIT4 of bit parameter NO 001 is set to 0 One block only has one S command The CNC alarm occurs when there are two or more S commands displayed in block When the S command shares the same block with the command word the performance sequence is defined by PLC program For details refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder This GSK980MDa milling machine is used for machining control when the spindle speed switching value is controlled The time sequence and logic for S command should be referred by the manual issued by the machine tool builder The following S command is defined by GSK980MDa standard PLC for reference only 19 WnjoA U e e 9 3 3 O GSE G GSK CNC G
36. When the tapping operation 3 is being performed the linear acceleration or deceleration constant value is set by the data parameter 082 when the tapping operation 5 is performed the linear acceleration constant value is set by data parameter 083 if the data parameter 083 is se to 0 the linear acceleration deceleration time constant in operation 5 is set by the data parameter 082 3 21 2 Peck Rigid Tapping Code format High speed standard peck left handed rigid tapping G74 X Y Z R_P_F lI L QC High speed standard peck right handed rigid tapping G84 X_Y_Z_R_P_F I LQ C Code function When the peck tapping is performed in rigid tapping due to chips sticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance in such cases the preferable tapping can be performed by the peck rigid tapping 99 SWIN OA E 3 o e 9 El 3 5 To ETT N v e ae g 3 gt 2 te C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE High speed peck rigid tapping When the RTPCP of state parameter No 025 is set to 1 the high speed peck rigid tapping cycle is selected After positioning along the X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R then position to the place where specifies by C From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed then the tool is retracted by distance d the retraction speed can be overridden When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped
37. c 3 D F O D 9 Ss o gt ALM NO 1000 BIT ADDRES A0000 0 Illegal M code MDI s0000 TOO HOG Page as the cursor locates at the alarm No 1000 2 CNC ALARM It displays the numbers of CNC alarm PLC alarm and the current CNC alarm No It can display 24 CNC alarm No together The details for the respective alarm No can be viewed by moving the cursor The page is as follows 181 lt e c 3 D F O x 9 m o E GSE 182 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CNC ALARM 00003 N00000 CNC ALM 2 PLC ALM 0 PLC WARN 6 B 431 CTR WARN 432 Y axis driver is not ready MDI ALM 50000 TOO Hae Page as the cursor locates at the alarm No 432 ALARM 3 WARN LOG Press LI key to enter Alarm interface then press it again to enter the WARN LOG page which records the latest alarm message including alarm date alarm time alarm No and alarm content 200 pieces warn log messages can be viewed by or key See the following figure WARN LOG PAGE 1 00003 NO000060 2009 12 28 10 52 54 43248 1 00003 CNC NO0000 Y axis driver is not ready 2009 12 28 10 52 54 431 1 00003 CNC NO0000 K axis driver is not ready 2009 12 28 10 52 38 431 1 00003 CNC NO0000 K axis driver is not ready MDI 50000 Tee Hae D Sequence of warn log the latest alarm log message is shown on the forefront of the 1 page and th
38. 1 4 1 Additional Axes in Current Increment System When IS B or IS C is selected the speed and range of additional axes are the same as described in 1 3 1 4 2 Additonal Axes in IS A Increment System When IS A is selected the maximum speed of additional axes can reach 100 times of that of IS B and IS C The relevant data and parameters ranges are the same as that of the current basic axes increment system Refer to section 1 3 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes CHAPTER 2 MSTF CODES 2 1 M Codes Miscellaneous Function s The M codes are composed by code address M and 1 2 or 4 digits after the codes M is used 5 for controlling the program execution or outputting M code to PLC pal M L__ Codes value 00 99 9000 9999 leading zero can be omitted Address M98 M99 and M9000 M9999 are independently processed by CNC and the M codes are not output to PLC The function of M29 is fixed namely to output M codes to PLC The M02 and M03 are defined as program END codes by NC meanwhile it also outputs M codes to PLC for the I O control spindle OFF cooling OFF control etc The PLC program can not change the meaning of the above mentioned codes when the M98 M99 and M9000 M9999 are regarded as program CALL codes and the M02 and M30 are regarded as program END codes The codes of other M codes are all output to PLC program for specifying the code function please refer to the manual issued by machine tool manufacturer One
39. 198P1002 198P1003 198P1004 198P1005 198P1005 130 199 199 199 199 Single nestification Double nestification Triplicate nestification Quadruple nestification Fig 2 3 Subprogram nestifications 17 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 O GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 2 1 6 Macro program call M9000 M9999 Format M LE 9000 9999 Command function Call the macro program which is corresponded by the command value O9000 09999 Macro program Program 09000 09999 is special space obligated for the machine tool manufacturer for using editing and achieving special function subprogram which is called macro program Two level operation authority is needed when editing the program 09000 09999 the user can not modify or run the macro program but the macro calling command if his authority is 3 5 level So the M9000 M9999 commands are invalid in MDI mode 2 1 7 M command defined by standard PLC ladder diagram The M commands other than the abovementioned commands M02 M30 M98 M99 M9000 M9999 are defined by PLC The M commands are defined by standard PLC hereinafter This GSK980MDa milling machine is used for machine control About the function meaning control time sequence and logic etc of the M command refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder M command specified by standard PLC ladder diagram Command Function Pr
40. 2001 2601 2401 02 2202 2002 2602 2402 03 2203 2003 2603 2403 31 2231 2031 2631 2431 32 2232 2032 2632 2432 127 CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e Automatic operation control The control state of automatic operation can be changed Variable Variable Single block Completion of an lt No value auxiliary function o 0 Enabled To be awaited E 1 Disabled To be awaited D 3003 2 Enabled Not to be awaited 3 Disabled Not to be awaited Note 1 When the power is turned on the value of this variable is 0 Note 2 When single block stop is enabled G46 1 is 1 the state of 3003 can change the execution of single block stop Note 3 When single block stop is disabled G46 1 is 0 single block stop operation is not performed even if the single block switch is set to ON Note 4 When a wait for the completion of auxiliary function M S and T functions is not specified program execution proceeds to the next block before completion of auxiliary functions Also distribution completion signal DEN is not output v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e Variable No Variable Feed hold Feedrate Exact stop value override 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled 2 Enabled Disabled Enabled 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled reus 4 Enabled Enabled Disabled 5 Disabled Enabled Disabled 6 Enabled Disabled Disabled 7
41. 3 3 2 te A The directions of two paths are different 180 Fig 6 19b Machining interference 2 2 If there is no interference actually but it is treated as interference 1 The groove depth less than the compensation value Tool cent th Programmed path iS Fig 6 20 Exceptional case 1 treated as interference There is no interference actually but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter radius compensation path The cutter stops and the alarm occurs 2 The groove depth less than compensation value Programmed path Tool center path E AA Fig 6 21 Exceptional case 2 treated as interference There is no interference actually but program direction in block B is opposite to the cutter radius compensation path The cutter stops and the alarm occurs 155 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 6 2 6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily If the following commands G92 G28 G29 coordinate command selection G54 G59 and 5 canned cycle are specified in compensation mode the compensation vector is temporarily cancelled 3 and then automatically restored after these commands are executed Now the temporary ud compensation vector cancellation is different to the compensation cancellation mode tool is moved to v the specified point by compensation vector cancellation from the intersection And the tool moves to o the intersection directly when the compensation mod
42. 3 i gt oO t R ct 9 5 PRG CONTENT SEG2 COL 4 C 00008 CNC beees CNC PROGRAM C40 G49 G80 G3 1 20 G4 X5 G1 X0 Y20 ZO F1000 K 20 YO KO Y 20 Z 10 K20 YO Z 20 KS Y5 Z 50 M99 FIND F1000 EDIT 50000 TOO Hae DELETE 3 NN and all programs from I 20 where the cursor locates to F1000 It displays as follows 223 lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K PRG CONTENT SEG2 COL 5 C 00008 CNC Do008 CNC PROGRAM C40 G49 G80 aa rs K 20 YO KO Y 20 Z 10 K20 YO Z 20 KS Y5 Z 50 M99 N EDIT 50000 TOO Hae Note 1 If the specified character is not found or the specified character is located before the current cursor the prompt of Srch fail will be displayed If there are multiple same characters specified downward it defaults the nearest one to the current cursor Note 2 If the command address is input both the address and the command value behind it are Deleted 6 2 Program annotation To facilitate the user to search manage and edit program the system provides program name annotation and block annotation functions 6 2 1 Annotation for program name The program annotation can be added in the brackets behind it For exa mple program 00005 is used for machining bolt holes the annotation can be added in program contents as follows 1 Select edit mode a
43. 3 0 1u IS C Least input Least command M increment for input increment for v output 8 Metric input 0 0001 mm Metric machine 9 Metric machine G21 sym 3 Scan 0 0001 deg gt Inch input 0 00001 inch e G20 0 0001 deg 0 0001 Inch hi Metric input mm MS UL Inch machine G21 0 0001 deg y system d Inch input 0 00001 inch G20 0 0001 deg Least input increment for input is metric or inch can be set by G20 or G21 Least command increment for output is metric or inch is determined by machine tool and set by bit SCW of parameter NO 004 1 3 3 Data Ranges of Increment System Limited by pulse output frequency the data ranges may vary due to different increment system Increment system Command data input ranges Data format Metric input 99999 999 99999 999 mm 5 3 1u IS B G21 99999 999 99999 999 deg 5 3 Inch input 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch 4 4 G20 9999 999 9999 999 deg 4 3 Metric input 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm 4 4 0 1u IS C G21 9999 9999 9999 9999 deg 4 4 Inch input 999 99999 999 99999 inch 3 5 G20 999 9999 999 9999 deg 3 4 Note 5 3 in the table above indicates 5 integers and 3 decimals Other data are alike 1 3 4 Data Ranges and Unit of Increment System Speed parameter Machine tool types decide the units of linear axes speed i e mm min for metric machine system is 0 1inch min for
44. 344 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation When the screw pitch error origin is set to 0 The offset value for the 1 section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list Ne001 the offset value for the 2 section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list Ne002 and the offset value for the Nth section is set in screw pitch compensation parameter list Ne 000 N The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of screw pitch error origin point it begins to compensate the position Ne001 in the offset table from the machine zero So the screw pitch error compensation can only be performed in the positive moving of the machine zero coordinate system 0 1 2 3 MIT Em c6 o Machine Coordinate system 0 10 000 20 000 Reference Point 30 000 gt The position No 000 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point i e screw pitch error origin 0 the offset point 1 corresponds to a point 10 000 positive moving from this reference point and there is a compensation point from this point every 10 000 distance The 127th compensation point is the offset value at position 1270 000 Therefore at compensation point 1 set an compensation value moving from 0 to 10 000 at offset point 2 set an offset value moving from 10 000 to 20 000 At offset point N set an offset value moving from N 1 x offset clearance to N x offset clearance Above is the example of following offset interval errors
45. 4 1 scale value for MPG 5 Step amount value 6 6 current coordinate value 42 Chapter 3 G Command Note 1 The G code for inch or metric conversion when the power is turned on is the same as that at the power off Note 2 Changing G20 and G21 are unallowed during programming Or the alarm occurs Note 3 When the unit systems between the machine and input are different the max error is 0 5 of the min move unit and the error is not be cumulated Note 4 As the inch input G20 and the metric input G21 switches each other the offset should be suited to the reset of the input unit SWIN OA 3 8 Reference Point Return G28 Format G28X Y Z Function The middle point position specified by X Y and Z is reached from the start point at the rapid traverse rate then it returns to the reference point Explanation G28 is a non modal G command v A o e E 3 3 2 O X The absolute coordinate of middle point in X axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in X axis is indicated by G91 Y The absolute coordinate of middle point in Y axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in Y axis is indicated by G91 Z The absolute coordinate of middle point in Z axis is indicated by G90 the middle point increment against current point in Z axis is indicated by G91 One of the command address X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted as follows
46. Circular to linear 4 Circular to Circular G42 Tool nose center path C42 Toolse ener pah A M GA1 Programmed path S Programmed path Fig 6 13c Circular to linear Fig 6 13d Circular to circular compensation direction changed compensation direction changed 5 When there is no intersection if the compensation is normally performed When changing the offset direction from block A to block B using G41 and G42 if the intersection of the offset path is not required create the vector vertical to block B at the start point of block B i Linear to linear Programmed path Tool center path Programmed path in G41 r Tool center path NAAA A seer NOS ME L Fig 6 14a Linear to linear there is no intersection Compensation direction changed ii Linear to circular 151 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Programmed path Ee 642 G41 Le 4 Cu A Tool nose center path SWIN OA v 3 o e o 3 3 5 e Ds Fig 6 14b Linear to circular there is no intersection Compensation direction changed iii Circular to circular D E poem ae Tool center path 4 ool center pa 5 G42 Programmed path G03 G41 G42 vA G02 G41 G42 Ed f Fig 6 14c Circular to circular there is no intersection Compensation direction changed 6 2 4 Tool operation in offset cancellation mode When the G40 command is employed in block in compensation mode the
47. Command path figure Tool positions at the rapid traverse rate independently for each axis Usually the tool path is not linear 33 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Start point Q O Non linear S NS interpolation positon c N 3 o x m End point Fig 3 1 X Y and Z axes are separately set by the system data parameter No 059 No 060 and No 061 at their rapid traverse rate the actual traverse rate can be modified by the rapid override keys on the machine panel The rapid traverse acceleration or deceleration time constant of X Y and Z axes are separately set by the system data parameter No 064 No 065 and No 066 Example tool traverses from point A to point B See Fig 3 2 U o e 9 3 3 2 Q Tool Point A 40 350 80 Fig 3 2 G90 GO X120 Y253 Z30 absolute coordinate programming G91 GO X160 Y 97 Z 50 relative coordinate programming 3 3 Linear Interpolation GO1 Format GO1X Y ZF Function Movement path is a straight line from start to end points Explanation G01 which is modal G command The value range of X Y and Z are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm X Y and Z axes which one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted 34 Chapter 3 G Command When one of them is omitted it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are consistent The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the sa
48. If the machine zero is not fixed on the machine machine zero operation B C D is unallowed Note2 While the coordinate is moved out from the machine zero the machine zero finish indicators go out Note3 After the machine zero operation the cancellation of the tool length offset for the 241 lt o c 3 D F O Ke gt 9 a o E GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CNC is set by the BIT7 of the bit parameter No 22 Note4 See details in the 3rd part INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION for the parameters concerning with the machine zero Note 5 When machine zero return bit parameter N2011 ZNIK determines whether axis movement is locked automatically Note 6 Only machine zero D mode can be used for rotary axis 242 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore CHAPTER 9 DATA SETTING BACKUP and RESTORE 9 1Data Setting 9 1 1 Switch setting In SWITCH SETTING page the ON OFF state of PARM SWT parameter switch PROG SWT program switch AUTO SEG auto sequence No can be displayed and set the figure is as follows SWITCH SETTING 00000 NO0000 gt PARM SWT OFF ON PROG SWT OFF ON AUTO SEG OFF ON lt 2 c 3 D O o D E Ss o gt REF 50000 TOO Hae 1 Press key to enter the Setting interface then press SWITCH SETTING page key to enter 2 Press tt or y key to move the cursor to the item to be set Dm
49. In this case check the rising edge of PC signal 4 8 The Function of Cs Axis General The spindle is treated as the servo feed axis to rotate and position by the position movement command Run speed is degree min it can be interpolated together with other feed axes to machine a contour curve Increment system the least input increment 0 01deg The least command increment 0 01deg Explanation NC has two control modes for the spindle 111 euin oA D 2 O te 9 3 3 2 ia C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE e Spindle speed control mode The spindle speed can be controlled by the speed command Namely analog voltage e Spindle contour control mode It is also called CS contour control The spindle position can be controlled by the position command Namely position pulse So NC is required the spindle servo control unit has two control modes for the control of WnjoA the spindle motor e When NC is at the speed control mode for the control of the spindle the spindle servo control unit can receive a speed command issued from NC to control the rotation speed of spindle motor e When NC is at the contour control mode for the control of the spindle the spindle U e e 9 3 3 2 O servo drive unit also can receive a position command issued from NC to control the motor operates to a specified position Position command Position pulse Speed command Anal
50. J30 1H1 Format G65 must be specified before any argument Mixture of argument specifications and Il The CNC internally identifies argument specification and Il If a mixture of argument specification and Il is specified the type of argument specification specified later take precedence Example G65 P9001 Al 2 B2 0 L33 I4 D5 variable 1 12 2 2 0 3 Null H4 3 3 5 Null 6 Null 7 4 e Modal call G66 ze 9 Once G66 is issued to When both l4 and D5 arguments are commanded forp k ifvin l variable 7 in this example the later D5 is valid NS movement along axes is executed This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call Note The format functions and argument specification of G65 are identical with that of the G65 non modal call Refer to the introduction of G65 for detailed description Modal call nesting Modal calls can be nested by specifying another G66 code during 118 a modal call Explanation 1 In the specified G66 block only argument is passed and macro modal call will not be executed 2 Macro modal call can only be executed in the blocks with G00 G01 G02 and G03 3 No macro program can be called in a block which contains a code such as miscellaneous function that does not involve movement along an axis 4 G65 and G66 should not be specified at the same time 5 Multiple macro programs cannot be called in G66 block 6 As with G65 G66 should be specified prior t
51. MACRRO interface AER There are 25 pages in this interface which can be shown by pressing or keys In Macro page there are 600 No 100 No 199 and No 500 No 999 macro variables which can be specified by macro command or set by keypad Please refer to macro chapter 5 program for related information MACRO 09003 NO00000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 1900 Null 108 Null 116 Null 101 Null 109 Null 117 Null 102 Null 110 Null 118 Null 103 Null III Null 119 Null 104 Null 112 Null 120 Null 105 Null 113 Null 121 Null 106 Null 114 Null 122 Null 107 Null 115 Null 123 Null NO 1600 EDIT 50000 TOO Hae 3 Tool life management Note The tool change signal TLCH F064 0 should be added for PLC when using this function 178 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Ladder example F064 0 AS Tool life alarm Using of tool life management function Parameter No 002 0 is used as the symbol for tool life management function 0 unused 1 used if the function is not used the relevant tool life management page is not shown Tool life management display interface OFFSET The tool life management is controlled by om key which is displayed in the third sub interface and it is composed by 2 pages paging by page keys Interface is shown by pressing ome key repeatedly Offset Macro interface interface Paging Paging Paging Tool i manage ment Interface needed
52. Machine zero return G29 Return from reference point G30 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point return Non modal G G31 00 Skip function a G92 Coordinate system set STIS G65 G00 initial G command Macro Rapid traverse G01 Linear interpolation G02 Circular interpolation CW G03 Circular interpolation CCW G73 Peck drilling cycle G74 Left hand counter tapping cycle G80 initial G command Canned cycle cancellation Modal G G81 Drilling cycle spot drill cycle command G82 Drilling cycle counter bore cycle G83 Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle G85 Boring cycle G86 Drilling cycle G88 Boring cycle 27 6 GSE WnjoA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual G89 Boring cycle G110 Circular groove inner rough milling CW G111 Circular groove inner rough milling CCW G112 Circular groove inner fine milling CW G113 Circular groove inner fine milling CCW G114 Excircle finish milling CW G115 Excircle finish milling CCW G134 Rectangle groove rough milling CW G135 Rectangle groove rough milling CCW G136 Rectangle groove inner finish milling CW G137 Recta
53. P I I 9 wl i i 3 PointR 9 gt T Refer to the explanation for canned cycle command 3 20 Chamfering Function A straight line or an arc is inserted into two figures this is called Chamfering function The tool can be smoothly transferred from one figure to another GSK980MD owns two chamfering functions one is linear chamfering and the other is arc chamfering 3 20 1 Linear chamfering The linear chamfering is that a straight line is inserted between figures of the straight lines the arcs as well as the straight line and arc The command address for linear chamfering is L The data followed by command address L is the length of chamfering straight line The linear chamfering should be employed in the G01 G02 or G03 command Linear to linear Format G01 IP_L_ IP is axis movement command G01 IP Function A straight line is inserted into interpolation between 2 straight lines The straight line to be inserted The tool path without chamfering function Bisector ofthe angle 93 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e Linear to circular Format G01 IP L G02 003 IP R I_ J K Function A straight line is inserted between straight line and arc interpolation SWIN OA Arc tangent Bisector of angle U e e 9 3 3 O e Circular to circular Format G02 G03 IP R_ L J K L G02 G03 IP R I_ J K Function A straight line is inser
54. Set the BIT3 of the bit parameter No 001 to 1 and press key to enter the MPG mode it displays as following RELATIVE POS 00696 Nag 00000 NOOOOO m X 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 PART CNT 2 HNDL 20009 Tal HOO F 160 5 b Msg HNDL INC 8 681 lt o c 3 O F jo Le O E o 5 FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 106 SPI OVRI 100 The handwheel figure is as follows The handwheel figure 4 2 1 Increment selection Ow era SL x000 Proc Press 0 nae 1 00 TAM Loy to select the move increment the increment will be shown in the page 208 Chapter 4 Mpg Step Operation RELATIVE POS 00696 NHG 00000 NOOOOO m X 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 HNDL 0009 Tel Hae Fol6e 5 b Msg HNDL INC 56 661 ACT F E FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 106 SPI OVRI 100 4 2 2 Moving axis and direction selection In MPG mode press x key to select the corresponding axis The page is as follows Other axises are the same RELATIVE POS 06648 NOAH 00000 NO0O0000 so cas cs os X 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 PART CNT 2 HNDL X AXIS 0009 TOI Hae The handwheel feed direction is defined by its rotation direction Generally the handwheel CW is lt o c 9 m O jo 4 5 o 9 F l 5 b M38 HNDL INC 6 001 ADT F 8 FED OVRI 158 RAP OVRI 1885 SPI OVRI 160 for positive feed and CCW is for neg
55. Setting range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 unit bit s 321 M eunjoA gt o p D et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 2 10 Machine zero return DECI 1 Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return EA 995 MSS ELA E A ZNIK 1 Direction keys locked during zero return homing continues to end by pressing direction key once 0 Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return ae E AS AE AER ZM5 1 5th zero return type C 0 5th zero return type B ZM4 1 4th zero return type C 0 4th zero return type B ZMZ 1 Z zero return type C 0 Z zero return type B ZMY 1 Y zero return type C M eunjoA 0 Y zero return type B ZMX 1 X zero return type C 0 X zero return type B ZC5 1 The deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PC5 of 5th axis in parallel connection a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return gt o p A D et 5 0 The deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PC5 of 5th axis are connected independently the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZC4 1 The deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4 axis in parallel connection a proximity switch acting as both the
56. Tool nose radius compensation valid 0 Tool nose radius compensation invalid TLIF 1 Tool life management valid 0 Tool life management invalid kkk kkk PCOM kkk kkk kkk D R kkk EI Tes PCOMP 1 Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid DIR 1 Tool offset D is diameter value 0 Tool offset D is radius value RDRN 1 In GOO dry run mode speed feedrate x speed of dry run M eunjoA gt o p D et E 0 G00 speed rapid override x rapid tranverse speed DECI 1 Deceleration signal high level for machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal low level for machine zero return 299 M euinjoA gt o p A D et 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual PROD 1 Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page is programming position 0 Relative coordinate displayed in POSITION page involving tool compensation SCW 1 Inch output inch system valid after repower 0 Metric output metric system valid after repower The functions of metric and inch system There are two kinds of input and output units for CNC numerical control system metric unit millimeter mm and English unit inch Output increement unit is set by Bit0 SCW of bit parameter N2004 in GSK980MDa system SCW2 0 indicates that minimum command increment parameter and screw pitch values are in metric units SCW 1 indicates that minimum command increment parameter and
57. XIGNHddV gt a y e Z a GskK C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System 120 The read only variables in macro statement cannot be written 121 The value assigned to system variable cannot be null 122 P value is not specified to G65 or G66 or H calculation is not specified by G65 123 G65 H_ format is wrong 124 Illegal H command is specified in G65 125 Proper operands and number are not specified in macro 126 Alarm number specified by G65 H99 is beyond range P 0 99 127 Operand is not integer to convert into binary form in macro statement 128 Operand is not binary number in macro statement 129 Radius compensation is in pre read mode thus correct macro variable is not available 131 validate the rotary axis before using CS axis 132 Operand value is too large in macro statement 205 K value is undefined 206 value is undefined 207 value is too small 208 J value is undefined 209 J value is too small 210 U value is too large or I J is too small 211 J value is too large 212 K value is too small 213 U value is less than tool radius 214 J is too small or K is too large which result in overcut 215 During continuous rectangular drilling J value is not specified or the end point and start point of the first side is identical which makes it impossible to identify a rectangle 21
58. Y adress o 10 SPO gt 40 SP1 26 SP2 27 ZSL gt 8 ARST 12 VP m 20 ZP L 9 SAR X adress 21 COIN 44 VPO Metal shell Fig 2 19 Connection of spindle to DAPOS3 2 3 7 SVC Signal explanation The analog spindle interface SVC can output 0 10V voltage its interior signal circuit is shown in Fig 2 20 282 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals Fig 2 20 SVC Signal circuit 2 4 Connection to Spindle Encoder 2 4 1 Spindle encoder interface definition P MPA e 15 GND Name Explanation y e 14 GND MPA MPA Encode A phase pulse 6 MPB e 13 VCC 5 MPB e 12 VCC MPB MPB Encode B phase pulse 4 MPZ 11 GND MPZ MPZ Encode Z phase pulse 3 MPZ e 10 i gt Fig 2 21 CN21 Encode interface DB15 male socket IM eunjoA 2 4 2 Signal Explanation gt m p D et o 5 MPZ MPZ MPB MPB MPA MPA are the encoder Z B A phase differential input signals respectively which are received by 26LS32 MPB MPB MPA MPA are normal square wave of phase shift 90 with the maximum signal frequency less than 1MHz the encoder pulses for GSK980MDa are set by data parameter No 109 whose range is from 100 to 5000 Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 22 n A B C MPn MPn AM26L832 F1g 2 22 Encode signal circuit 2 4 3 Connection of spin
59. and then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction The tool retracts to the point R the spindle stops If it is G98 state rapidly move to the initial position the Figure is shown below G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 D d BLE BE BS i d EBB EE Bg QNS ro TREE Cone pg A AER p EMERE pa Aa ie Wa 2a Q 1 d a al d Q 2 d 2 Q 3 o 3 L Zi Standard peck rigid tapping When the RTPCP of state parameter No 025 is set to 1 the standard peck rigid tapping cycle is selected After positioning along the X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to point R then position to the place where specifies by C From point R cutting is performed with depth Q depth of cut for each cutting feed then the tool is retracted by distance d the retraction speed can be overridden The position is performed from point R to a distance d from the end of the last cutting which is where cutting is restarted and the cutting feed is performed When point Z has been reached the spindle is stopped then rotated in the reverse direction for retraction The tool retracts to the point R the spindle stops If it is G98 state rapidly move to the initial position the Figure is shown below G74 G84 G98 G74 G84 G99 i d A FEA BES i d 45 FFAA E B UE y HO O a gt z patas EAR fir d H EME y EMER y T TA xp i Q al Q al 2 Q Q H ag Q Q 4 Zu ZA
60. et O 5 M euinjoA gt m rr A D O 5 Setting range 1 32767 Electronic gear ratio formula GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CMRX X axis multiplier coefficient CMRY Y axis multiplier coefficient CMRZ Z axis multiplier coefficient CMR4 4 axis multiplier coefficient CMR5 5 axis multiplier coefficient CMDX X axis frequency division coefficient CMDY Y axis frequency division coefficient CMDZ Z axis frequency division coefficient CMD4 4 axis frequency division coefficient CMD5 5 axis frequency division coefficient CMR x360 Zy CMD axL Z S Min command output unit Zw belt wheel teeth of lead screw a motor rotation angle for a pulse Zp Wheel teeth of motor belt L Screw lead 3 2 2 Acceleration amp deceleration control 0 E RDRRNS HORDE TURIS RA d 5 50 RDRN 1 GOOrapid traverse speed federate xdry run speed 0 G00 speed rapid override x rapid tranverse speed ISOT 1 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse valid 0 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse invalid Setting range 10 184 316 X axis max rapid traverse speed Y axis max rapid traverse speed Z axis max rapid traverse speed 4 axis max rapid traverse speed 5 axis max rapid traverse speed 3143750 unit mm min Chapter 3 Parameter Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of X axis ra
61. mode 197 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K Operatio __ Passwor Program Item Function Operation key Display Parameter n mode dlevel on off page switch Edit Level Tool offset On mode 2 3 4 Edit PC gt h Level 2 3 On Bit parameter mode CNC Data Edit wem 3 evel 2 n dowbarameter mode nloa Pitch Edit m o eve n S d parameter mode z 3 Edit Level On E Part program mode 2 3 4 e urn on Switch a parameter DO Level 2 3 o L setting 5 switch Turn on B wies Levai witch Leve program O L setting 2 3 4 switch Swit Turn on auto D Switch ch Sequence No L setting setti Turn off Switch ng parameter LJ Level 2 3 Lid setting Switch Turn off Sach lira witch Leve program LI l MAP setting 2 3 4 Switch Turn off auto Switch U sequence No MA setting Explanations in the column operation indicates operate two keys successively indicates operate two keys simultaneously LJ CANCEL CANCEL Example W indicates that press key first and then press key indicates that press two keys simultaneously 198 Chapter 2 Power ON or OFF And Protection CHAPTER 2 POWER ON OR OFF AND PROTECTION 2 1 System Power On Before this GSK980MDa is powered on the following should be confirmed 1 The machine is in a normal state 2 The power voltage conforms to the r
62. motor characteristics and machine load Data parameter Ne059 N2063 X Y Z 4th 5th axis rapid traverse rate Data parameter N2064 Ne068 linear acceleration amp deceleration time constant of X Y Z 4th 5th axis rapid traverse rate Data parameter Ne069 rapid traverse speed when rapid override is FO Data parameter N9070 upper limit of axes cutting feedrate Data parameter Ne071 Start end speed of exponential acceleration amp deceleration in cutting feeding Data parameter N2072 Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of cutting feeding Data parameterNe073 Start end speed of exponential acceleration amp deceleration in MPG Step feedrate Data parameterNe074 Exponential acceleration 8 deceleration time constant of MPG STEP manual feed Data parameterNe075 Start end speed in thread cutting of each ax Data parameterNo077 Initial feedrate of acc amp dec in CS axis Data parameterNe078 Acc amp dec time constant in CS axis Data parameterNo081 Initial speed of linear acceleration deceleration in rigid tapping Data parameterNe082 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool infeed Data parameterNe083 Linear acceleration deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool retraction Data parameterNe084 Override value in rigid tapping tool retract Data parameterNe172 Initial feedrate when power on Data parameterNe174 Feedrate of DRY run SMZ of bit parameter Ne007
63. sssssssssssssssseeee eene 251 9 2 1 Entry of the operation level nnn 252 9 2 2 Alteration of the password sssssssssssssssssseeeen eene enne nemnrennnn nnn 253 9 2 3 Lower level Sicilia 254 9 3 Data Restore and Backup cccccccccccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononenoneninenoss 256 CHAPTER 10 ADVANCE OPERATION 0o 0 ccccceeeceeeceeeeeee eens eee ceee nennen ninh metn nennen ninh nnne nnne nnt 258 10 1 Operation ipath x tito AA A it 258 10 2 Operation instructlons ertet Pre Eesti Hep cree Eddie FC oe diana 260 10 3 AttenitloriS 2 eet tee a eet ee 261 CHAPTER 11 FLASH OPERATION iei eee cere cete pectet ence ce anter ee Rea E ado 262 Que ccc IL 262 11 2 Introduction of general file operation function sssssssseem 263 11 2 1 Open and close file folder nnne 263 11 2 2 Copy the file by one key current list in C diske current list in U disk 264 11 2 3 GNG file search nere RH open 265 11 2 4 Open CNC fileren dec tiet teet teu adi cer te ides d dedes 266 XIII C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual pur AA E A VOLUME III INSTALLATION CHAPTER 1 INSTAELATION LAYOUT aiii iaa 271 lGSK 980M Da CONNECT e a Pu a anti Ue 271 1 1 1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout oooconnoccccnnnocccnnnnancnnonanannnonananccnnnnnnnoninnno 271 11 2 Interface explanation e eee ae eee ee AL a tea 271 1 2 GSK980MD3 Install
64. to USB In this interface communication between CNC amp USB and system update operations can be done Its transmission speed is much faster than traditional serial communication speed greatly increases the efficiency of file transmission More over USB is easy to carry to use and it supports hot plugging plug and play at once ADVANCED OPERATION 00000 NOO000 BAACKUP R C CIPAR PROGRAM _ LADDER EXECUTE RECOVER ALL PAR PROGRAM LADDER SOFTWARE UPGRADE JUPGRADE CNC SOFT resUPGRADE BOOT SOFTWARE FORMAT NOTE BACKUP PAR PROGRAM PLC TO S EDIT 50000 TOO Hae 10 1 Operation path USB operation in 980MDa is searching and setting up destination list on U disk with its number Therefore the system with different number is corresponding to different U disk list in advance operation Example If the number of system A is CT1010MDa the list of advance operation on U disk is as follows Bu EU CT1010MDa e Sys E a user C prog If the number of system B is CT2138MDa the list of advance operation on U disk is as follows Bu EC CT2138MDa C3 sys E G3 user C prog 258 Chapter 10 Advance Operation If the system has no number the list of advance operation on U disk is as follows 24 uy a gsk980mda_backup CI sys E a user C1 prog Note The number of the system can be found in version information page of diagnosis The following co
65. 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 9 000 F8L100 S 8 N30 E Z 0 000 JEU EE NM NE ACT F 0 m NACHINE DIST TO GO FED OVRI 150 E X 0 000 X 0 000 RAP OVRI 1008 s Y 0 000 Y 0 000 SPI OVRI 1005 o PART CNT 0 Js Z 0 000 CUT TIME 0 00 00 MDI S0000 TOO HOO 4 POS amp PRG display page In this page it displays ABSOLUTE RELATIVE of the current position ABSOLUTE DIST TO GO of current position will be displayed if BITO of bit parameter No 180 is set to 1 and 5 blocks of current program together During the program execution the blocks displayed are refreshed dynamically and the cursor is located in the block being executed POS amp PRG 00000 N00000 RELATIVE ABSOLUTE MACHINE X A 000 X A 000 X 0 000 Y A 000 Y 0 000 Y 8 000 Z A 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Dooo0 00000 Wi MDI S0000 TOO HAA 1 3 2 Program interface 1 PROGRAM CONTENT page n is a compound key Press key once to enter the program content interface and 175 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e E all blocks will be displayed by pressing and keys in MDI mode PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00000 CNC Dogge 00000 W c 3 EE SSS ui MDI 5000A TOO Hee e E 2 PROGRAM STATE page 2 y o Press key to enter program state interface in program content interface Current G M S T F commands and related commands are displayed in program state interface and
66. 000 059 7 20000 19999 10 000 060 6 10000 10006 Reference 0 0 point 0 10 000 061 4 10000 10004 dm 062 346 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation Actually the machine moves from 30 000 point to the point of 10 000 the screw pitch compensation is 7 7 6 4 4 3 Data parameter N2125 screw pitch error origin 2255 Ne120 compensation interval 210000 When the screw pitch error origin is set to 255 The compensation value for the 1 section is set by the position N2255 in the compensation table the compensation value for the 2 section is set by the position Ne254 in the compensation table and the compensation value for the Nth section is set by the position Ne256 N in the compensation table The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of screw pitch error origin It begins to compensate the position Ne255 in the compensation table from the machine zero So the screw pitch error compensation can only be done in the negative moving of the machine zero coordinate system E 202 253 254 255 Setting int A aa O m 43 Cc iQ 2 Machine e coordinate _ _ __ T 30 000 20 000 K 2555 000 e 10 000 0 4 Reference point The compensation point 254 corresponds to a point moving 10 000 in negative direction from the reference point There is a compensation point every 10 000 distance Compensation point 1 is the compensation value at position 1
67. 1 0 1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0 l l True False 1 NE 0 1 NE 0 l l False False 1 GE 0 1 GE 0 l l False False 1 GT 0 1 GT 0 l l False False 5 2 2 Local Variables Local variables are the variables internally defined in a program They are effective only within the program i e it is only can be used within the program A local variable 1 that calls macro programs at a certain moment is different from the 1 at another moment No matter the macro programs are identical or not Therefore when macro program B is called from macro program A like nesting the local variables used in macro A will not be misused in macro B and will not disable the value in macro B 125 SWIN OA a o e Q o 3 3 5 e GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Usually the local variables are used to accept the value passed from argument Please refer to Argument Specification for the relationship between arguments and addresses Pay attention that the initial state of local variable is Null before the local variable is defined assigned e Custom macro program nesting and local variable When calling a macro program its nesting level increases by one and correspondingly the level of local variable increases by one as well c 3 D ge 3 The relationship between macro program call and local variable is shown as follows Q Main Program macro program macro program m
68. 120 000 Y MAX 120 000 S Z MAX 120 000 E X MIN 120 900 3 Y MIN 120 900 ui Z MIN 120 000 e REF so000 TOO Hea E a E Pag 1 In MDI mode press or key to move the cursor to the parameter to be set 2 Input corresponding valus DATA INPUT 3 Press key and the setting is finished B Significance of graphic parameter Coordinate selection Display view angle of the graphic path can be selected by setting different values Corresponding coordinate for 0 7is as follows Scaling Display the scaling of current graphic path Graphic center Display the center of each axis Maximum minimum Set the maximum and minimum scope can be displayed by each axis C Graphic track operation Graphic track is as follows 244 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore 09991 No0000 ENE 0 000 0 000 0 000 S JTSRTEES ETER DAMA ATAR MI AR S0000 Tal Hae R GARPE K J Vertical move Display upper and lower part of the graphic Horizontal move Display right and left part of the graphic Scaling Display scaling of current graphic Absolute coordinate Display the absolute coordinate of the program S Start drawing S is highlighted by pressing S key Display drawing track lt 2 c 3 D O o D E Ss o gt T Stop drawing T is highlighted by pressing S key t stops drawing R Clear graphic track clear graphic track displayed before K Switch view
69. 2 2 Spindle speed analog voltage control sssssssssseee e 20 2 2 3 Spindle override sss eene n nnne n nennen nnns 21 2 3 TOOL FUNCION ta Reim aeter 21 2 4 Feeding Function cce eO ER OE REGN E ER IR EH rH 21 2 4 1 Cutting feed G94 G95 F command enne 21 2 4 2 ENICIBCI RR 24 2 4 3 MPG Step feed eed pe re pell sel Le e aed EFC PUE Re o Fee 24 2 4 4 Automatic acceleration or deceleration sssseseeem HH 25 CHAPTERS G COMMAND 1 rere toon to tae Soa tnt nei ee Sabana spere en inb en soap orso te bee Peesa tasses ie ive pns in tes ine Sa anu 27 Sd G COMMAND BRIEE xi ee rt e RR teg i ted ea ee dto 27 3 1 1 Modal non modal and initial State oocccocccconcnccncnnnocnnonarnnoncnnnnononarnnnnnnnonons 29 3 412 Examples Er e tet E EXER ERE XE LERRA NER EAS 29 C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 31 3 Related d finition ien ee eo oe eee ev cl deer aes 30 3 14 Address deflnitlon itte ee ide fuis bobus teste beds 30 3 2 Rapid Positioning GOO coonccnnnnnccnonncnonenonnnncnnnnononnonononnononcnnn nono n rn nn rennen nnne n nensi nn rennen enne nnne nni nnne 33 3 3 Linear Interpolation GOT sesir iinne a EARR AE EEE enne rn rennen R 34 3 4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02 GOB uo cece ccccccsecsscssceseesecsecesceseesscseceseesecsseseeseesscneesseesees 36 JS Dwell GA ta A A NC N 41 3 6 Plane Selection Command CT GES and O
70. 2 axes Wherever the skip signal input is the tool moves to specified position of next block Example G31 G90 X200 0 F100 X300 0 Y100 0 48 Chapter 3 G Command gt lt Actual movement 100 0 SKIP signal input point lt Movement without o u SKIP signal 5 200 0 0 o x EK UEM a X z 100 0 200 0 300 0 B 9 3 12 Tool Nose Radius Compensation C G40 G41 and G42 Format El G17 G41 G18 D G19 G42 Functions Tool nose radius compensation function To cancel or perform the tool radius compensation vector by using the commands G40 G41 and G42 They are combined with the commands G00 G01 G02 and G03 for specifying a mode which can be confirmed the compensation vector value direction and the direction of tool movement G codes Functions G Tool radius compensation cancellation 40 i G41 Tool radius left compensation G42 Tool radius right compensation G41 or G42 drives the system into compensation mode G40 cancels the system compensation mode Explanation e Compensation plane The compensation plane can be confirmed based upon plane selection command the tool compensation C is calculated in this plane Plane selection Plane compensation Compensation value D code This system can be set for 32 compensation values at most Two digits specified by D code in the program is called serial number of compensation value the compensation value should be set by MDI L
71. 3 Y3 4 Y3 5 Y3 6 Y3 7 XIGNHddV 359 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System GSE Standard PLC 7 PLC Function for standard PLC CN31 address ha Remark address 2p address definition definition 6 er emy External MPG axis choosed 5 ez ez External MPG Z axis choosed s es emo ExemaXtwemde z x4 emei Exematoserus m es ema emaxtGoeme 5V ww few 1 SSCSC S SS Standard PLC PLC Function for standard PLC CN15 address EH Remark address ams address definition definition 5 pe s pe veo semdeViPoupusgna s paz m wr SCt CS DC L 3 3 9 16 25 Dmm a 1 Refer to Book 3 chapter 5 Diagnosis Information for panel key press and panel indicator lights addresses gt a y e Z a 360 Appendix 5 3 FUNCTION CONFIGURATION 5 3 1 Spindle CCW and CW Control e Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Correspo PLC CNC nding state diagnosis pin out The CW key on the machine panel X21 7 Input The CCW key on the machine panel X21 3 signal The Stop key on the machine panel X21 5 SPAL Spindle alarm signal CN61 15 X1 6 ENB Spindle enable signal CN62 7 Y0 6 SFR CCW signal CN62 4 Y0 3 SRV CW signal CN62 5 Y0 4 Output SSTP Spindle stop signal CN62 6 YO 5 alana SPZD Spindle braking signa
72. 3 3 1 1 Modal non modal and initial state The G commands can be set to 12 groups such as 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 u and 14 Thereinto G commands of 00 group are non modal G commands that of other G group 8 are modal commands G00 G80 G40 G49 G67 and G94 are initial G commands 3 After the G command is executed the function defined or status is valid until it is changed E by other G command where in the same group this kind of command is called modal G e command After this G command is performed and before the function defined or status is changed this G command need not be input again when the next block performs this G command After the G command is performed the function defined or status is valid for once The G command word should be input again while every time the G command is performed this kind of command is called non modal G command The modal G command is valid without performing its function or state after the system is powered on this is called initial G command If the G command is not introduced after the power is turned on then the initial G command is executed The initial commands of GSK980MDa are GOO G80 G40 G49 G67 and G94 3 1 2 Examples Example 1 O0001 G17 GO X100 Y100 Move to G17 plane X100 Y100 at the rapid traverse rate modal command GO and G17 valid X20 Y30 Move to X20 Y30 at the rapid traverse rate modal command GO can be omitted G1 X50 Y50 F300 Linear interpolatio
73. 3 3 Machine lock In Auto mode the ways to make machine lock function valid are as follows s 89 Press the key to make the machine lock indicator in State area to light up it means that it has enterd the machine lock state While in the machine lock mode 1 The machine carriage doesn t move the MACHINE in the INTEGRATED POS page of the POSITION interface doesnt vary too The RELATIVE POS and ABSOLUTE POS DIST TO GO are refreshed normally 2 M S T commands can be executed normally 7 3 4 MST lock In Auto mode the ways to make MST lock function valid are as follows O mst O MST cea oh Press the LE key to make the MST lock indicato in State area to light up it means that it has entered the MST lock state And the carriage move is not performed by M S T 238 Chapter 7 Auto Operation commands Note When the MST lock is valid it has no effect on the execution of M00 M30 M98 M99 7 3 5 Block skip If a block in program is not needed to be executed and not to be deleted this block skip function can be used When the block is headed with sign and Block skip function is valid this block is skipped without execution in Auto mode In Auto mode the way to make block skip function valid is as follows i M Press the key to make the block skip indicator in State area to light up it means that the block skip function is valid Note While the block skip function is invalid the blocks headed with
74. 8 X51 l s ud EN5 Spindle enable signal 9 GND 21 Y5 1 10 PCS 22 Y52 X5 0 X5 2 PLC Ades Only For ll 24V 23 Y53 these Lower voltage is valid 12 GND 24 GND Y5 0 Y5 3 PLC address 13 SVC 25 GND Fig 2 14 CN15 Spindle Prot 2 3 2 Spindle zero signal Except for the PC5 signal other fixed signals of the spindle interface are the same as that of the X Y Z 4th axes the PC5 interface circuit is shown as follows 280 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals 24 TLP18 Jo 2307 RS 1N4148 GND Ut05E i IT o10 74HC14 SO Fig 2 15 Spindle zero signal interface circuit 2 3 3 Linear axis DA98B DAO1B drive GSK980MDa CN15 unit signal interface 1 CP54 30 PULS 14 CP5 15 PULS 2 DIR5 A 29 SIGN 15 DIR5 4 14 SIGN 4 ALM5 b ALM 10 PC5 36 CZ E 23 SO OV 32 DG 11 24 A 37 CZ 38 COM Metal shell Metal shell DA98 A drive unit GSK980MDa CN15 signal interface 1 CP5 ay 18 PULS 3 4 P5 6 PULS E 2 DIR5 ar 19 SIGN 15 DIR5 7 SIGN gt 4 ALM5 ay 15 ALM D 10 PC5 2 CZ E 21 SON o 3 DG gt 9 OV K 5 CZCOM 11 24 20 COM Metal shell 10 RSTP 4 DG 17 DG 22 FSTP Metal shell Fi
75. Auto mode is switched to the Machine zero MPG Step the current block dwells immediately when the Auto mode is switched to the Edit MDI mode the dwell is not displayed till the current block is executed Note 1 Ensure that the fault has been resolved before cancelling the emergency alarm 234 Chapter 7 Auto Operation Note 2 The electric shock to the device may be decreased by pressing the Emergency button before power on and off Note 3 The Machine zero return operation should be performed again after the emergency alarm is cancelled to ensure the the coordinate correctness but this operation is unallowed if there is no machine zero in the machine Note 4 Only the BIT3 ESP of the bit parameter No 017 is set to 0 could the external emergency stop be valid 7 1 4 Auto run from an arbitrary block E 1 Press 8 j key to enter the Edit mode press mm key to enter the Program interface or press mn key several times to select the PRG CONTENT page S lt 3 D i9 jo D 5 o O 3 2 Move the cursor to the block to be executed for example move the cursor to the 3th line head if it executes from the 3th line PRG CONTENT SEGS COL C 00000 CNC Dagga 00000 GO G54 G90 XO YO ZO G49 Gel X100 Y100 F500 502 120 Gel X52 Z01 G91 X2 Z 6 3 GOO XO YO Z 1130 N EDIT 50000 TOO Hae 3 If the mode G M T F command of the current block where the cursor locates is
76. CN62 1 Y0 0 Command M08 Command signal for cooling starts input MO9 Command signal for cooling off e Control parameter to 1 1 1R99 RSJG 1 M03 M04 M08 and M32 output signals are turned off when resetting 0 M03 M04 M08 and M32 output signals are turned on when resetting Function description COOL is disabled after CNC is power on COOL output is effective and the cooling pump is ON when M08 is executed COOL output is cancelled if MO9 is executed and the cooling pump is OFF Note 1 ON OFF state of cooling output is defined by the RSJG of K10 when CNC is reset Note 2 M09 has no corresponding output signal the output of M08 is cancelled as M09 is executed Note 3 The cooling output is OFF when M30 is executed 5 3 6 Lubricating control Relevant signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input Lubricating key signal on the X21 6 signal machine panel Lubricating on indicator on machine Y20 7 Output panel signal PET f LUBR Lubricating output signal CN62 2 YO 1 Command M32 Lubricating on command signal input M33 Lubricating off command signal Control parameters DT0016 time of auto lubrication cancel DT0017 0 not auto lubrication gt 0 auto lubrication DT0018 not auto lubr 0 alternative lubrication gt 0 scheduler lubrication 365 XIGNHddV gt a y e Z a G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System e
77. CNC System User Manual e Stop by command M00 the block containing MOO is executed the auto run is stopped So the modal function and state are all reserved Press the key or the external Run key the program execution continues e Stop by a relevant key Oo Sy 1 In Auto run by pressing key or external dwell key the machine remains at the following state 1 The machine feed decelerate to stop 2 During the execution of the dwell command G04 it pauses after G04 command execution is finished 3 The modal function and state are saved 4 The program execution continues after pressing the key RESET 2 Stop by Reset key lt o c 3 D F O Ke gt 9 a o E 1 All axes movement is stopped 2 M S function output is invalid the automatic cut off of signals such as spindle CCW CW RESET lubrication cooling by pressing key can be set by the parameters 3 Modal function and state is held on after the auto run 3 Stop by Emergency stop button If the external emergency button external emergency signal valid is pressed under the dangerous or emergent situation during the machine running the CNC system enters into emergency state and the machine moving is stopped immediately all the output such as spindle rotation coolant are cut off If the Emergency button is released the alarm is cancelled and CNC system enters into reset mode 4 ByMode switching When the
78. CNC enters the compensation cancellation mode This is called compensation cancellation The circular arc command G02 and G03 can not be employed when the cutter radius compensation C is cancelled If they are commanded alarm is generated and the operation is stopped It controls and performs this block and the blocks in the cutter radius compensation buffer memory in the compensation cancellation mode If the single block switch is turned on it stops after executing a block The next block is executed instead of reading it when the start key is pressed again a Tool movement along an inner side of a corner 22180 12 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear 152 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation Programmed path S en DN o SNES al hy es Sree 2 Tool center path Programmed l Tool center L path path S ere 3 nee A eas Fig 6 15 Cireularto linear 3 inner side offset cancellation 3 J a b Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 a290 1 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear G40 Programmed path Tool center path L Intersection C Intersection Programmed path Tool center path Fig 6 16a Circular to linear Fig 6 16b Circular to linear obtuse outside offset cancellation obtuse outside offset cancellation c Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an acute angle 180 0290 1 Linear to linear 2 Circular to linear Tool center path L p Prog
79. Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 3 4 Cutting feed to the point R plane 5 5 Returning to the initial point level if it is G98 Command Path G98 Mode for returning to initial point level G99 Mode for returning to point R plane v A o e E 3 3 2 O Initial point level ri I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Point R Point Z Point Z T Related Explanation 1 This cycle is used to bore a hole The command motion is basically same as the G81 Drilling Spot drilling cycle the difference is that by the G81 it returns to the point R plane in rapid traverse rate while by the G85 it returns to the point R plane in feedrate when the cutting feed reaches the bottom of a hole 2 The Q and P commands are disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 8 Boring cycle G86 Format G98 G99 G86 X Y R Z F L Function After positioning along X and Y axes rapid traverse is performed to R point and the boring is performed from point R to point Z The tool is retracted in rapid traverse and spindle is rotated positively when the spindle is stopped at the bottom of the hole Explanation For command explanation for canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 The spindle
80. DT 17 DTZ 0 DT018 0 DT 18 DT663 DT 11 8 DT 19 1800 DT664 DT 12 8 DT620 500 DT665 DT 13 0 DT 21 500 DT666 DT614 0 DT 22 1800 DT660T7 DT 15 0 DT023 500 Reserved NO DTeae JOG soo00 TOO Had 4 VERSION MESSAGE interface TANO It enters VERSION MESSAGE interface by pressing key repeatedly The software hardware and PLC version message can be shown in this interface The figure is as follows VERSION MESSAGE 09099 NO00000 PRODUCT TYPE GSK980MDa SOFTWARE VER V2 00 manu HARDWARE VER 3 01 002 08 07 21 STSTEM ID 8 LADDER DESIGN GSK LADDER VER 09 01 15 839C LADDER VERIFY 839C LADDER NOTE GSK980MDa MDI 50000 TOO HOO 192 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 4 List of general operations Operatio Passwor Program Item Function Operation key Display Parameter n mode d level on off page switch Relative Relative coordinate of X CANCEL coordin axis clearing ate Relative Ee elative coordinate of Y Y CANCEL l amp coordin axis clearing ate Relative Relative coordinate of z CANCEL coordinat axis clearing e Relative Part No CANCEL s Clear caring coordinat ing e or Cutting time CANCEL T absolute clearing coordinat e Tool radius DATA Tool Level INPUT offset D offset 2 3 4 clearing Tool length NOUT Tool Level offset H offset 2 3 4 clearing Bit Data DATA MDI Bit parameter
81. Disabled Disabled Disabled Note 1 When the power is turned on the value of this variable is 0 Note 2 When feed hold is disabled if the feed hold button is held down the machine stops in the single block stop mode However single block stop operation is not performed when the single block mode is disabled with variable 3003 Note 3 When the feed hold is disabled if the feed hold button is pressed then released the machine does not stop program execution continues and the machine stops at the first block where feed hold is enabled the feed hold lamp is ON Note 4 When feedrate override is disabled an override of 100 is always applied regardless of the setting of the feedrate override Note 5 When exact stop check is disabled no exact stop check is 128 Number of mach Chapter 5 Macro Program made even in blocks including those which do not perform cutting ined parts The number of machined parts can be read and written Variable Function No 3901 Number of machined parts Modal information Modal information specified in blocks up to the immediately preceding block can be read Current position Variable Function No Group 1 G00 G01 G02 G03 G73 G74 G80 G81 4004 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 4002 Group 2 G17 G18 G19 4003 Gr
82. Function description There are two lubricating functions defined by GSK980MD standard PLC program non automatic lubricating and automatic lubricating They are set by PLC data DTO017 0 For non automatic lubricating gt 0 For automatic lubricating lubricating time DTO17 and lubricating interval time DT016 can be set DT018 0 For non automatic lubricating lubricating reverses gt 1 For non automatic timing lubricating 1 Non automatic lubricating function When PLC data DTO18 is equal to 0 it is lubricating reverse output Lubricating output is performed by pressing the Lubricating key on the machine panel lubricating output is cancelled if the key is pressed again When M32 is performed and the lubricating is output cancel the lubricating output by executing M33 When the PLC data DT018 gt 1 it is lubricating timing output Lubricating output is performed when the Lubricating key on the machine panel is pressed The lubricating output is cancelled when the period set by DT018 elapsed So M32 is performed for the lubrication output it is cancelled after the period set by DT018 elapsed If the period set by DT018 has not elapsed M33 is performed then the lubricating output is cancelled 2 Automatic lubricating Lubricating starts after power on as the period set by DTO17 elapsed the output stops As the period set by DT016 elapsed lubricating is valid again This process is repeated The M32 M33 commands and the Lubricating key
83. GC RH RTAP F76 3 SHR 6 5 HH RGTAP G61 0 fat ie E FA fa S 3 21 7 F and G Signals RGTAP G61 0 Rigid tapping signal When the M 29 is commanded PMC enters the rigid tapping mode and the signal is then set to 1 to inform the CNC 1 PMC enters the rigid tapping mode 0 PMC does not enter the rigid tapping mode If this signal does not set to 1 after the M29 has been commanded the alarm may occur in the block of G74 G84 RGSPM RGSPP F65 1 0 spindle turning signal When the rigid tapping is performed the signal is informed to the PMC whether the current spindle is CCW positive or CW negative RGSPM 1 spindle CW negative RGSPP 1 spindle CCW positive In rigid tapping these signals are output when the spindle is rotated In the mode of rigid tapping when the spindle is positioned at the hole or stoppted at the bottom of the hole or R position these signals are not output In the mode of rigid tapping when the spindle is positioned at the inter locked stop machine lock or Z axis ignorance states the spindle does not regard as a stop state in this case these signals are output These signals are only enabled in rigid tapping and they are all set to O in the normal spindle control mode 104 Chapter 3 G Command RTAP F76 3 Rigid tapping process signal This signal informs PMC which has been in the mode of rigid tapping or not The CNC is in the mode of rigid tapping cur
84. I Fine milling circle radius the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative J Fine milling distance from start point to the center point the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative D Sequence number of tool radius the value range is indicated as 0 32 the 0 is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point P level at the rapid traverse rate 3 Feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 73 SWIN OA U A o e 9 3 gt 2 O GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 5 Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path WwnjoA U A o e EY 3 3 2 O Center Related Explanation The commands Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P value will be reserved as the canned cycle modal value For example Fine mill a finished rough milling round groove by the canned cycle G112 command see the following figure I I ree gt 10 Center G90 G00 X50
85. INPUT paramete On input Parameter mode Level 2 3 r Bit DATA MDI Data INPUT parameteLevel 2 3 On Parameter mode parameter r 193 c 3 D O D g a o gt C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K Operatio Passwor Program Item Function Operation key Display Parameter n mode d level on off page switch Input pitch Mii un i itc parameter of X P eompsnsadon Level 2 f DATA mode paramete On axis INPUT value r Input pitch Pitch Compensation MDI parameter of Y parameteL evel 2 lt D mode On O axis INPUT r c value 3 Pitch Input pitch compens E ti 9 parameter of Z compensauen MDI ation Level 2 S i DATA On 9 axis INPUT mode paramete o value i 5 DATA Macro Level Macro varibles INPUT Macro varibles varibles 2 3 4 Input tool Level UT Tool offst radius offst D Data value 2 3 4 Input tool DATA Tool INPUT Level length offset H Data value offset 2 3 4 Search down Sear Program from where the iL Edit un Level c conten n cursor locates naracar mode 2 3 4 Search up l Edit from where the t d Program Level On mode cursor locates Vlaraotan content 2 3 4 Search down Program O Level from current T Edit content b34 program mode orprogram Search up auto list or O Level from current t mode program ba program i state 194 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Displ
86. IS EA PLC fixed X3 5 address SKIP Skip signal M eunjoA 5 1 2 Axes moving state and data diagnosis signal of CNC 2 A NAAA ES RDYX RDY5 The signal that X Y Z 4th 5th axis is ready ENX EN5 The singnal that X Y Z 4th 5th axis is enabled 0 0 SETX SET5 SETX SET5 axis pulse prohibited signal DROX DRO5 Output of X Y Z 4th 5th axis moving direction STU TDRX TDR5 Direction of X Y Z 4th 5th axis moving path 1 positive O negative PCX PC5 Zero point signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axis 5 7 sp D et 5 337 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual ALMX ALM5 ALam signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axis Handwheel speed data Spindle feedback data Spindle feedback data Spindle analog voltage output Spindle analog voltage output 5 1 3 MDI panel keys diagnosis DGN 016 DGN 022 are the diagnosis messages of MDI keypad keys When pressing a key in the operation panel the corresponding bit displays 1 and O after releasing this key If it displays reversely it means there is a fault in the keypad circuit Faso Meu T e G P al O N 7 Q AAA TIA 3 T5 A D 5 SH E e eI Lei fe IM euinjoA u0 e e3su o e E E EI k soc
87. Jof the bit parameter No 006 and the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 are all set to 0 ZCn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 007 is setto 1 the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of zero return is shown in follows 295 IM eunjoA 5 m rr D et o 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Machine zero return path I n EROS ds P nDEC n PC Velocity v High speed zero return Deceleration Start deceleration 7 Over Low speed zero retum Machine zero LA Time t Fig 2 43 the action time sequence of zero return 4 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return direction set by bit parameter No 183 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a traverse speed B As the approach switch touches the tongue for the first time the deceleration signal is valid and it slows down immediately to run in a low speed C As the approach switch detaches the tongue the deceleration signal is invalid it moves at a fixed low speed after deceleration and starts to detect zero signal PC D As the approach switch touches the tongue for the second time the zero signal is valid and the movement stops The indicator for zero return on the panel lights up lt O S e Machine zero return type C as servo motor one rotation signal taken as zero signal O D Its sketc
88. P S alarm occurs Nesting The identification number 1 to 3 in a DO END loop can be used as many times as desired Note however when a program includes crossing repetition loops overlapped DO ranges P S alarm occurs 3 DO loops can be nested to 1 The identification numbers a maximum depth of three lev 1to 3 can be used as many times as required 95 WHILE 1DO1 WHILE DO 1 l Processing WHILE DO2 END1 WHILE DO 3 Processing WHILE DO 1 Processing END 3 END 1 END 2 END 1 2 DO ranges cannot overlap 4 Control can be transferred to WHILE DO 1 the outside of a loop Processing WHILE DO 1 WHILE DO 2 IF GOTOn END 1 END 1 Processing Nn END 2 5 Branches cannot be made to a location within a loop IF GOTO n WHILE DO 1 Nn END 1 140 Chapter 5 Macro Program 5 5 Macro Statement and NC statement The following blocks are referred to as macro statements e Blocks containing arithmetic or logic operation e Blocks containing a controlling statement such as GOTO DO END e Blocks containing a macro call command such as G65 G66 Blocks other than macro statements are referred to as NC statement 5 5 1 Macro Programming and Registering Custom macro program are similar to subprogram They can be edited registered and used in the same way as subprogram M98 can cal
89. PRG STATE page PRG STATE 06664 Nana l G00 GIT G90 G54 ABSOLUTE Mode of fixed cycle G21 G40 G49 G94 G98 X 6 000 X v Y 600 W FOLOO S 00 N30 Zz e E PRG F 100 ACT F FED OVRI 150 RAP OVRI 186 SPI OVRI 1888 INPUT PRG SEGMENT PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 28 88 82 MDI 0696 T l Hee Sijo o X 5 O Y 5 O 2 1 Ie pot 2 ye JE os E lg Elo a jo A by sequence the page is as follows 210 Chapter 5 MDI Operation PRG STATE 08000 NOGAH Goa G17 690 G54 aee F Mode of A cycle an 640 G49 694 G98 Yo ama 1 A Fo100 S 00 N30 ee Z P PRG F 180 R d ACT F 0 INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 158 Goa X56 Y50 Z100 RAP OVRI 160 SPI OVRI 1008 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 0 00 02 HDI sopa Tal Had DATA 4 Press the page is as follows PRG STATE 00000 NOO000 G00 G17 G90 G54 Sar 7 Mode of Pu cycle doi G40 G49 G94 C98 Y 0 000 n FO109 S 60 N30 rs 2 P PRG F 180 R d ACT F 0 INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 1589 cee Y5 150 7106 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 1908 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 0 00 02 MDI 30009 Tal Hae 5 2 Code Words Execution DATA INPUT After the words are input and press J the background color of program segment kA becomes white these MDI words are executed after the 8WT key is pressed During the o Ey reser execution Press DM Ga and Emerge
90. PROGRAM C40 G49 G80 GO G90 G54 X0 YO Z0 E50 G1 X20 Z20 F1500 N10 G98 G2 I 20 G3 I 20 G4 X5 G1 X0 Y20 ZO F1000 K 20 YO EDIT 50000 TOO Hae Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode 2 Press key to enter the FIND state and key in the block No PRG CONTENT SEG2 COL 1 C 00008 CNC beees CNC PROGRAM G40 G49 G80 0 G90 G54 XO YO Z 50 G1 X20 Z20 F1500 N10 G98 G2 I 20 G3 I 20 G4 X5 G1 X0 Y20 ZO F1000 K 20 YO FIND N10 EDIT 50000 TOO Hae DELETE 3 ML key to delete blocks from GO block 2 to N10 including block N10 It displays as follows lt 2 c 3 O F jo Le D o 5 PRG CONTENT SEG2 COL 1 C 00008 CNC Do008 CNC PROGRAM C40 G49 G80 G3 I 20 G4 X5 G1 X0 Y20 ZO F1000 K 20 YO KO Y 20 Z 10 K20 YO Z 20 KS Y5 Z 50 M99 EDIT 50000 Tee Hae 222 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management 6 1 9 Segment deletion It deletes the content downward from the current character where the cursor locates to the word specified PRG CONTENT SEG2 COL 4 C 00008 CNC beees CNC PROGRAM C40 G49 G80 G3 I 20 G4 X5 G1 X Y20 Z0 F1000 K 20 YO KO Y 20 Z 10 K20 YO Z 20 K5 Y5 Z 50 M99 EDIT 50000 TOO HOO Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode 2 Press key to enter the FIND state and key in the characters see the following figure input F1000 S
91. Positive offset G44 Negative offset Compensation axes can be regarded as Z Y and X Either absolute or incremental command the end point coordinate value specified by Z axis movement command in program adds the offset specified by H codes in G43 set in the offset storage or subtracts the offset specified by H code in G44 finally the value calculated is regarded as the end point coordinate The following command is indicated for Z axis move omitting When the offset is positive G43 is for an offset in the positive direction G44 is for an offset in the negative direction SWIN OA U A o e E 3 3 2 O It reversely moves when the offset is negative value Specifying the offset An offset number is specified by H code and its corresponding offset adds or subtracts Z axis movement command value in program to get a new Z axis movement command value The offset number is HOO H32 Offset value corresponded with offset number is pre set in the offset storage by using the Offset number 00 i e HOO corresponds to the O offset It is disabled to set offset value to HOO Tool length compensation cancellation G49 or HOO can be specified when the tool length compensation is cancelled When two or more axes compensations are cancelled all of the axes compensation will be cancelled if the G49 is applied Compensation value of the vertical axis for currently specified plane is cancelled with HOO After G49 or HOO is s
92. R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99 Command Path G98 Return to the initial plane at the G99 Return to the R point plane at the rapid traverse rapid traverse Initial point level Tq ee oU Point R PointR i ul i Point Z Point Z i 64 Chapter 3 G Command Related Explanation The command Q or P is disabled in this cycle but its value will be saved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 5 Drilling cycle counter boring cycle G82 Format G98 G99 G82 X Y R Z P F L_ Function Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole Hole depth precision is added when the dwell is performed and then the tool is retracted from the bottom of the hole at rapid traverse Explanation For the command explanation of these canned cycles see the Table 13 1 7 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Dwell for P time if it is commanded 5 Returning to the initial point or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse Command Path G98 Return to the initial point level at the G99 Return to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rapid traverse Initial point level co MEC 2 13 Point R H y PointR Dwell y Dua E B per Well Point Z Si ZPoint Z Related Explanation 1 They are basically the same as G81 dr
93. Y50 Z50 G00 rapid positioning G99 G112 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 J10 F800 D1 Start canned cycle fine milling cycle 74 Chapter 3 G Command inside the circle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point P level M30 cs 3 o 3 15 2 13 Fine milling cycle outside circle G114 G115 T v Format 3 G114 e G98 G99 X Y R Z J D F G115 3 Function A fine milling outside the full circle is performed by the specified radius value and the 3 direction and the tool is retracted after the fine milling is finished Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 G114 Finish milling cycle for outside circle in CCW G115 Finish milling cycle for outside circle in CW I A fine milling circle radius the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative J Distance of fine milling between the start point and the circle the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm the absolute value is taken when it is negative D The sequence number of tool radius the value range is 0 32 0 is the default of DO The current tool radius value is taken according to the specified sequence number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit a
94. a single block MDI can be executed in this interface PRG STATE 00000 NO000600 G00 G17 G90 G54 Ce s Mode of eG cycle G91 G40 G49 C94 G98 Y eoo 1 W FOTOS s 80 130 EE PRG F 100 ACT fF 8 FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 100 INPUT PRG SEGMENT PART CNT 8 CUT TIME 0 00 00 MDI 50000 TOO Hae 3 PROGRAM PREVIEW page In program content interface press key to enter program preview page In this page all part programs are listed To make it easier for user to select a program the system displays 5 blocks before the program with cursor at the bottom of the page User can press EOB directly to select a program and process automatically or press DEL key to delete the program in this page It displays the following contents a Memory capacity Display the maximum capacity of CNC memory unit b Used capacity The space occupied by the saved programs 176 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display c Program NO Display the total number of programs in the CNC including subprograms d Size of the program The size of the program which the cursor is in unit byte B e Program list Display numbers of saved programs arranged by name PRG PREVIEW 00003 NOO000 MEM USED 100KB PRG AMOT 4 PRG SIZE peeee 00000 N EDIT 50000 TOO Hae 4 FILE LIST page GSK980MDa supports USB interface CNC gt USB and USB gt CNC mutual transmission operation are provided in t
95. alarm issues 24V X X Y Y T 7 Emergency stop witch ESP Temporary release switch Padi ard When the hardware overtravel occurs there will be an emergency stop alarm The steps to eliminate this alarm is press the OVERTRAVEL button to reversely move the table to detach the stroke switch for positive overtravel move negatively vice versa 2 3 2 Software overtravel protection When the MOT of bit parameter No 17 is set to O the software limit is valid The software travel stroke is set by data parameter NO 135 NO 144 they refer to machine coordinate No 135 No 139 are for axes X Y Z 4th 5 positive max overtravel Ne140 Ne144 are for negative max overtravel If the machine position coordinate exceeds the setting range overtravel alarm will occur The steps to eliminate this alarm is press RESET key to clear the alarm then moves reversely for positive overtravel move out negatively vice versa 2 4 Emergency Operation During the machining some unexpected incidents may occur because of the user programming operation and product fault So this GSK980MDa should stopped immediately for these incidents This section mainly describes the resolutions that this GSK980MDa are capable of under the emergency situation Please see the relative explanation for these resolutions under the emergency by machine builder 200 Chapter 2 Power ON or OFF And Protection 2 4 1 Reset Press 7 key
96. aoiu ain haradan daada nan 299 3 1 Parameter Description by sequence esiones iri orn aA EE TEN E SENEE 299 3 131 Bit parameter nti oett tees tete ity npe a esp Aaaa ae i Taaa ai aid iniaa 299 XIV Contents 31 2 Data parameter titi Aa dal 308 3 2 Parameter description by function sequence sess enne nc eerte 314 A SN enr gLg fuse aE aa ia aioe aaiae s Ro E RARE pendavaetia 314 3 2 2 Acceleration deceleration control eee 316 3 2 3 Machine protection oot i nii emite oi D ute Er pe eer 317 3 2 4 Thread f nctlOri coi te E eene eran e deo t Y ck ser eA eaan 318 3 2 5 Spindl Control coil ardid 318 LOTO Tunictior AA Ra cd a Ae T 319 3 2 7 Edit and Display cion ai Ai il edn ane 320 3 2 8 Precision COM e ASANO tii ai 320 3 2 9 Communication setting eene eere 321 3 2 10 Machine Zero retr siu citt eee odere P ira 322 3 2 11 Rotary axis TUN Clica iii ici 325 4 1 Emergency Stop and Stroke Limits tidad dia dai 328 42 Drive unit Unit Setting tette referet fe eerta er decidan e e eret eres dicta deco doe 328 4 3 Gear Ratio Adjustment n tom te eter ee eer e eo que se o diete o Sent 329 4 4 Acceleration amp deceleration Characteristic Adjustment rennen 330 4 5 Machine Zero Adjustment t eb e Eee eee 332 4 6 Spindle Adjustment REESE ISO NR Ie SER 333 461 Spindle encoder aee e iere LU de He MEER e alae d d dnd 333 4 6 2 Spindle Drake icons dad EYE Ree ae Re oae 333 4 6 3 Switch volume control of
97. avoided to be at a critical point after the travel switch is released In order to improve the zero return precision it should be ensured the motor reaches the one rotation signal of encoder after it rotates for half circle And the moving distance for motor half circle rotation is the motor gear teeth 2xlead screw gear teeth 2 The connection to stepper motor the schematic diagram ofusing a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal SSG 2mm machine zero return diretion a m metal inductive bloch fixed on the machine In figure usually Li gt 1 5 2 times width of the approach PNP NC approach switch switch L2 the width of the approach switch nDEC and nPC signals connect together connect to QV connect to 24v Fig 4 3 4 6 Spindle Adjustment 4 6 1 Spindle encoder Encoder with the linear number 100 5000p r is needed to be installed on the machine for threading The linear number is set by data parameter No 109 The transmission ratio spindle gear teeth encoder gear teeth between encoder and spindle is 1 255 255 The spindle gear teeth are set by CNC data parameter No 110 and the encoder gear teethare set by data parameter No 111 Synchronous belt transmission should be applied for it no sliding transmission The DGN 011 and DNG 012 of CNC diagnosis messages are used to check the validity of threading signal from the spindle encoder 4 6 2 Spindle brake After spindle s
98. axes lead screw it will definitely affect the parts machining precision This GSK980MD has the memorizing screw pitch error compensation function that it can accurately compensate the screw pitch error 6 2 Specifications 1 The offset is concerned with the offset origin offset clearances offset point mechanical moving direction etc 2 After performing the machine zero return take this reference point as the offset origin and set the offset value into the parameters according to axes compensation intervals 3 Points to be compensated 256 points for each axis 4 Axis to be compensated X Y Z 4th 5th axis 5 Offset range 255 255u m for each offset point 6 Offset clearance 1000 9999999um 7 Offset of point N N 0 1 2 3 255 is determined by the N N 1 mechanical error 8 Actual offset interval set an appropriate value in the range above according to the max offset range and mechanical travel 9 The setting is the same as the CNC parameters input see the explanation in the relative operation M eunjoA gt m rr D et o 5 6 3 Parameter Setting 6 3 1 Screw pitch compensation Ero Fa a EPIRR TR PCOMP EXE Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid 6 3 2 Screw pitch error origin A position No which the screw pitch error compensation starts from in the compensation list which is determined from the machine zero is called screw pitch error compensati
99. axes screw pitch error compensation is determined by increment system The range is the same as that of the metric machine tool Machine Increment Rotary axis Rotary axis tool system screw pitch error screw pitch error system compensation unit compensation range Metric inch 1u IS B 0 001deg 0255 machine 0 1u IS C 0 0001 deg eee system Graphic setting data The maximum and minimum data ranges of X Y Z set by graph is in accordance with the command data ranges Increment system Graphic setting X Y Z ranges 1 u IS B Metric input G21 99999 999 99999 999 mm Inch input G20 9999 9999 9999 9999 inch 0 tu IS C Metric input G21 9999 9999 9999 9999 mm Inch input G20 999 99999 999 99999 inch 1 3 5 The Units and Ranges of Program Address Values e Definition and ranges of the pitch Code 1 p IS B 0 1p IS C Unit Inputin F X 0 001 500 000 0 0001 500 00 mm pitch lead metric G21 0 06 25400 0 06 2540 Pitch lead inch Inch input F 0 0001 50 00 0 00001 50 0 inch pitch lead G20 0 06 2540 0 06 254 Pitch lead inch e SpeedF definition G94 feed per minute F unit mm min G95 feed per rotation F definition and ranges are as follows 13 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 e 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 1 p CIS B gt 0 1
100. block only has one M code The CNC alarm occurs when two or more M codes are existed in one block DuiuueJ60J4d Table 2 1 M code table for program execution Functions End of Run Rigid tapping designation End of Run Subprogram call Return from the subprogram the program will be repeatly executed If the code M99 is used for main program ending namely the curre M99 program is not called by other programs M9000 M9999 Call macro program Program No is larger than 9000 2 1 1 End of Program M02 Format M02 Function The M02 code is executed in the Auto mode The automatic run is ended after the other codes of current block are executed the cursor stops in the block in which the M02 is located and does not return to the head of the program If the program is to be executed again the cursor should return to the beginning of the program Besides the above mentioned functions processed by CNC the functions of code MO2 also can be defined by the PLC ladder diagram The function defined by standard ladder diagram can be the current input state of CNC is not change after the code M02 is executed 2 1 2 Rigid Tapping Designation M29 Format M29 Function In auto mode after the execution of M29 the G74 G84 that followed is processed ast H 15 SWIN OA v e a fb 3 gt 2 ae GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual rigid tapping codes 2 1 3 End of run M
101. by pressing right moving key or pressing conversion key directly turn pages to display the program list and then select it by cursor moving key on MDI panel Open a program In edit auto MDI modes when open the program on program preview window this program can be opened by pressing EOB key on MDI panel At the same time the name of currently opened program is displayed on top right page Deletion of program Move cursor to the program will be deleted press delete key and then press Y key or N key on multiple select manue to select wether delete it or not 231 S lt 3 D i9 jo D S o t le jun lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION Note The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 7 1Auto Run 7 1 1 Selection of the program to be run 1 Search method 1 Select the Edit or Auto mode 2 Press mm key to enter the PRG CONTENT page Q 3 Press the address key and key in the program No 4 Press i or 0 key the program retrieved will be shown on the screen if the program doesn t exist an alarm will be issued Note In step 4 if the program to be retrieved does not exist a new pro
102. code it is effective only in the block in which it is specified 2 G31 can not be specified in the tool compensation C and chamfering or the alarm will 47 SWIN OA U o e 9 3 gt 2 o GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual be generated lt is very necessary to cancel the tool compensation C and chamfering firstly before the G31 command is specified 3 Error is allowed in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input Signal The SKIP signal input is on the fixed address X1 0 XS40 9 Parameter SKIP 1 HIGH level SKIP is valid 0 LOW level SKIP is valid G31P 1 G31 is for immediate stop as the SKIP signal is valid WnjoA 0 G31 is for decelerating stop as the SKIP signal is valid 1 The next block to G31 is incremental command 1 it moves with incremental value from the position interrupted by the skip signal Example G31 G91 X100 0 F100 Y50 0 U e e 9 3 3 2 O Actual movement SKIP signal input point 50 0 PS 100 0 5 2 The next block to G31 is absolute command for one axis The command axis moves to the specified position and the axis not specified keeps at the skip signal input position Example G31 G90 X200 0 F100 Y100 0 Movement without SKIP signal SKIP signal input Actual movement point Movement without SKIP signal 200 0 0 3 The next block to G31 is absolute command for
103. cycle outside the rectangle in CCW G139 Finish milling cycle outside the rectangle in CW I The width of rectangle along the X axis the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm J The width of the rectangle along the Y axis the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm D Sequence number of tool radius its value range is indicated as O 32 thereinto the O is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number K The distance between the finish milling start point and the side of rectangle along the X axis the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm U Corner arc radius if it is omitted no corner arc transition Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 81 SWIN OA U A o e E 3 3 2 O GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 5 Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path Related Explanation 1 The interpolation direction of transition arc is inconsistent to that of the fine milling arc when a fine milling is performed outsid
104. deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 The deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4 axis are connected independently the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZCZ 1 The deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PCZ of Z axis in parallel connection a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal 322 Chapter 3 Parameter during machine zero return 0 The deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PCZ of Z axis are connected independently the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZCY 1 The deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis in parallel connection a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 The deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis are connected independently the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZCX 1 The deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis in parallel connection a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 The deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis are connected independently the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required
105. during machine zero return A enses eS BS SX ZRS5 1 There are machine zero point in the 5 axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in the 5 axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return M eunjoA ZRSA 1 There are machine zero point in the 4 axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in the 4 axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return gt m rr D et 5 ZRSZ 1 There are machine zero point in Z axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in Z axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return ZRSY 1 There are machine zero point in Y axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in Y axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return ZRSX 1 There are machine zero point in X axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine
106. e e Surge N M absorber E B a N lt 5 n D a 5 Fig 1 6 4 To employ with twisted shield cable or shield cable for the leadout cable of CNC the cable shield tier is grounded by single end at CNC side signal cable should be as short as possible 5 In order to decrease the mutual interference between CNC cables or CNC cables with strong power cables the wiring should comply to the following principles 273 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Cable type Wiring requirement AC power line Tie up A group cables with a clearance at least AC coil 10cm from that of B C groups or shield A group AC contactor cables from electromagnetism DC coil 24VDC DC relay 24VDC Cables between CNC and i strong power cabinet Tie up B and A group cables separately or B J shield B group cables and the further B group Cables between CNC and cables are from that of C group the better it is machine Cables between CNC Tie up C and A group cables separately or shield C group cables and the cable distance between C group and B group is at least Position feedback cable 40cm with twisted pair cable applied Position encoder cable and servo drive unit MPG cable Other cables for shield M euinjoA gt m 4 A D et O 5 274 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION amp CONNECTION OF INTERFACE SIGNALS 2 1 Connection to Drive unit
107. feedrate override adjustMenNt ooooocccnnnccoococccccconcnnnannnnnonononnnnnnnncnnnnoncnnnnnnnes 203 3 1 4 Manual rapid override adjustment ssssssssssseeee eene 204 3 1 5 Relative coordinate clearing ssssssssseeee eH eee 204 3 2 Other Manual operations etae eese ed naire ia 205 3 2 1 Spindle CCW CW stop control eene nennen ne 205 3 22 Spindle JOoG er hoe t Enel EE e a tr REN E ep tee re PX Re E MIR RR 205 3 2 9 Cooling control ir e ceri ettet de rta ent reti fase rebut sae etg 205 3 2 4 Lubrication control ccc cece eee eect eter rere tree eter Heer 205 3 2 5 Spindle override adjustment cee cece eeeccce cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeteeeeieaeeeeeesetseeas 206 CHAPTER 4 MPG STEP OPERATION 000 c cceeceeeseec cece eeee eens eee eeeeeeee enn 207 As St6p IF C6 ic ach tis cenceteet At tise stale oan a ee heeiel neers beet es 207 4 1 1 Increment selection a re lia 207 41 2 MOVING direction Selection te cete i e erbe dade neues Pesto ee oou e pagus 208 4 2 MPG Handwheel Feed sssssssssssssesesee eene nennen nennen ne remrenn nnn nennen nennen 208 4 2 1 Increment selection mnie eini oeei nennen nennen nnne nnne nnns 208 4 2 2 Moving axis and direction selection ssssseseeem Hee 209 4 2 S Explanation items A Al Ce rv Tae dae 209 CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION urraca 210 XI C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling
108. i i R E T a E 53 amp L Mn L Fig 6 8e Linear to linear corner is less than 1 degree inside movement b Move along the outer of abtuse angle corner 180 2290 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to circular 148 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation S Tool nose center path Fig 6 9a Linear to linear obtuse angle outside movement Programmed path euin oA Tool nose center path Fig 6 9b Linear to circular obtuse outside movement A O te y 3 3 fe 3 Linear to linear 4 Circular to circular S Tool nose center path Fig 6 9c Circular to linear obtuse angle outside movement K Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 9d Circular to circular obtuse angle outside movement c Move along the outer of acute angle corner a lt 90 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to circular S Tool nose center path Fig 6 10a Linear to linear acute movement outside Tool nose center path y c Fig 6 10b Linear to circular acute movement outside 3 Circular to linear 4 Circular to circular 149 SWIN OA v 3 o e o 3 3 5 e CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual L s Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Fig 6 10c Circular to linear acute movement outside Fig 6 10d Circular to circular acute movement outside d When it is exceptiona
109. inch 2 The machine coordinate is linear axis whether the absolute coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled which based on the data parameter No 027 No 029 3 The stored pitch error compeneation is linear axis euin oA D 2 O te 9 3 3 2 te Note The start of the function of the Cs axis the Bit 5 digits RCSx of the state parameter No 026 or No 028 can be set whether the function of Cs axis is enabled when the rotation axis is enabled ROTx 1 4 5 The Additional Axis is Linear Axis When the additional axes the 4 and the 5 axes are set to linear axes its functions are same as the basis three axes Realizable operation 1 Rapid traverse Positioning G90 91 GOO X Y Z A 2 Cutting feed G90 91 G01 X Y Z A F 3 Skip function G90 91 G31 X Y Z A F j 107 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 4 Reference position return G28 29 30 X Y Z A F j 5 G92 coordinate setting G92 X_ Y Z A 6 Manual Step MPG feed Manual machine zero return Note When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the axis names of additional linear axes are expressed with A WnjoA Explanations 1 When the additional linear axis rapidly moves or performs it can be simultaneously specified with any axes of X Y and Z Each axis may rapidly move at its customized speed 2 When the additonal linear axis is performed the cutting feed G01 or used
110. inch machine system The range of linear axis speed parameter is codetermined by machine tool type and increment system For example data parameter NO 070 upper limit of cutting feedrate Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals Machine Increment Linear axis Rotary axis Parameter range tool type system speed unit speed unit Metric 1 u IS B2 10 60000 lt machine B mm min eem 0 1u IS C 10 6000 2 deg min 3 Inch 1u IS B 5 60000 p machine x 0 1inch min 0 1u IS C 5 6000 system As rotary axes are not involved in metric inch interconversion the rotation speed unit is always deg min The switch between different increment systems may cause the excess of permitted running speed set by data parameter Therefore at the first power on after switching the system automatically modifies relevant speed parameters and gives an alarm U e e 9 3 3 2 e Increment parameter The unit and range of linear axis speed parameter are codetermined by machine tool type and increment system For example parameter NO 135 X axis software limit Machine Increment Linear axis Linear axis parameter tool type system increment unit range Metric 1u IS B 0 001mm 99 999 999 99 999 999 machine E 0 1u IS C SQUID 9 999 9999 9 999 9999 system Inch 1u IS B 0 0001 inch 9 999 9999 9 999 9999 machine 7 i 0 1u IS C 0 00001 inch 999 99999 999 99999 system
111. input or the value is O Metric thread leading the solution range 0 001 500mm The alarm 201 may alarm if it is not input F The number of the thread head per inch the solution range 0 06 25400 gear inch Start angle 3 21 4 Technic Specification Acceleration deceleration Rigid tapping adopts the acceleration or deceleration before a straight line to control Override The override regulation is invalid for rigid tapping infeed but the override value can be adjusted or not which is determined by data parameter Dryrun G84 G74 can be used a dry run the dry run equals to the feedrate along Z axis The override adjustment is invalid in dry run e Machine lock G84 G74 can be used a machine lock the tapping axis and spindle axis are not moved when the machine lock is enabled Resetting The resetting can be reset the tapping when the rigid tapping is performed but the G74 G84 can be not be reset Dwell The dwell is disabled Working G84 G74 is only valid in Auto or MDI mdoe 101 SWIN OA v o a D 3 3 2 e SWIN OA v 3 e 2 o 3 3 5 e GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e Manual feed The rigid tapping can not used for manual feed e Tool length compensation If the tool length compensation G43 G44 or G49 is specified in canned cycle the offset value is added till position to the point R e Cutter compensation Cutter compensatio
112. is done by the 1 8 of the set frequency 0 Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency 302 Chapter 3 Parameter ZNIK 1 Direction keys locked during zero return homing continues to end by pressing direction key once 0 Direction keys unlocked but should be held on during zero return ZE TMANL 1 Manual tool change for T code 0 Auto tool change for T code E EBCL 1 Program end sign EOB displays semicolon 0 Program end sign EOB displays asterisk ISOT 1 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse valid 0 Prior to machine zero return after power on manual rapid traverse invalid SCRD 1 Coordinate system holding on at power down 0 Coordinate system not holding on at power down G54 coordinate system is set after power on G01 1 G01 status when power on 0 G00 status when power on RSCD 1 G54 coordinate system when reset 4 0 Coordinate system not changed when reset SKPI 1 High level valid for skip signal M eunjoA 0 Low level valid for skip signal G31P 1 G31 immediately stops when skip signal is valid 5 i 0 G31 slows down to stop when skip signal is valid S E 3 7 ZRS5 1 There are machine zero point in 5 axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine Zero point in 5 axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero sign
113. it should be more than O The first cutting position is over the bottom of the groove then bottom position is regarded as machining position Q The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis direction K The width increment of cut inside XY plane it should be less than the tool radius and more than 0 V The distance to the end machining plane at the rapid traverse it should be more than 0 when cutting D Tool radius serial number the value range is 0 32 0 is the default of DO The current 70 Chapter 3 G Command tool radius is determined by the specified serial number Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cut W depth downwards in cutting feedrate 4 Mill a round face with radius I helically by K increment each time from center point to outside 5 The Z axis is retracted to the R reference surface at the rapid traverse rate SWIN OA 6 X and Y axes are positioned to the center at the rapid traverse rate 7 Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 8 Cut along Z axis for Q V depth 9 Cycling the operations from 4 8 till the round surface of total depth is finished 10 Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path Z A 1 Initial plane ie I I z o e 9 3 3 5 e
114. length compensation Reference point 11 Ote eL 12 es Ds Qi EE NOS a Cae ae 13 Dn a3 400 sl 250 S250 4150 The hole number from 1 to 6 drilling 10 The hole number from 7 to 10 drilling 520 The hole number from 11 to 13 boring 95 hole depth is 50mm T11 T15 T31 i e 1 ce jReturn position WE LIU h 89 SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e CGS CNC GSE 90 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual The values of offset numbers H11 H15 and H 31 are separately set to 200 0 190 0 and 150 0 the program is as following N001 G92 X0 YO Z0 The coordinate system is set at the reference point N002 G90 G00 Z250 0 NO03 G43 ZO H11 Plane tool length compensation is performed at the initial plane N004 S30 M3 The spindle starts NO005 G99 G81 X400 0 Y 350 0 Z 153 0 R 97 0 F120 0 1 hole is machined after positioning NOO6 Y 550 0 2 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N007 G98 Y 750 0 3 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned NO008 G99 X1200 0 4 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned NOO9 Y 550 0 N010 G98 Y 350 0 5 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned 6 hole is machined after p
115. low high level NO 004 MDI 50000 TOO Hee Key in 1 to finish the alteration 248 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore BIT PARAMETER 00000 NOO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 801 00000000 009 66611111 617 00101000 002 80000010 010 66611111 018 800000000 003 80000000 611 00000080 019 1600000080 604 01 o0000 012 68618611 020 800000000 005 00010001 013 190000011 021 00000000 006 00000000 014 68611111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000009 023 00000000 008 86611111 016 A 800000000 024 00000000 Week RDRN DECI PROD eek eee SCH bit5 1 0 DEC signal is low high level NO 884 MDI 5000A Tee Hag B Alteration of the data parameter pitch data 1 Data parameter alteration 1 2 3 4 Turn on the parameter switch Enter the MDI mode Move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set Key in the new parameter value lt 2 c 3 O E O o E a o 3 DATA E 5 Press key the value is entered and displayed 6 After all parameters setting is finished the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for security Example 1 Set the data parameter N2059 to 4000 Move the cursor to N2059 by the steps above key in 4000 by sequence in the prompt line the figure is as follows DATA PARAMETER 00000 NO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 049 1 057 1 065 100 050 1 058 i 066 100 051 1 059 T600 067 100 052 1 060 T600 068 100 053 1 061 T600 069 400 054
116. move simultaneously 3 1 2 Manual rapid traverse First press vm key in the feed axis and direction selection area Tes Les zd V l a till the rapid traverse indicator in the State area lights 202 Chapter 3 Manual Operation up The corresponding axis can be rapidly moved positively or negatively by pressing direction selection key and the axis stops moving if releasing the key and the direction selection keys of X Y Z 4th 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to move simultaneously In Manual rapid mode press AN l key to make the indicator go out and the rapid traverse is invalid it enters the Manual feed mode Note 1 Before machine zero return the validity of manual rapid traverse is set by the ISOT of the bit parameter No 012 Note 2 In Edit or MPG mode bn API 3 1 3 Manual feedrate override adjustment key is invalid S lt 3 D E O jo D o O Bl T Y In Manual mode the E Or e key in can be pressed to modify the Manual feedrate override and the override has 16 levels The relation of the feedrate override and the feedrate is as the following table Feedrate override 95 Feedrate mm min 0 0 10 2 0 20 3 2 30 5 0 40 7 9 50 12 6 60 20 70 32 80 50 90 79 100 126 110 200 120 320 130 500 140 7
117. o E GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 11 FLASH OPERATION 11 1 File list O O m inan Press LMM jor key to select MDI or EDIT mode press inse key to enter file list interface the page is as follows FILE LIST 00006 NO00000 5 00002 CNC B 00003 CNC B 00004 CNC B 00005 CNC E 00006 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00008 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 17B 2009 05 07 17 14 21 NOTE CHG SEEK USB EOB OPEN RETURN EDIT So000 TOO Hae pes In edit or MDI mode press key to identify U disk If identification is unsuccessful it prompts Fail to connect U disk If identification is successful the following file list will be displayed FILE LIST 00000 NOO000 C user Ix i 00000 CNC E 09001 CNC 5 00001 CNC 0002 CNC 5 00002 CNC B 00003 i 00003 CNC E 00004 CNC i 00004 CNC E 00005 CNC 5 00005 CNC E 00006 CNC i 00006 CNC 00007 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00008 CNC E 00008 CNC E 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 108B 2009 04 02 09 34 42 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO C DISK EDIT SAAHA TOO Hae Special explanation The list information of disk CNC is displayed at the page left and list information of disk USB is displayed at the page right The display column will not display any information if U disk is not detected Character entry box file attributes information and user operation prompts are displayed
118. on the machine panel are all ineffective when the automatic lubricating is applied 5 3 7 Optional Block Skip The optional block skip function can be applied when one block is neither performed nor deleted in a program When the is at the head of a block and the optional block skip switch is ON the Block Skip key on machine panel or external output for optional block skip is enabled this block is not run in automatic operation e Relevant Signals Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input optional block skip key signal on X18 7 signal machine panel Output Optional block skip indicator on Y18 6 signal machine panel e Function description 1 When optional block skip signal is effective a block headed with is not performed 2 The optional block skip function is enabled only in Auto MDI and DNC modes 366 5 3 8 Machine Lock Appendix e Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input Machine lock key signal on the X19 0 signal machine panel Output Machine lock indicator on the Y18 5 signal machine panel e Function description 1 Machine locks are enabled in any mode 2 The machine lock state can not be shifted when program is running 5 3 9 MST Lock Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input MST lock key signal on the machine X19 1 signal panel Output MST lock indicator on m
119. or altering to the original CNC systems and the accessories Be responsible for the failure to observe the provisions for operation adjustment maintenance installation and storage in the manual VI Contents Contents Volume Il PROGRAMMING ooccnncccocnocccnosonooncnncnncoonnoncnncnononoonconoonnonnnnco coo nnonoocoo nro rccanc osoo 1 CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING FUNDMENTALG ccssscsssssssssesscssssccessecssssssessecsscsssssscsesssssssesseseees 3 A NN 3 1 2 Program EXCUSA E A DM die s 7 1 2 1 Program Execution SequenCe ooococcccccononononnccnonococnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnennnnnnnnaninnns 7 1 2 2 Word Execution Sequence within Block sessss me 8 1 3 Basi Axes Increment sti ie eee e sia ette iei ees Pd de 9 1 3 1 Speed of Increment Systems sessssssssssssesseeeeeemerenee nennen nnne 9 1 3 2 Unit of Increment Systems sssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeen eene nennen nre nene 9 1 3 3 Data Ranges of Increment SysteM ooocooccccoccccccocococonooncnnnncncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnanrnnnnnnnninens 10 1 3 4 Data Ranges and Unit of Increment System ssssssssssseee 10 1 3 5 The Units and Ranges of Program Address Values ssssssssees 13 1 4 Additional Axes Increment System oooocononccnoncnconnconnncnonncnonnnnononcono nono n non n nn nn nn cnn enne non rra n cnn enne 14 1 4 1 Additional Axes in Current Increment SysteM o
120. original parameter data of suited step drive unit by user Recover standard parameter 3 servo For reading original parameter data of suited servo drive unit by user 184 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display AUTH OPERATION 00003 NO00600 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL gt INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Modify parameter and edit program KDI 50000 TOO Hae User page of 3 4 5 level AUTH OPERATION 00003 NOO00880 CURRENT LEVEL 2 Backup PAR Mach Resume PAR Mach SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS PASSWORD PASSED Can modify scrw comp amp macro prog PLC MDI so000 TOO Had User page of 2 level Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo 3 Password setting Display and set user operation level The password of GSK980MDa is composed of 4 levels including machine builder level 2 equipment management level 3 technician level 4 and machining operation level 5 Machine builder level 2 It allows to modify CNC bit parameter data parameter screw pitch parameter tool offset parameter edit part program including macro program edit and alter PLC ladder diagram upload and download ladder diagram Equipment management level 3 Initial password is 12345 The CNC bit parameter data parameterm screw pitch parameter tool offset par
121. performed from intermediate point to specified point from point B to C moving to the intermediate and command point at a rapid feedrate the action is Note Note 1 G29 is specified after G28 if an intermediate point is not specified by any of axes the system alarm will be generated Note 2 It is incremental distance against the intermediate point in G91 coordinate programming Note 3 Current position is reference point when the G29 command is followed to G28 or G30 it returns from reference point directly or it returns from current position if G29 command is not followed by G28 or G30 3 10 The 2nd 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return G30 Reference point is a fixed point on the machine By parameters 145 164 it can set four reference points in the machine coordinate system 45 SWIN OA v e e 9 3 gt 2 Q GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Machine coordinate set by reference point 2 Machine coordinate set by reference point 4 fachine co rdinate set Machine coordinate by reference point 3 set by refefence Machine coordinate origin Format G30P2 X Y Z themachine 2nd reference point return P2 can be omitted G30P3 X Y Z_ the machine 3rd reference point return G30 P4 X Y Z the machine 4th reference point return Function From the start point after the intermediate point by X Y and Z is reached at a rapid traverse rate th
122. point d jl X DO M NN I gt Q R 50 N TH ES Start ne 39 SWIN OA U o e 9 3 gt 2 o C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Example for the programming WnjoA v 3 o e o 3 3 5 e To program the above paths using the absolute mode and incremental mode respectively 1 Absolute mode G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 1 60 0 F300 0 G02 X120 0 Y60 0 I 50 0 Or G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 R60 0 F300 0 G02 X120 0 Y60 0 R50 0 2 Incremental mode G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 I 60 0 F300 0 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 1 50 0 Or G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 R60 0 F300 0 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 R50 0 The feedrate of circular interpolation is specified by F command it is the speed of the tool along the arc tangent direction Note 1 10 JO and KO can be omitted but it is very necessary to input one of the addresses I J K or R or the system alarm is generated Note 2 The X Y and Z can be omitted simultaneously when the end and start points share same position When the center point is specified by address I J and K it is a 360 arc G021 Full circle The circle is 0 when using R G02R_ not move It is recommended that programming uses R In order to guarantee the start and end points of the arc are consistent with the specified value the system will move by counting R again according to the selected plane when programmin
123. signal prior to cutting THDA 71 Thread machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration 0 Thread machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration VAL5 1 For 5 axis move key is positive is negative 0 For 5 axis move key Jis positive fis negative VAL4 1 For 4 axis move key is positive is negative 0 For 4 axis move key is positive fis negative VALZ 1 For Z axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Z axis move key is positive fis negative VALY 1 For Y axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Y axis move key is positive fis negative VALX 21 For X axis move key is positive lt is negative 0 For X axis move key is positive is negative CALH 71 Length offset not cancelled in reference point return 0 Length offset cancelled in reference point return SOT 1 Software limit is valid after zero return at power on 0 Software limit is valid once power on MZR5 71 Machine zero return in negative 5 axis 0 Machine zero return in positive 5 axis MZR4 1 Machine zero return in negative 4 axis 0 Machine zero return in positive 4 axis MZRZ 71 Machine zero return in negative Z axis 0 Machine zero return in positive Z axis MZRY 1 Machine zero return in negative Y axis 0 Machine zero return in positive Y axis MZRX 1 Machine zero return in positive X axis 0 Machine zero return in negative X axis RTORI 1 Spindle performs zero return wh
124. signs are executed normally in Auto mode 7 3 6 Optional stop In AUTO mode the valid optional stop function is as follows op OPTIONAL Press so key to enter optional stop and the indicator lights up The program will be stopped at command M01 Press A key again to continue program execution 7 4 Memorizing at power down 7 4 1 Program interruption in non DNC auto operation Operation method 1 Manual 1 After power on press conversion key press letter T letter 0 up down moving keys on pages program content edit to the block where the execution stops last time 2 Switch to the pages coordinate amp program machine zero Enter the next step after machine zero is performed 4 Switch to manual or MDI mode Locate to the block where it stops last time At this moment itis necessary to confirm whether it is at state G40 G49 G54 Ensure that tools are in a safe range during positioning 5 Switch to manual mode press conversion key It prompts Locate to the block where it stops last time It will recover the mode before power down Y N Press Y to recover the mode before power down Switch to auto mode press cycle start key to execute the block continuously from where it stops last time 239 S lt 3 D l O jo D 5 o O 2 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Operation method 2 Auto 1 After power on press conversion key press letter
125. spindle speed vibration occurs To guarantee the machine quality it is recommended that the spindle speed selected in machining is not less than the lowest speed of available torque exported by spindle Servo or inverter Cutting feed The CNC makes tool movement path and the path linear or circular arc defined by command into consistency The circular interpolation can be performed by two axis in selected plane when it is circular arc the helical interpolation is formed by the third axis linear interpolation linkage by which the CNC controls three directions movement for X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis at the same time The instantaneous speed of movement path in a tangential direction is consistent with the F command value so this is called CUTTING FEED or INTERPOLATION The cutting feedrate is supplied by F command which it is disassembled to each interpolation axis according to the programming path when the CNC performs the interpolation command cutting feed Linear interpolation The CNC can control the instantaneous speed in the directions of X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis so the vector resultant speed in these five directions are equal to the F command value 0 SF fe oF Jad d d d d fa ds eF dd dad ed 22 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes F is vector resultant speed for the instantaneous speed in X Y and Z axis directions The dx is instanta
126. the above nentioned interfaces 183 c 3 D O 1 o Ss o gt lt 9 c 3 y F O x 9 m o E C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 1 Setting interface There are 3 pages in this interface which can be viewed by and keys 1 SWITCH SETTING It is used for displaying the parameter program auto sequence No on off state PARM SWT when itis turned ON the parameters are allowed to be modified it is turned OFF the parameters are unallowed to be modified PROG SWT when it is turned ON the programs are allowed to be edited it is turned OFF the programs are unallowed to be edited AUTO SEG when it is turned ON the block No is created automatically it is turned OFF the block No is not created automatically input manually if it is needed In this page the state of on off can be switched by left right key or U and D key on the MDI panel SWITCH SETTING 09003 NO00000 gt PARM SWT OFF ON PROG SWT OFF ON AUTO SEG OFF ON MDI 50000 T0 Hae 2 Data backup In this page the CNC data bit parameter data parameter pitch parameter tool offset can be saved and restored Data backup user For CNC data backup by user save Recover backup data user For backup data recover by user read Recover standard parameter 1 test For reading original parameter data of CNC test by user Recover standard parameter 2 step For reading
127. the page bottom the 1 row shows the meaning of a bit O of an address where the cursor locates the bit to be displayed can be positioned by pressing LJ or key The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the bits of an address where the cursor locates PLC STATE 00003 NOO000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA X0000 00000000 X0008 00000000 X0016 00000000 Xx0001 00000000 X0009 00000000 x0017 00000000 X0002 00000000 x0010 00000000 Xx0018 00000000 X0003 00000000 x0011 00000000 X0019 00000000 Xo004 00000000 X0012 00000000 Xx0020 00000000 X0005 00000000 X0013 00000000 xo021 00000000 X0006 00000000 xool4 00000000 X0022 00000000 X0007 00000000 xo015 00000000 X0023 00009099099 Hook ak DECS DEC4 DECY eek kk kkk b1t7 Unused NO X0002 JOG so000 TOO Hada 3 PLC VALUE interface 191 lt e c 3 D F O x Co 9 m o E GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual In the page of this interface it orderly displays the values in the registers of T0000 T0099 D0000 D0999 C0000 C0099 DT000 DT099 DC000 DC099 etc By pressing key repeatedly it enters PLC VALUE interface The data values of PLC can be viewed by pressing key In this PLC VALUE page there is a cue line at the page bottom it displays the meaning of the parameter where the cursor locates As is shown in the following figure PLC DATA 00003 NO0O000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA DT666 0 DT668 0 DT6016 DTob1 0 DTAS
128. tool infeed Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping tool retract Setting range 0 4000 Unit ms 082 setting value is used when it is set to O Override value in rigid tapping tool retract 0 override is set to 100 Setting range 0 200 0 override is set to 100 Tool retract amount in deep hole rigid tapping high speed standard Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm 10 1000 Unit mm min 10 921571875 Unit mm min Voltage compensation for OV analog voltage output Setting range 1000 1000 Unit mV M eunjoA u0 3e e3su Voltage offset value when spindle max speed analog voltage 10V output Setting range 2000 2000 Unit mV Max spindle speed of 1 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 2 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 3 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 4 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Setting range 10 9999 Unit r min 310 Chapter 3 Parameter 110 7 Spindle speed resches to signal detection delay time Setting range 0 4080 Unit ms i i Max spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system Setting range 50 1000 Unit r min spindle encoder pulses Setting range 0 5000 Unit p r Itis drilling holes when 0 indicates G74 and G84 cycle TAX r9 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle spindl
129. 000000 009 06011111 017 00101000 002 00000010 010 06011111 018 00000000 003 00000000 011 90090000 019 10000000 004 01100000 012 00010011 020 00000000 905 00010001 013 10000011 021 00000000 006 00000000 014 600011111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000090 023 00000000 008 86811111 016 X 00000000 024 00000000 ee RDRN DECI eee PROD eek xe SCH bit5 1 0 DEC signal is low high level NO 604 MDI 50000 TOO HOO 2 Bitalteration 1 Turn on the parameter switch 2 Enter the MDI mode 3 Move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set 8 Method 1 press Method 2 Press address key Press or I t U or key to move the cursor to the No of the parameter to be set p a gt 4 Press and hold parameter and the bit is backlighted Press key to enter the page of the parameter to be set key in parameter No then press key gt or key for 2 seconds or press key to skip to a bit of the key to move the cursor to the bit to be altered then key in O or 1 5 After all parameters setting is finished the PARM SWT needs to be set for OFF for security 247 lt 9 c 3 O E je o O a o 3 lt o c 3 D F O x Co i e o E 5K Note After entering a bit of the parameter press and hold G EsESI CNC GSK980MDa Millin
130. 1 062 T600 oTO 8088 055 1 063 71600 O71 50 056 1 064 100 872 186 Max speed of rapid locating in X mm min NO 6059 4000 DO MDI soo00 TOO Hae E INPUT Press key to finish the alteration The page is as follows 249 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual DATA PARAMETER 00000 NO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 049 1 a57 1 065 100 050 1 858 1 066 100 851 1 _ 859 4000 O67 100 052 1 060 7600 068 100 053 1 861 T6600 069 400 054 1 062 T6600 aro S000 855 1 863 7600 O71 50 056 1 064 100 O72 100 Max speed of rapid locating in X mm min NO 6059 KDI 50000 TOO Hee S Example 2 Set the X axis value of the pitch data No 000 to 12 set the value of Z axis to 30 S Move the cursor to pitch data No 000 by the steps above key in X12 by sequence in the cue line the figure is as follows e SCREW PITCH PARAMETER 00000 NO000600 E NO X T Z C NO X T K C D 6000 a 0 6008 0 S 901 a a 0 6009 i 5 002 a 010 8 i 4 4 883 i D D 004 a DI2 885 a g E tS 006 0 0 als 007 Br C015 UNIT 001 mm NO 600 X12 MDI 50000 TOO Hae DATA INPUT Pres key to finish the alteration The page is as follows SCREW PITCH PARAMETER 00000 NO00000 NO X T Z e NO X Y E C 6000 12 a 0 6008 0 i 801 a a 0 0 6009 0 g 002 g 0 010 6 883 D D
131. 10 and G111 So the workpiece without groove can be machined by rough milling directly The helical feeding path is as follows Tool Helical feeding lead the parameter of 97 Workpiece Tool diameter 2r 79 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 15 2 15 Rectangle groove inner fine milling cycle G136 G137 Format G136 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D K U F G137 Function The tool performs fine milling inside the rectangle with the specified width and direction it is returned after finishing the fine milling SWIN OA Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 G136 Finish milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CCW G137 Finish milling cycle inside groove of rectangle in CW l The rectangle width along the X axis the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm J The rectangle width along the Y axis the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm D Sequence number of tool radius the value range is 0 32 the O is default value of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number K The distance between the finish milling start point and the rectangle side in X axis direction the value range is indicated as 0 9999 999mm U Corner arc radius no corner arc transition if it is omitted When the U is omitted or it is equal to O and the tool radius is more than 0 the alarm is generated Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane at the ra
132. 137 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 O GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 Operation such as addition and subtraction OR XOR Example 1 2 3 SIN 4 D mand 3 indicate the order of operations 5 3 4 Bracket Nesting Brackets are used to change the order of operations Brackets can be used to multinesting Note that the square bracket is used to enclose an expression the round bracket is used in comments When the priority is not defined it is advised to use square bracket to enclose 5 4 Branch and Repetition In a program the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement Three types of branch and repetition operations are used 1 GOTO statement unconditional branch 2 IF statement conditional branch IF THEN 3 WHILE statement repetition WHILE 5 4 1 Unconditional Branch GO TO statement Go to the block with sequence number n when a sequence number out the range of 1 99999 is specified an alarm is raised A sequence number can also be specified using an expression Format GOTO n n sequence number 1 99999 Example GOTO 1 GOTO 101 5 4 2 Conditional Branch IF statement Specify a conditional expression after IF GOTO format IF conditional expression GOTO n If the specified conditional expression is satisfied a branch to sequence number n occurs If the specified condition is not satisfied
133. 140 or G141 SWIN OA E a o e o 3 3 5 e 3 15 3 3 Arc serial punching G142 G143 Format G142 G98 G99 Gxx X Y R Z B I JJ C_ F G143 Function Serial punching is performed according to the specified punching number on specified arc Explanation G142 Punching in CW G143 Punching in CCW Gxx Punching type G73 G74 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 X Y End point coordinate for the arc it is fixed for G17 plane R R plane position Z Hole depth B Radius of arc when a negative value is specified it is major arc L J The circle center and radius are calculated by or J when the R value is not specified C Number of punching F Cutting feedrate Related Parameter Bit 7 of the parameter 014 1 Hole positioning for serial punching is performed by cutting path G01 G03 0 Hole positioning for serial punching is performed by the rapid traverse path GOO For example G91 G142 G81 X100 R50 Z 50 C4 Start point End point ee C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Example 2 when drilling 7 holes in full circle the start points and end points are coordinate origins and the radius is 50 hole depth is 50 00001 E G00 G90 X0 YO ZO G17 3 G98 G142 G82 150 JO R 10 Z 50 C7 F3000 cus M30 y O le D 3 9 3 T S a 3 T y 4 6 er 5 Note 1 In continuous drilling when the start point is identical to end point no drilling will be
134. 2 M99 Argument specification two types of argument specification are available Argument specification it uses letter other than G L O N and P once each In repeated specification the last one prevails Argument specification Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable number number number 117 WnjoA a fo e Q o 3 3 5 e SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Note Addresses that need not to be specified can be omitted Local variables corresponding to an omitted address are set to null Argument specification Il Uses A B C and li Ji Ki i is 1 10 and automatically decides the argument specification type according to the letters and the sequence Uses A B C once each and uses I J and K up to ten times Argument specification Il Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable number number number 1 K3 J7 2 la 7 24 A B C l4 J4 Ki l gt J2 Ks gt e a e Note 1 Subscripts of I J and K for indicating the order of argument specification are not written in the actual program Note 2 Argument I J K do not need to be written in orders They will be identified according to the present sequence For example G65 P9010 A1 B2 C3 114 J15 I6 J7 K9 K11 K12 J30 The variables are passed as follows 11424 J15 gt H5 16327 J7 gt H8 KI gt H6 K11 gt H9 K12 12
135. 2 1 1 Drive interface definition 1 CPn 9 CPn 2 DIRn 10 DIRn 3 PCn 11 GND Signal Explanation 4 24V 12 VCC CPn CPn Command pulse signal 2 n bes DIRn DIRn Command direction sigal 7 ENn 15 GND PCn Zero signal 8 RDYn ZSDn l l ALMn Drive unit alarm signal C ENn Axis enable signal Fig 2 1 CN11 CN12 CN13 SETn Pusle disable signal interface DB15 female 2 1 2 Command pulse and direction signals nCP nCP are command pulse signals nDIR nDIR are command direction signals These 3 two group signals are both difference output AM26LS31 the interior circuit for them is shown in Fig 2 2 5 o S nDIR nDIR nDIR o 2 nCP nCP nCP Fig 2 2 Interior circuit of comrnand pulse and direction signals 2 1 3 Drive unit alarm signal The low or high level of the drive unit alarm level is set by the CNC bit parameter No 009 BITO BIT4 whose interior circuit is shown in Fig 2 3 U40 R amp 2 TLP181 ALMn Fig 2 3 interior circuit of drive unit alarm signal 275 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual This input circuit requires that the drive unit transmits signal by the following types in Fig 2 4 Type 1 Type 2 ALMn ALMn Fig 2 4 Signal types of drive unit 2 1 4 Axis enable signal ENn nEN signal output is valid as CNC works normally nEN signal to OV when the drive unit alarm or emergency alarm occurs CNC cuts o
136. 2009 04 09 11 35 46 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO U FLASH EDIT 5000A TOO Hae S E 11 2 4 Open CNC file E 1 In EDIT and AUTO mode select the CNC format file when there is no program Q execution S FILE LIST 00006 NO00000 S C user Uy 00005 CNC l 00001 CNC B 00006 CNC Bi 00002 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00003 CNC B 00008 CNC E 00004 CNC Ii 00009 CNC i 00005 CNC ll 00010 CNC 0006 CNC B 00011 CNC E 00097 CNC Bi 00012 CNC l 00008 CNC Bi 00013 CNC l 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 104p 2009 64 16 10 15 20 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO C DISK EDIT 50000 TOO Hae EOB 2 Press key to open the file Current page is switched to program content page PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL U 00006 CNC DAOG 00006 554 G90 GO XO YO Ze 543 H1 281 r 2 z 10 158 G44 H2 T30 bea 49 KO YO Z M38 EDIT s9000 TOO Hae Special explanations 1 The program above number 9000 can not be opened with authority level 3 or under 266 Chapter 11 Flash Operation level 3 2 The program file can not be opened with authority level 5 Attentions 1 In program content it is not allowed to do any operation on U disk These operations are setting up duplication rename deletion editing save etc Process and check operations can be done for programs on U disk in page program content 2 The called subprogram in auto run should in a same level of list with main
137. 26 825 HI SIN useuueuueuus Calculates the hole position on X axis G90 G81 X 5 Y 6 2426 R 18 F 9 Drilling after moving to the target position pa dk S Updates the angles O A eee eee Decrements the number of holes END 1 119 WnjoA U e e 9 3 3 O C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE G 3 G80 4 cet te Returns the G codes to the original state M99 Argument meanings Z3 store G codes of 03 group 5 X coordinate of the next hole to drill 6 Y coordinate of the next hole to drill gt G66 modal call Shown as follows machine 3 holes h1 h2 h3 Current tool X50 Y65 Bo position X0 Y23 5 7 ye T e h1 p E a a X100 Y20 Call format G66 P9201 Aa Bb Cc the argument in this example is assumed Macro program 00001 G90 G17 GOO X0 YO Z0 G00 X150 Y20 position G66 P9201 A 10 B 40 C2000 pass the argument be ready for machining G00 X100 Y20 position to h1 call macro program hole machining G00 X50 Y65 position to h1 call macro program hole machining M09 non movement code does not call macro program G00 X0 Y23 5 position to h1 call macro program hole machining G67 cancel macro program modal call G00 X150 Y20 positioning return M30 Called macro program O9201 ma
138. 260 000 Therefore set an offset value moving from O to 10 000 at compensation point 255 set an offset value moving from 10 000 to 20 000 at offset point 254 At compensation point N set an offset value moving from N 256 x compensation iterval to N 255 x compensation interval The above is the example of following compensation interval errors Compensation interval Compensation value 0 10 000 2 20 000 10 000 0 30 000 20 000 7 40 000 30 000 3 Machine Drive unit current Drive unit current coordinat Compensation Comperisatc command pulses command pulses e system parameter No D ovatae before offsetting after offsetting Reference 0 0 point 0 10 000 255 2 10000 10002 20 000 254 0 20000 20002 30 000 253 7 30000 29995 40 000 252 3 40000 39998 Actually the machine moves from the point 40 000 to the reference point the screw pitch compensation is 3 7 0 2 2 347 M eunjoA 5 a p D et o 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual M wnjoA 3 m p D et O 5 348 Appendix Appendix XIGNHddV GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System 5K gt a y e Z a 350 Appendix Appendix 1 Dimensions of Additional Panel AP01 APO01 Aluminum alloy 420mmx71 mm it can be mounted below the panel Its figure and dimensions are as follows 6reserved botton h
139. 3 e GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 15 3 2 Rectangle series punch G140 G141 Format G140 G98 G99 Gxx X Y R Z A B J F_ G141 Function Performing series punch on each side of the rectangle according to the punch number specified Explanation G140 Punching in CW G141 Punching in CCW Gxx Punching type G73 G74 G81 G83 G84 G85 G86 G88 G89 X Y End coordinate of the first rectangle side R R plane position Z Hole depth A The punching number on the 1 and 3 side B The punching number on the 2 and 4 side J The length of the 2 side F Cutting feedrate Related Parameter Bit 7 of the parameter 014 1 Hole positioning of serial punching is performed by cutting path G01 G03 0 Hole positioning of serial punching is performed by the rapid traverse path G00 For example The end point coordinate of the rectangle first side is X90 Y40 the length of the 2 side is 20mm as for the rectangle path punching The punching holes are machined by G81 to punch 3 holes at 1 and 3 side each other punch 2 holes at 2 and 4 side each other the hole depth is 25mm End point at the 1 side Its programming is as follows G90 G17 GO X0 YO Z25 M03 G140 G81 X90 Y40 R5 Z 25 A3 B2 J20 F800 G80 GO X100 Y100 M05 M30 Start point i And End point There are 10 holes such as A1 A3 B4 B5 A6 A8 B9 and B10 to be machined as in above figure Not
140. 3 o e 2 m El 3 5 e gt O a Oo md 6 GOR GC som p a i zm m Me it c 0 Characteristics Y Five axes control X Y Z 4th and 5th 3 axes linkage optional interpolation precision 1um 0 1um maximum speed 60m min optional axis types linear axis or revolving axis for the 4th and 5th axes CS axis control available for the 4th and 5th axes Y Electronic gear ratio 1 32767 1 327067 Y Screw pitch error compensation backlash compensation tool length compensation tool abrasion compensation and tool nose radius compensation Y Embedded with PLC can be downloaded to CNC from PC Y DNC function supports for real time program transmission for machining Y Compatible with G commands in GSK980MC GSK928MA and GSK980MD 26 kinds of canned cycles such as drilling boring circular rectangular groove rough milling full circle rectangular finish milling linear rectangular arc continuous drilling Y Spindle encoder tapping and rigid tapping can be detected during tapping cycle so that high precision machining can be performed C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE Y Metric inch programming automatic chamfering function and tool life management func
141. 30 Format M30 Function If M30 command is executed in the Auto mode the automatic run is ended after the other commands of current block are executed the system cancels the tool nose radius compensation and the cursor returns to the beginning of the program when the workpieces number is added by one whether the cursor returns to the head of the program is determined by parameters The cursor does not return to the beginning of the program when the BIT4 of parameter No 005 is set to 0 when it is set to 1 the cursor returns to the beginning of the program as soon as the program execution is finished Besides the above mentioned functions processed by CNC the functions of code M30 also can be defined by the PLC ladder diagram The function defined by standard ladder diagram can be turn OFF the M03 M04 or MO8 output signal after the M30 command is executed and meanwhile output MO5 signal 2 1 4 Subprogram Call M98 Format M98 Poooo The called subprogram No 0000 9999 The leading zero of subprogram can be omitted when the called times are not input the subprogram No should be 4 digits when the called times is input alled times 1 9999 calling for once the input can be omitted Function In Auto mode when the M98 is executed the subprogram specified by P is called after the execution of other codes in the current block The subprogram can be performed 9999 times at most M98 cannot be pe
142. 4 CIS C Unit Metric input G21 0 001 500 000 0 0001 500 0000 mm revolution Inch input G20 0 0001 50 0 0 00001 50 0 inch revolution 1 4 Additional Axes Increment System In the least increment system IS B or IS C under the condition that the additional axes are not involved in simultaneous control and just used for separate motion such as feeding and the requirement for precision is not high when the least increment is 0 01 the feedrate will be much faster greatly increasing the efficiency Therefore the additional axes least increment system is not necessary to be in accordance with the current least increment system To meet various requirements of users the system adds optional function to least increment system Additional axes increment system is set by state parameter No 026 No 028 Shown as follows pastas ERAS E RO ROT A4151 A4ISO Select increment system of 4th A4IS1 MISO Increment System of 4TH Least input output 0 0 Same to the X Y Z 0 1 IS A 0 01 1 0 IS B 0 001 1 1 IS C 0 0001 RSS ASSO ROSS ROSS ROS A5IS1 A5ISO Selecte increment system of 5th ASIS1 ASISO Increment System of 5TH ESSE input output 0 0 Same to the X Y Z 0 1 IS A 0 01 1 0 IS B 0 001 1 1 IS C 0 0001 Note the least input output in the table above are described without considering the metric inch system and rotation axes
143. 40 XO YO 51 SWIN OA v e e 9 3 gt 2 O GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 13 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G49 Functi G17 G43 unction G18 dy Ho G19 Tool length compensation function Explanation G43 and G44 are modal G codes they are effective before meeting other G codes in the same group z4 Specify this difference value to be Supposed Actual tool regarded as tool length y yy compensation value tool M A AAAS QA Workpiece VA The end point specified by Z axis moves an offset value as above figure G17 plane is selected Difference between supposed and actual machined tool length value is pre set at the offset storage when the program is applied Different length tool can be employed by changing tool length compensation value so program change is not needed Different offset directions were specified by G43 and G44 the offset number is specified by H code Offset axis The offset axes are vertical to the specified planes G17 G18 and G19 Specifying plane Offset axes eg Za Tool position offset for two or more axes can be used to specify the offset axis and the offset axis changed by 2 3 blocks Example X and Y axes compensation G19 G43 H_ X axis offset G18 G43 H_ Y axis offset composed with the previous block X and Y axes are compensated 52 Chapter 3 G Command Offset direction G43
144. 4V 32 Y2 3 43 Y3 6 11 Y1 2 22 24V 33 Y2 4 44 Y3 7 Note 1 The I O function of GSK980MDa drilling and milling CNC is defined by ladder diagram Note 2 If output function is valid the output signal is on to OV If output function is invalid the output signal is cut off by high impendance Note 3 If input function is valid the input signal is on to 24V If input function is invalid the input signal is cut off with it Note 4 The effectiveness of 24V OV is equal to GSK980MD power box terminals that have the same name Note 5 XDEC YDEC ZDEC DEC4 DEC5 ESP SKIP are fixed signals that can t be altered 2 8 1 Input Signal Input signal means the signal from machine to CNC when this signal is on with 24V the input is valid when it is off with 24V the input is invalid The contact point of input signal at machine side should meet the following conditions 287 M eunjoA gt o p D et O gt C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual The capacity of the contact point DC30V 16mA above Leakage current between contact points in open circuit 1mA below Voltage drop between contact points in closed circuit 2V below current 8 5mA including cable voltage drop There are two external input types for input signals one type is input by trigger point switch whose signals are from keys stroke switch and contacts of relay at machine side as is shown in Fig 2 31 5V CN
145. 6 no drill mode G73 G89 is specified for G140 G143 continuous drilling 217 drill holes cannot be less than 2 218 Pitch F value is not specified in G74 G84 219 drill interval is too small in canned cycle 230 S value is 0 and spindle feed is disabled 231 S value is beyond the maximum rotation speed for rigid tapping 232 other movement along axes is specified between M29 and G74 G84 233 G61 0 rigid tapping signal is abnormal 234 M29 repeated 235 When positioning is needed for command M29 it should not be in the same block with G74 G84 236 The 5th axis should be specified as rotation axis before rigid tapping 250 Radius compensation cannot be performed due to the coincidence of compensation start point and circular start point 251 Programming error result in mistake in radius compensation calculation 252 Programming error causes the end point of a machined arc is not on the arc 253 Programming error The coordinates of two adjacent points are coincident which leads to invalid radius compensation 254 Programming error Superposition of the centre and start point of the arc leads to invalid radius compensation 354 Appendix 255 Programming error Superposition of the centre and end point of the arc leads to invalid radius compensation 256 As arc radius is smaller than tool nose radius radius compensation cannot be performed 257 Programming error No intersection between two arcs wit
146. 6 ZE 188 SCRE a Hes RSE 150 HORSE 100 EHAE 1008 ON lt gt OO 00 o AIt a HIME Al 0 00 09 x Saeea TOO HAA 106 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis 7 AE FE EE AR GERA ARABES X a AAA X a 000 X 000 T a 000 Y 8 008 Y 000 Z 8 000 Z 8 000 000 6 000 6 000 000 C a 06 C 8 88 C 8 88 DAAA OAAAA 00096 NODO OD 0009 TOO HOO 4 4 Axis Startup The Bit 1 ROSx of data parameter No 026 and BitO ROTx of data parameter No 028 are separately set to use whether the 4 axis and the 5 axis is either the linear axis or rotation axis The parameter settings are shown below ROS ROT Content 0 0 Linear axis 1 It can be switched between metric and inch 2 All of the coordinate values are linear axis 3 The stored pitch error compeneation is linear axis Rotation axis Type A 1 It can not be switched between metric and inch 2 The machine coordinates are cycled based on the setting value of data parameter No 189 No 190 Whether the absolute coordinate and relative coordinate are cycled which based upon the data parameter No 027 No 029 3 The stored pitch error compensation is rotation axis 4 The movement amount is less than one turn when the reference position G28 G30 is returned Ineffective setting forbidden Rotation axis Type B 1 It can not be switched between metric and
147. 8 CNC E 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 168B 2009 04 02 09 34 42 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO C DISK EDIT s0000 TOO Hae Special explanation Duplication can not be done under 5 level authority 11 2 3 CNC file search In EDIT and AUTO mode input target program number in input column and press to search this program 5 c 3 1 E O o D D o gt FILE LIST 000909 NO00000 C use Use amp AN E 00001 CNC B 00001 CNC Bi 00002 CNC B 00002 CNC B 00003 CNC B 00003 CNC B 00904 CNC B 00004 CNC B 090905 CNC B 00005 CNC B 06006 CNC B 00006 CNC B 090907 CNC B 00007 CNC B 00908 CNC B 00008 CNC Bi 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 17B 2009 05 07 17 14 21 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO U FLASH EDIT so000 TOO Hee If program search is successful after input O5 the cursor moves to target program If this program can not be searched the file dose not exist will be prompted at message column 265 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK FILE LIST 00000 Negeee C user uy DOS CNC E 00001 CNC B 00006 CNC l 00002 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00003 CNC B 00008 CNC l 00004 CNC l 00009 CNC E 00005 CNC E 00010 CNC E 00006 CNC B 00011 CNC E 00097 CNC E 00012 CNC B 00008 CNC Bi 00013 CNC Bi 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 17B
148. 9 999 9999 999 Ready point offset value ite 45241 5245 Jem axes G55 workpiece zero _9999 999 9999 999 PRANE point offset value ite 1 kpi Read 45261 5265 a tt ihe point offset value ite 1 7 kpi Read 45281 5285 gt SAKES das WOMIECS te Dr r point offset value ite 1 kpi Read 5301 5305 Seve GHA O O lo onguggod ces nto point offset value ite 1 5 G59 kpi Read 45321 5325 deus workpiece zero 9999 999 9999 999 en point offset value ite 124 Chapter 5 Macro Program 5 2 1 Null Variables When the variable value is undefined the variable is null Variable 0 is always null and can be read only a referencing The address itself is ignored when an undefined variable null variable is quotated When 1 lt Null When 1 0 G90 X100 Y 1 equals to G90 X100 G90 X100 Y 1 equals to G90 X100 YO b Arithmetic operation Null equals to 0 in any case except when assigned by Null When 1 lt Null gt When 21120 42 81 assignment 22 14 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to Null equals to 0 2 1 5 H2 841 5 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to O equals to O 2 1 1 2 1 1 The arithmetic operation result 2 The arithmetic operation result 2 equals to 0 equals to 0 c Conditional expression lt Null gt differs from 0 only for EQ and NE When 1 Null When
149. 90 150 1260 Note There is about 2 fluctuating error for the data in the table 203 GGSK CNC GSE GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 1 4 Manual rapid override adjustment 9 In the manual rapid traverse or key in can be pressed also ono Sr Aran VeRO muak 50M by On m ADD RELATIVE POS page key with the respective override FO 25 50 100 to modify the lt 2 Manual rapid override and there are 4 gears of FO 25 50 100 for the override FO is set by 3 data parameter No 069 Q 3 1 5 Relative coordinate clearing o EA o emo m E 3 1 Press key to enter Position interface then press or key to select the RELATIVE JOG POS 00000 NOOO00 00696 NHG 00 617 690 Gbg G21 G46 649 Gad G38 palon amp 00 M30 JOG F 1288 ALIS FE 4 FED OVRI 158 RAP OVRI 186 SPI OVRI 160 FART CHT a CUT TIME 60 00 00 0009 TOO Hae 1 680 13 776 1 344 X CANCEL 2 Press key to make the X in the page to blink then press 204 key Chapter 3 Manual Operation RELATIVE POS 00696 Nagg 00000 NODDOO bo 5 cx cs X 0 000 Y 13 776 1 344 JOG 50009 TOO HOO 3 The clearing operations of other coordinates are the same as above F 160 5 b Msg JOc F 1260 ACT F E FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 18005 SPI OVRI 100 3 2 Other Ma
150. 99 99999 unit 0 001mm 324 Chapter 3 Parameter X machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point Y machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point i 6 The 5 machine coordinate of the 4th reference point Setting range 99999999 99999999 unit 0 001mm M eunjoA 3 2 11 Rotary axis function gt o p D et O 5 RE RTORI 1 M29 is executed Spindle need to return zero 0 M29 is executed Spindle need not to return zero RTPCP 1 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G73 0 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G83 RTCRG 1 Do not wait for 661 0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled 0 Do wait for G61 0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled CE a E E E T ROSE EE RCS4 1 Cs function of 4th axis is valid power on 0 Cs function of 4th axis is invalid power on ROS4 ROT4 Set the type of 4 axis 325 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual ren Rotary Rotary 8 vaia mop o 3 7 PROSE 9 quo me pese sip 20 RRT4 1 Zero mode D is used on the 4th rotary axis power on 0 Zero mode A B C are used on the 4th rotary axis power on RRL4 1 the 4th rel coor cycle func is valid power on 0 the 4th rel coor cycle func is invalid power on RABA 1 the 4th rotates according to symbol direction 0 the 4th rotates according to nearby rotation ROAA 1 the 4th abs c
151. ATAN are degree For example 90 30 means 90 5 degree 2 ARCSIN i ASIN Zj i the solution ranges are as indicated below when the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 0 270 90 when the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 1 90 90 ii when the j is beyond the range of 1 to 1 P S alarm is issued iii a constant can be used instead of the j variable 3 ARCCOS i ACOS j i the solution ranges from 180 0 ii when the j is beyond the range of 1 to 1 P S alarm is issued iii a constant can be used instead of the j variable 4 ARCTAN i ATAN j k Specify the lengths of two sides and separate them by a slash The solution ranges are as follows When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 0 0 360 Example when 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 225 l y Y 2 E Posey When the NAT bit of parameter No 015 is set to 1 180 180 Example when 1 ATAN 1 1 is specified 1 135 136 Chapter 5 Macro Program iY 1 WnjoA 498 Mead ii A constant can be used instead of the j variable v e te o 3 gt 2 ae 5 Natural logarithm i LN j i Note that the relative error may be greater than 10 ii When the antilogarithm j is zero or smaller P S alarm is issued iii A constant can be used instead of the j variable 6 Exponential function Zi EXP Zj i Note that the relative error may be greater than 10 ii When the resul
152. Bae only G43 G44 G49 R 4008 modal G code group 8 Fan only 4010 G98 G99 modal G code group Read 10 only G54 G59 4014 modal G code group Read 123 SWIN OA v 3 o e o E 3 5 e C GSK CNC 5K GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 14 only 4107 D code 0 32 Read only 4109 is 015000 jw only H 4111 dod 0 32 b only M 411 Read code 4113 0 99 ea only b 4114 Read 84113 44115 ene eee 0 99999 iis only P b 411 Read rogram number 4115 0 9999 ea only S code 4119 0 9999 is 4119 4120 T code 4120 Read 0 32 only 1 5 axes block end point Read 5001 5005 workpiece coordinate system tool 9999 999 9999 999 abi compensation value not included 1 5 axes current position Road 35021 5025 machine coordinate system tool 9999 999 9999 999 cl compensation value included 1 5 axes the current position Read 5041 5045 workpiece coordinate system 9999 999 9999 999 del contain tool compensation value X 1 5 axes skip signal position Rend 5061 5065 workpiece coordinate system tool 9999 999 9999 999 ni compensation value included 4 1 5 axes tool length Bend 5081 5085 System compensation value current 9999 999 9999 999 nl variable execution value y 1 ext kpi Read 5201 5205 a dee M point offset value ite 45221 5225 1 5 es G54 workpiece zero 999
153. C Machin Fig 2 31 The other type is input by switch with no contacts transistor as is shown in Fig 2 32 2 33 24V CNC fil M euinjoA gt m 4 A D et O 5 Fig 2 32 Connection of NPN 24V CNC fiii Fig 2 33 Connection of PNP 288 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals 2 8 2 Output signal The output signal is used for the machne relay and indicator if it is on with OV the output function is valid if itis off with OV the output function is invalid There are total 36 digital volume outputs in I O interface that they all have the same structure as is shown in Fig 2 34 CNC Machine ULNZS03 Fig 2 34 Circuit for digital volume output module The logic signal OUTx output from the main board is sent to the input terminal of inverter ULN2803 via a connector And there are 2 output types for nOUTx output with OV or high impedance Its typical application is shown in follows To drive LED A serial resistance is needed to limit the current usually 10mA that goes through the LED by using ULN2803 output to drive LED which is shown in Fig 2 35 CNC Machine M eunjoA ULN2803 output 5 7 sp D et Fig 2 35 e To drive filament indicator An external preheat resistance is needed to decrease the current impact at power on by using ULN2803 output to drive filament indicator and this resistance value should be within a range that the indic
154. CD unit D code determines the compensation value in tool offset page according to the bit 1 of parameter No 003 it is very important to notice that the value applied is diameter or radius 49 SWIN OA v e ae fp 3 gt 2 ae GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Setting range of compensation value is as follows Millimeter Input mm Inch input Cinch Compensation value 0 9999 999mm 0 999 999 inch e Compensation vector The compensation vector is two dimensional vector it is equal to the compensation value specified with D code The compensation vector is calculated in control unit its direction is real time modified along with the tool path in each block You can calculate how much compensation is needed for tool movement when the compensation value is applied in control unit Compensation path tool center path programmed path tool radius or diameter determined by compensation direction Note Compensation operation is executed in the plane selected by G17 G18 G19 For example when XY plane is selected X Y or I J is used to carry out compensation operation and vector operation The coordinate value whose axis in not in the compensation plane is not affected by the compensation e In 3 axis linkage control compensation only performed for the tool path projected on the compensation plane The alteration of compensation plane should be executed posterior to t
155. CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE interfaces display CNC internal signal state PLC addresses data state message the VERSION MESSAGE interface displays CNC software hardware and PLC version No 1 1 4 Machine panel The keys function in GSK980MDa machine panel is defined by PLC program ladder see their function significance in the machine builder s manual 166 The functions of the machine panel keys defined by standard PLC program are as follows Key Name Function explanation Function mode Dwell commanded by Auto mode DNC Feed Hold key program MDI MDI mode Cycle start commanded Auto mode DNC Cycle Start key by program MDI MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG Feedrate For adjustment of the Override keys feedrate mode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Name Function explanation Function mode Rapid override keys Spindle override keys Lubricating key Cooling key Spindle control keys Rapid traverse key Manual key feed For adjustment of rapid traverse For spindle speed adjustment spindle analog control valid For spindle Jog ON OFF For machine lubrication ON OFF For coolant ON OFF Spindle CCW Spindle stop Spindle CW For rapid traverse feedrate switching For positive negative moving of X Y
156. CNC System User Manual GskK onl Gode Words Input oerte A hh wea Gs 210 5 2 Code Words EXxecution cccccccceceeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeceesaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeseeeeieas 211 5 3 Parameter Setting miran ll Rele 212 5 4 Data ModificatiOn 5 5 ec ote te rete Pr ebbe tease erre 212 5 5 OUT Key Sta cT Em 213 CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT eeeeseseeeeeenenernren nennen 215 6 1 Program Creation ri A A gerendo ir ee o 215 6 1 1 Creation of the block number ooooooccccccccccocononoccccnccnononanancnnnocononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncannnncnnnnno 215 6 1 2 Input of the program content ssssssssssssssemeeeenen enne nnne 215 6 1 3 Search of the character ener 217 6 1 4 Insertion of the character ssssssssssessseee eene nre nnne 219 6 1 5 Deletion of the character eene enne 221 6 1 6 Modification of the character nennen nnne 221 6 1 7 Deletion of a single block ssssssssseee emere 221 6 1 8 Deletion of the blocks sssssssssssssseee eene nennen nennen nnne nnns 221 6 1 9 Segment deletion eessssssssssssssesesee ener nennen nennen nn nnne 223 6 2 Program annotation pti tetto P Peter epe ntm et eds 224 6 2 1 Annotation for program name ssssssssssss eene enemies 224 0 2 2 Block anota umi edt e Hide ee Re ELO fea Le 226 6 2 3 Alter program annotation eesssesssesssessssssse ses
157. Code function In rigid mode tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle When tapping is performed in rigid mode the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain feed thread lead which takes place along the tapping axis This operation does not vary even during accleration or deceleration Cycle process 1 Position to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Reduce to the point R plane rapidly then to the position where the C is specified at the rapid traverse rate 3 Tapping is performed to the bottom of the hole then the spindle stops 4 Dwell time P is performed if the P is specified 5 Spindle rotates reversely returns to the point R plane the spindle then stops dwell time P is performed if the P is specified 6 Return to the origin plane if the command is G98 Code path G74 shows a sample G74 G98 G74 G99 i EME u Xf a a AUG fr EET f j IN TA IS zez EAE Y P ABE MEH y p EME eae FT eae odo AME3 antes ZME3 ahis TOME um Z 7 AA i ERSE An 2B 1k 7O pO 2h gp EM gu ACHE Explanations When the tapping operation 3 is being performed the feedrate override can not be adjusted when the operation 5 is perfoming the speed override value is set by the data parameter 084 when the data parameter 084 is set to O the override value is fixed as 10096
158. F O gej O o o 5 Manual mode To enter Manual mode MPG mode Step mode key MANUAL To enter DNC mode by DNC mode key To enter DNC mode pressing this key in Auto mode 1 2 Summary of Operation Mode There are 7 modes that include Edit Auto DNC MDI Machine zero Step MPG Manual modes in this GSK980MDa e Edit mode In this mode the operation of part program setting up deletion and modification can be performed Auto mode In this mode the program is executed automatically MDI mode 169 lt o c 3 4 F O Ke gt 9 p o gt GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual In this mode the operation of parameter input command blocks input and execution can be performed e Machine zero mode In this mode the operation of X Y Z 4 5 axis machine zero return can be performed separately eo MPG Step mode In the Step MPG feed mode the moving is performed by an increment selected by CNC system e Manual mode In this mode the operation of Manual feed Manual Rapid feedrate override adjustment Rapid override adjustment and spindle ON OFF cooling ON OFF Lubrication ON OFF spindle jog manual tool change can be performed e DNC mode In this mode the program is run by DNC mode 1 3 Display Interface There are 7 interfaces for GSK980MDa such as Position Program etc and there are multiple pages in each interface Each interface page is separa
159. Feed per min G94 Feed per rev G95 Format G94 Fxxxx F0001 F8000 the leading zero can be omitted the feedrate per min is offered mm min 91 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Function The cutting feedrate is offered in mm min unit when the G94 is modal G command The G94 can be omitted if the current mode is G94 Format G95 Fxxxx F0 0001 F 500 The leading zero can be omitted Command Function The cutting feedrate is offered in mm rev unit when the G95 is modal G command The G95 can be omitted if the current mode is G95 The product of F command value mm r and current spindle speed r min is regarded as the command cutting feedrate to control the actual feedrate when the G95 Fxxxx is performed by system The actual cutting feedrate varies with the spindle speed The spindle cutting feed value per rev is specified by G95 Fxxxx it can form even cutting grain on the surface of the workpiece The machine should be installed spindle encoder when the G95 mode is used G94 and G95 are modal G commands in same group one of them is effective in one time G94 is initial modal G command it is defaulted effective when the power is turned on The conversion formula for feed value per rev and per min is as following Fm FxS Thereinto Fm Feed value per min mm min F Feed value per rev per rev mm r S Spindle speed r min SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e The feedrate value is set
160. HER aaa DELETE i E y M SI T EOB ALT MA DEL ZEE Corresponding n M S T OFFSET SETTING ey 338 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message ON ELA CRS TT CANT Co Ires ondin DATA DATA E p 9 INPUT output CHANGE CANCEL key 5 1 4 CNC internal state During the CNC auto run the current CNC running state can be viewed by DGN 064 DGN 110 diagnosis messages if there is no alarm and moving As power off X start posion of executing segment When the power off G mode of group 01 G00 G03 When the power off G mode of group 07 G40 G42 G99 When the power off G mode of group14 G54 G59 M eunjoA The pulse counts of spindle encoder The pulse counts of handwheel Note In fixed cycle program N2079 N2082 means the current section s start position but not the uoljze e SU program segment s start position when power off 339 M eunjoA gt o p A D et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5 2 PLC state This part of diagnosis is used to detect the signal state of machine gt PLC X PLC machine CY CNC gt PLC F PLC CNC G and alarm address A which can t be modified See the relative PLC manual for address F G significance and the signal significance of address A is defined by user himself 5 2 1 X address fixed addresses E E ESP Emergency st
161. IST 00043 N00000 Cy UA E 00000 CNC E 00010 CNC i 00001 CNC E 00011 CNC i 00002 CNC E 00012 CNC i 00003 CNC E 00013 CNC i 00004 CNC E 00014 CNC E 00005 CNC m E 00006 CNC 5 00007 CNC E 00008 CNC INPUT FILE INFO NOTE CHG C U SHIFT UNWRAP FOLDER EDIT SAAHA TOO Hae 11 2 2 Copy the file by one key current list in C disk current list in U disk DATA OUTPUT In edit mode select the CNC format file press key to copy it See the following figure ds OUTPUT D Select CNC file press lt 2 c 3 O F jo Le D o 5 FILE LIST 00000 NOO0000 C user E 00000 CNC E 00002 CNC 08082 CNC E 00003 CNC E 00003 CNC E 00004 CNC E 00004 CNC E 00005 CNC E 00005 CNC E 00006 CNC E 00006 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00008 CNC E 00008 CNC E 00009 CNC E 00009 CNC INPUT FILE INFO 108B 2009 04 02 09 34 42 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO C DISK EDIT DESA TOO Hae 2 After duplication is successful the cursor moves to the next file in current list The list on the other side is refreshed at once 264 Chapter 11 Flash Operation FILE LIST 00000 NO00000 C user Uy E 00000 CNC E 00001 CNC 5 00001 CNC D UA E 00002 CNC E 00003 CNC E 00003 CNC E 00004 CNC E 00004 CNC Bj 00905 CNC E 00005 CNC E 00006 CNC E 00006 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00007 CNC E 00008 CNC E 0000
162. If the switch is performed during the spindle rotation the spindle is immediately stopped and then shifts From Cs contour control shifts to the spindle speed control Set the CON G027 7 to 0 the spindle is then set in the spindle speed control mode Confirm the spindle movement command has been ended before shifting if the shift is performed when the spindle is being moved the system will alarm The reference position return of Cs contour control axis After the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour control mode from the speed control mode the current position is not confirmed the spindle should be returned to the reference position The reference position return of Cs contour control axis is as follows e Manual reference position return After the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode shift to the machine zero return mode The zero return of Cs axis is performed opening the feed axis and the direction selection signal Jn G100 or Jn G102 Automatic Specify G28 after the spindle enters the Cs contour control mode and the spindle moves to the intermediate point and then return to the reference position ZPn F094 becomes 1 after the referece position return is executed The operation of Cs contour control axis Manual Automatic If the Cs contour control axis has been returned to the reference position the operation of Cs axis is same as the common NC axis In the spindle speed control the Cs contour control axi
163. MENT In Edit mode the programs can be created selected modified copied and deleted and the bidirectional communication between CNC and CNC or CNC and PC can also be achieved To prevent the program to be modified or deleted accidentally a program switch is set for this GSK980MD system And it must be turned on before program editing Also 3 level user authority is set in this GSK980MD system to facilitate the management Only the operation authority is above 4 level 4 or 3 level etc can open the program switch for program editing 6 1 Program Creation 6 1 1 Creation of the block number The program can be with or without a block No The program is executed by the block numbered sequence except the calling When the AUTO SEG switch in setting page is OFF the CNC doesn t generate the block number automatically but the blocks may be edited manually When AUTO SEG switch in switch setting page is on the CNC generates the block number S lt 3 D i9 jo D E Et O 2 EOB automatically In editing press E08 key to generate block number of the next block automatically The increment of this block number is set by Ne216 SWITCH SETTING 00000 NO00000 PARM SWT OFF ON PROG SWT OFF ON AUTO SEG OFF ON MDI 50999 TOO HOO 6 1 2 Input of the program content D 1 Press 9 key to enter the Edit mode 2 Press mm key to enter the Program interface select the PRG CONTENT pa
164. Mode and Display Numerical For digit input Decimal o For decimal point input point Input key For confirmation of parameters offset values input Output key For start communication output Bota Ne For switching of message display For insertion alteration deletion of programs words ALTER Edit key MACRO in editing MT__lis a compound key switching between two functions by pressing repeatedly For block end sign input c 3 D O D 9 o gt Cursor moving For cursor moving control keys Page key Page switching in a same interface 1 1 3 Menu display To enter position interface There are RELATIVE POS ABSOLUTE POS INTEGRATED POS POS amp PRG pages in this interface 165 uonelado Jp euinjoA GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual To enter TOOL OFFSET interface There are TOOL OFFSET MARRO variables and Tool Life Management modifying Bit0 of state parameter No002 OFFSET interface displays offset values MARRO for CNC macro variables To enter alarm interface There are CNC PLC ALARM and ALARM Log pages in this interface To enter Setting interface There are SWITCH PASSWORD SETTING DATE amp TIME SETTING G54 G59 GRAGH SET and TRACK pages in this interface To enter DIAGNOSIS interface There are CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE VERSION MESSAGE interfaces switching between each interfaces by pressing the key repeatedly
165. N RAEES aan ta 233 7 1 4 Auto run from an arbitrary block sss 235 7 1 5 Adjustment of the feedrate override rapid override ssssssessssss 236 7 1 6 Spindle override adjustment sssessssssssseeeeene eene 237 7 2 DNG running iee does et do een Ede ee 237 7 3 RurinlrigiState A EEE 237 7 3 1 Single block execution sinira anae a paan a abed enne 237 TOAD Md ass 238 13 3 Machine lOCK x cicle AAA AAA AA 238 T9 MSTIOCK A A A 238 AS Ne BIOCK Sk iPod enanas 239 3 6 Optional SOPA 239 7 4 Memorizing at power down ssssssee e HHHeeeemeemenennnnnnnnne nnne nnne nnne nenas 239 7 4 1 Program interruption in non DNC auto operation ooooococococccccccccccoccncccnncncnnnnanoncnnnos 239 7 4 2 Interruption at power down on DNC auto operation ooooooccccncccccoccoccnccccccccnnnnanoncnnnos 240 CHAPTER8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION eeeseeeneeeeee nennen 241 omi B MACANO cc 241 8 2Machine Zero Return Steps ssssssssssssssssseeeeee ennemis nennen 241 XII Contents CHAPTERS DATA SETTING BACKUP and RESTORE eese 243 94 Bata Settlng comae eta eddie metis 243 TAS ICON A ee erii eese ke t ee e Ce adero E FER dre Ro RES 243 9 12 Graphic settihg 2 oer AA te tede db tede cet e dede ee 243 9 1 3 Parameter setting HH eeeeememmmnnnnnnnnnn nnns 245 9 2 The Password Setting and Alteration
166. PRG DISPLAY page in Edit mode 226 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management 2 Key in address key humerical key f by sequence take program 00001 for an example 3 Press key program 00001 will be deleted Note Press DELETE key in page program preview or file list to delete program 6 3 2 Deletion of all programs Steps 1 Select the PRG DISPLAY page in Edit mode sj ej s 2 Key in address key symbol key numerical key by sequence pare 3 Press key all the programs will be deleted Note Press delete key in page file list to delete all programs S 3 i gt o o 4 3 Q ct 9 gt 6 4 Selection of the Program When there are multiple programs in CNC system a program can be selected by the following 4 methods 6 4 1 Search method 1 Select Edit mode 2 Press po key to enter the PRG CONTENT page O 3 Press address key and key in the program No 4 Press or key the searched program will be displayed Note In step 4 if the program does not exist a new program will be created by CNC system after key is pressed 227 GSE 6 4 2 Scanning method 1 Select Edit or Auto mode 2 Press po key to enter the PRG DISPLAY page 3 Press address key G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 4 Press or key to display the next or previous program 6 4 3 Cursor method 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 to display the saved programs on
167. R DHE Program example NO G90 G00 X 50 Y 50 Z25 N1 G01 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 N2 G02 X50 R25 N3 G02 X100 R25 The left figure is shown the programmed path and the tool center path If the compensation radius D is changed in N3 for example the D2 is speicified in N3 block the value of D2 is not equal to the one of D1 in this case it is similar as b an alarm of the circular arc data error in cutter compensation C may occur 160 VOLUME Ii OPERATION GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual c 3 O O Le O fp F o 3 162 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display CHAPTER1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY This GSK980MDa system employs an aluminum alloy solid operator panel which exterior is as follows EGET p el Y i l E H F H E L i lt n e M T 606 HEH or ceca 5 IT m RESET ji ETI EE pi o p E Dio O 2 e Y O mw a pe ET T Le MANUAL Gh Epa MS ORIENATO E ii ii SLE STARTI 9 Dr UN CNW MES Wu x gt 4 30 I VR Mis SINELE 1 ASE ST ne z ING ex wu AS 8 8m amp DVERHEE A OVERRIDE F OVERRIDE no nose noel ros DI 4S S eu o N U 39 g y y 3 WV FO vu28 uuSO uow TES less el V gt e ToNoE 8 cow RECO
168. S232 interface CN15 5th axis amp spindle port 25 core DB male socket for connecting inverter amp 5th axis CN31 handwheel 26 core 3 line famele socket for connecting handwheel CN62 ouput 44 core 3 lines famele socket for sending the signal of CNC to machine CN61 input 44 core 3 line male socket for sending the signal of machine to CNC 271 IM euinjoA gt D rr A D et 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 1 2 GSK980MDa Installation 1 2 1 GSK980MDa external dimensions T A i i T Da i 5 YO 10 ane m om 0m OF oa A El PA lH VA El mr RH A er 43 A T f zar ABS ERR ES Do meet SE K o alae 2 VA E 2 e EE mun 22 pA C BE E eel lolo o m x T 4 E MELLE l p 4 th ch Ex Fig 1 2 GSK980MDa external dimensions 1 2 2 Installation conditions of the cabinet e The dust cooling liquid and organic resolution should be effectively prevented from entering the cabinet The designed distance between the CNC back cover and the cabinet should be not less than 20cm the inside and outside temperature difference of the cabinet sho
169. SK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Command format Soo 0 04 the leading zero can be omitted 1 4 gears Be spindle speed switching value control In spindle speed switching value control mode the FIN signal is returned after the set time is delayed after the code signal of S command is sent to PLC Now the time is called execution time of S code RM S code performs Delay time Sub kahi command word or block performs The S01 S02 S03 and S04 output states are invariable when the CNC is reset The S1 S4 commands are ineffective output when the CNC is switched on An arbitrary command is performed from S01 S02 S03 and S04 the corresponding S signal output is effective and held on at the same time the other 3 S signal output are cancelled The S1 S4 output are cancelled when performing the S00 command only one of S1 S4 is effective in the meantime 2 2 2 Spindle speed analog voltage control The spindle speed is analog voltage control when the BIT4 of current bit parameter is set to 1 Format S OOOO 0000 9999 leading zero can be omitted Spindle speed analog voltage control Command function The CNC outputs 0 10V analog voltage to control the spindle servo or inverter for achieving the stepless speed regulating of the spindle when the spindle speed is set The S command value is not memorized when the power is turned off and then the parameter recovers to 0 when the power is turned on The CNC owns
170. SWORD UPDATE PASS CURRENT LEVEL TO4 MAKE SURE Modify parameter and edit program MDI 50000 TOO Hae m 4 Press key again if the demotion is successful the page is as follows AUTH OPERATION 00000 NOO000 CURRENT LEVEL 4 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Can edit prog input macro var amp offset MDI 50000 TOO Hae Note If the current level is the 5 level the demotion operation is unallowed 255 lt 9 3 D O o D fe m o gt C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 9 3 Data Restore and Backup The user data such as bit parameter and pitch data can be backup saved and restored read in this GSK980MD system It doesn t affect the part programs stored in the CNC system while backuping and restoring these data The backup page is as follows CHANGE Press key repeatedly PASSWORD SETTING and DATA BACKUP pages can be switched DATA BACKUP 00000 NO0000 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo CURRENT LEVEL 3 SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS lt e c 3 D F O x 9 m o E PRESS IN P TO CONFIRM POWER ON MDI 59090 TOO Hee Turn on the parameter switch o e Press key to enter the MDI mode then
171. Start and Feed Hold Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis ST External cycle start signal CN61 13 X1 4 SP External dwell signal CN61 2 X0 1 Input Cycle Start key signal on the X23 0 signal machine panel Feed Hold key signal on the X22 7 machine panel OUT cycle start signal on MDI panel F197 1 Cycle start indicator on machine Y20 0 panel Feed hold indicator on machine Y21 0 panel M00 Feed hold command F9 7 e Control Parameter Romie zal MST MPPJ BE MER EN MST 1 External cycle start signal disabled 0 External cycle start signal enabled MSP 1 External feed hold signal disabled 0 External feed hold signal enabled and external dwell switch needed or CNC dwell alarm occurs Corresponding F signal gt a y e Z J a ae ee ee eee ee A OUTR 1 Program runs by OUT key on the MDI panel in MDI mode 0 Program runs by OUT key on the MDI panel disabled in MDI mode e Note Normal opened bottom without auto lock is needed for external cycle signal ST Normal closed bottom without auto lock is needed for external dwell signal SP 364 Appendix 5 3 5 Cooling Control e Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input Cooling key signal on machine panel X21 4 signal Cooling starts indicator on machine Y23 0 Output panel signal COOL Cooling output signal
172. TA NO DATA _049 1 a57 1 065 1800 050 1 058 1 066 108 051 al 059 7600 OGT 1800 052 1 060 7600 068 100 053 al 061 7600 069 400 054 i 062 7600 ara 8000 055 1 063 7600 a71 50 056 1 064 100 a7r2 100 Command multiplier for X axis NO 649 JOG so000 TOO Hae e PITCH COMP interface PARAMETER Press key repeatedly it enters PITCH COMP interface there are 256 pitch parameters mI which are displayed by 16 pages in this interface and they can be viewed by pressing or 189 lt c 3 c F oO Le O E o gt GskK C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual SCREW PITCH PARAMETER 00000 NO00000 NO X Hd Z C NO X Y Z C 000 0 9 0 008 8 4 9 001 9 9 0 009 4 002 9 0 010 9 003 9 9 0 011 0 004 9 9 9 0 012 0 005 0 4 4 0 013 4 4 4 4 006 4 4 0 014 4 4 4 4 007 0 0 0 0 015 4 0 NO XYZC 0 001mm NO 888 MDI 50000 TOO Hae 1 3 7 CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE machine soft panel VERSION MESSAGE interface vac is a compound key it enters CNC DIAGNOSIS PLC STATE PLC VALUE machine soft panel VERSION MESSAGE interfaces by pressing this key repeatedly 1 CNC DIAGNOSIS interface CNC The input output signal state between CNC and machine the transmission signal state between CNC and PLC PLC internal data and CNC internal state can all be displayed via diagnosis Press i key it enters CNC DIAGNOSIS
173. TE LE RE tne 281 2 3 5 Connection of spindle interface as rotary AXiS oooononcccnnnocccccnncconcncnnnrncnonananncnnnnoncno 282 2 3 6 Connection of spindle interface as CS axis 282 23 156 Signal explariation an 4a cce easdem erede a carp id 282 2 4 Connection to Spindle Encoder essent enne enne Da EA AE E 283 2 4 1 Spindle encoder interface definition sese m 283 2 4 2 Signal ExplanatiOn stented ni tds 283 2 4 3 Connection of spindle encoder interface ssse ee 283 2 5 Connectiomto and wheel vas 5 oe e p ova n e n e dis Oo e t impie 284 2 5 1 Handwheel interface definition seseee 284 2 5 2 SIgnal explarnati ns i ee Edu as 284 2 6 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC oocooonoccccocccconccnoncnonnnncnnnnononcononcn eene enne nene eterne neret ennne nnne nnns 285 2 6 1 Communication interface definition ooooooccnnnnicccinnnccccnononanncnnnnanncnnnnnn nn nc nnnnnnnnnnnnno 285 2 6 2 Communication interface connection ooooococcnnoccconnnoncnnononancnnnonanccnnnnnncn nor cnn ncnrnnnnnnos 285 2 7 Connection of Power Interface setas eiei a a a e aa 286 2 8 VO Interface Definition Wii aa a AA As 287 2 8 1 Input Signal iiaeiai e ge eoe E A t c de edd 287 2 8 2 Output Sga ee M e s 289 2 9 Machine ZeIrO A REOR UN SR toL te e EORR D PRO RU eU RS UN OL RUE UN ote ER Le ue 290 CHARTER 3 PARAMETE Ria edana aina esaeen ranana niona r uaaa da aneao sana
174. U fe U 3 Press E and wW key to shift the ON OFF state press lt A Ko D L un key moves to the left to set the switch for OFF Press or key or moves to the right to set the switch for ON Only the PARM SWT is set to ON could the parameter be altered so are PROG SWT and AUTO SEG aeb r Note 1 When parameter switch is shifted from off to on for the first time CNC alarm occurs Press f A CANCEL keys together to eliminate the alarm Alarm will not occur when parameter switch is shifted again For security set parameter switch to off after parameter alteration is finished Note 2 When parameter switch is shifted from off to on CNC alarm occurs Alarm will occur again when A nr CANCEL parameter switch is shifted from on to off for the first time Press E b keys together to eliminate the alarm 9 1 2 Graphic setting 243 GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 8 SETTING f Press pee key to enter graphic interface Press or key to access the following graphic parameter page A The way of setting graphic parameter GRAPH SET 00000 NO000600 COOR OPT O OXY 1YX 22X 3XYZ 4YZ 5ZY 6XZ TXZY SCALE 100 CENTER 9 000 X axis value CENTER 9 000 Y axis value CENTER 9 000 Z axis value PX MAX
175. X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57X Y Z_ Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 6 Function There are 6 workpiece coordinate systems for machine tool regardless of the G92 any of coordinate system can be selected by G54 G59 Explanation X New X axis absolute coordinate in current position Y New Y axis absolute coordinate in current position Z New Z axis absolute coordinate in current position These six workpiece coordinates are set by the distances workpiece zero offset from machine zero to each coordinate system origin 55 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual WwnjoA Workpiece zero offse Machine zero U e e 9 3 gt 2 Q Examples N10 G55 G90 GOO X100 0 Z20 0 N20 G56 X80 5 225 5 Rapidly positioning to workpiece coordinate system 3 X 80 5 Z 25 5 from workpiece coordinate system 2 X 100 0 Z 20 0 For example if N20 block is G91 it is incremental movement The absolute coordinates automatically become the coordinates in coordinate system G56 Z N20 G91 80 5 25 5 80 5 25 5 X2 22 X N20 G90 100 20 Y G55 The absolute position for the figure is coordinate value under the current coordinate system Note Workpiece coordinate systems 1 6 is set up as soon as machine zero return is executed after power on When the system is restart
176. Z of Z axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PCZ of Z axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZCY 1 Deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DECY and one rotation signal PCY of Y axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZCX 1 Deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during 301 M eunjoA gt m rr D et o 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DECX and one rotation signal PCX of X axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return DISP 1 Enter absolute page after power on 0 Enter relative page after power on DIR5 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as 5 axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as 5 axis moves negatively DIR4 1 Directi
177. Z axis in Manual Step mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Machine zero mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Machine zero mode MPGmode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode MDI mode Edit mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Machine zero mode MPGmode Single Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Machine zero mode MANUAL mode Machine zero mode Step mode MANUAL mode 167 uoesado J T lt o c 3 F O Le O E F o 5 GGSK CNC GSE Key 9 E ES 168 E o E o i d E E En wi AAO Op SINGLE SKIP MACHINE LOCK 9 MST M S T LOCK DRY Handwheel axis selection key MPG Step increment and Rapid override selection key Single Block key Block Skip key Machine Lock key M S T Lock key Dry Run key GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Name Function explanation Function mode For X Y Z axis selection in MPG mode amount Move per handwheel scale 0 001 0 01 0 1 mm Move amount per step 0 001 0 01 0 1 mm For switching of block blocks execution Single block lamp lights up if Single mode is valid For skipping of block headed with sign if its Switch is set for ON the Block Skip lights up indicat
178. a skip function G31 it can be simultaneously specified with any axes of X Y and Z in this case the linear axis does not has an individual feedrate F but depend on each axis specified at a same time which it is started or ended together with the specified each axis namaly the additional axis is shared v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e with the basis three axis linkage 3 The additional linear axis can not performed a circular arc cutting G02 03 otherwise the P S alarm may occur 4 The pitch error of additional linear axis and the compensation function of inverse interval are same as the basis three axis 4 6 The additional axis is rotation axis Input unit The pulse equivlance namally the least input unit of 980MDa rotation axis is 0 01 degree the maximum vlaue of output pulse frequence is 500K When the selection is output based on the direction of pulse adding it can be inputted a maximum speed n 60 f 36000 833 33 rev min e Rotation axis speed The feedrate of rotation axis is regarded the degree min as a unit When the linear axis X Y and Z is performed a linear interporlation with the rotation axis the speed specified with F mm min is the compound feedrate both X Y and Z and the rotation axis Feedrate calculation Calculate the required time when the feedrate is performed to the end then the feedrate unit of rotation axis is changed into degree min For example G91 G01 X20 0 C40 0 F300 0 The u
179. achine Y18 4 signal panel e Function description MST lock is enabled in Auto MDI or DNC modes 5 3 10 Single Block e Relevant signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input Single key signal on machine panel X18 6 signal Output Single indicator on machine panel Y18 7 signal e Function description e Single block is enabled in Auto MDI or DNC mode 5 3 11 Dry Run e Relevant signals 367 XIGNHddV GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input Dry run key signal on machine panel X19 2 signal Output Dry run indicator on machine panel Y18 3 signal e Function description 1 Dry run for program is enabled in Auto MDI or DNC modes 2 Dry run state can not be switched during the program execution 5 3 12 Optional Stop Relevant signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis Input optional stop signal on machine X20 0 signal panel Command M01 optional stop command F9 6 input Output optional stop indicator on machine Y21 7 signal panel e Function description o o In Auto MDI and DNC modes press key amp amp Y to light up the optional indicator which means the system enters into optional stop state When command M01 is executed dwell will Q be performed The program will continue by pressing key 8 again 5 3 13 Stroke Limit and Emergency Stop Rel
180. acro program macro program gD 1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level Macro 0 P A no e q go ae program K G65P K 1G65P K G65P K M99 1M99 1M99 1M99 0 level 1 level em 3 level 4 level 1 1 1 1 1 Local variable 33 33 33 333 33 Explanations 1 1 33 local variables 0 level are provided in the main program 2 When a macro program 1 level is called by G65 the local variable 0 level is stored and local variables 1 33 of the new macro program is prepared The argument replacement is possible the same as 3 3 Each time a macro program 2 3 4 levels are called local variables 1 2 3 levels in each group are stored and new local variables 2 3 4 levels are prepared 4 When M99 return from macro programs is commanded the local variables 0 1 2 3 levels stored in 2 3 are recovered in the state as they are stored 5 2 3 Common Variable Common variable is the global variable defined within the system It can be used in any program That is to say 101 used in a macro program is the same as the one used in another macro program Therefore the arithmetic operation result of common variable 101 in a program can be used in another program In the system there is no special regulation for using common variables 4100 4199 is the variable group without power off memory function 500 999 is the variable group with power off memory function i e data are stored after power off
181. al when performing machine zero return ZRS4 1 There are machine zero point in 4 axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in 4 axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return ZRSZ 1 There are machine zero point in Z axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in Z axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return ZRSY 1 There are machine zero point in Y axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 303 M SUNIoA 3 7 rr A D i 5 GGG CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 0 There are no machine zero point in Y axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return ZRSX 1 There are machine zero point in X axis it detects deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 0 There are no machine zero point in X axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return LPTK 1 Hole locating is done by cutting feed on line continuous drilling 0 Hole locating is done by rapid feed on l
182. ameter part program editing operations are allowed Technician level 4 Initial password is 1234 Tool offset data for tool setting macro varibles part program editing operations are allowed However CNC bit parameter data parameter and pitch parameter editing operations are not allowed Machining operation level 5 No password Only the mschine panel operation is allowed The alteration of tool offset data CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch parameter and the operations of part program selection program editing are not allowed 185 c 3 D O D 9 Ss o gt lt e c 3 y F O x Co i e o E C GSK CNC GskK GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual AUTH OPERATION 090003 NO00000 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR SET LOWER LEVEL Resume PAR Resume PAR 1 INPUT PASSWORD e UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 3 User User Test Step Servo Modify parameter and edit program MDI 50000 TOO Hae 1 Setting page of G54 G59 Page location Press key twice this page is displayed SET 654 659 09003 NO00000 EXT OFFSET G54 COORDINATE ABSOLUTE A Baa X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 G55 COORDINATE G56 COORDINATE MACHINE X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 DATA MDI 0008 TOO Hea SET 654 659 The zero of the coordinate
183. and P i is the skip signal in traditional G65H format User alarm None G65 H99 PHi O lt P lt 100 5 3 1 Tranditional Format If traditional G65 H format is used for programming only limited operations and jump command can be specified by it The currently used H operation needs at most 3 operands so the corresponding operation can be completed when the needed variables or constants are obtained in a block General format G65 Hm Pii Q j R k m 01 99 means operation command or jump command function zi the name of variable that stored the operation result j operand 1 it can be constant 131 ETT N v X fo e Q o 3 3 5 e CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K k operand 2 it can be constant Meaning Zi j o k Operational sign designated by Hm Example G65 Hm P 100 Q 101 R 102 100 101 o 102 G65 Hm R 100 P 101 Q15 101 15 o 100 G65 Hm Q 100 R 100 P 102 102 100 o 100 Note 1 G65 H should be commanded prior to operation or jump command Note 2 when P code is commanded in G65 block G65 P means macro program call H means argument No operation or jump command is performed Note 3 At most 4 decimal numbers of the constant decimal part can be obtained for rounding 3 digit numbers can be displayed in the window SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e Code function explanation 1 Variable value ass
184. angle coordinate value can be switched between 0 7 by pressing K key each time J Display graphic in the center that is vertical move and horizontal move are 0 l Scale up the track the graphic is scaled up 2 fold by pressing key once M Scale down the track the graphic is scaled down 2 fold by pressing M key once t gt y Graphic moving up down left right 9 1 3 Parameter setting By the parameter setting the characteristics of the drive unit and machine can be adjusted See Appendix 1 for their significance 245 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK P key to enter the Parameter interface then press or key to switch Press the parameter page the figure is as follows BIT_PARAMETER 00000 NOO000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA _ 681 ooogoooo 009 88811111 017 00101000 002 00000010 0180 60011111 018 00004000 003 00000000 011 00000000 019 10000000 004 01000000 012 00010011 020 00000000 005 000109001 013 10000011 021 00000000 006 60000000 014 60011111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000000 023 00000000 008 00011111 016 00000000 024 00000000 Bekk kk kkk ACS HAL ak kkk kkk bit4 1 0 Analog vol switch ctrl spindle NO 6601 AUTO SBK so000 TOO Hag A Alteration of the bit parameter 1 Byte alteration lt e c 3 D F O x Co 9 m o E 1 Turn on the parameter switch 2 Enter the MDI mode 3 Move the curs
185. apters or sections 3 15 2 Description for canned cycle 3 15 2 1 High speed peck drilling cycle G73 Format G98 G99 G73 X Y RZ QF L Function This kind of cycle performs high speed peck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole and eliminating the chips from the hole simultaneously Explanation Refer to the command explanation of canned cycle in Table 13 1 7 Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed for Q distance 4 Retract d distance in rapid traverse 5 Cutting feed for Q d distance 6 Machine to the Z axis hole bottom by cycling the 4 and 5 7 Return to the start point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse TT as a WH 61 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 O GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Command Path G98 Return to the initial plane at the G99 Return to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rapid traverse Initial point level 2240 DT 250 D M Point R plane W E Point R plane hi 3 1 1 x 1 1 x 1 1 1 D x 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y Y Point Z Point Z Related Explanation 1 This kind of cycle is peck drilling for Q value intermittent feeding along the Z axis direction The Q value should be positive the sign is ineffect
186. ar outer finishing compensation CW cancel tt i G41 Cutter G86 Drilling cycle C140 Reciangular continuous compensation left drilling CW G42 Cutter G88 G141 Rectangular continuous compensation right Boring cycle drilling CCW Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals Tool length E dili G43 compensation G89 Boring cycle G142 MM s ix ace CW direction Tool length 5 g Absolute zc 9 G44 compensation G90 G143 Arc continuous drilling ees programming 3 direction CCW o bun eng Incremental F G49 compensation G91 ay programming le cancel Q Note mark means initial state 3 PLC Codes List a Code Function Code Function Code Function LD N tact DD ME SET Setting SPE Subprogram end read LDI Normal closed RST Resetti Bi iti ias S esetting ADDB inary addition OUT Outputcoil CMP Comparison setting SUBB Binary subtraction AND N tact wee PERENS CTRC Counter ALT Alternative output in series ANI N e closed MRB Timer DIFU Differential up contact in series N tact Bi og Normal open contact cope Ama codeloco Differential down in parallel transformation ORI Normal closed Bina rotational ROTB de MOVE Logical AND contact in parallel control ORB Serial block i iis RE e MOVN Data copy PARI Parity check parallel ANB Parall
187. at the bottom of the page 1 Current list page only display the list information of the currently opened folder 2 U disk can be identified in edit or MDI mode 262 Chapter 11 Flash Operation It not support Chinese complex characters It not support Chinese long file name only the first three characters 1 of this file name can be displayed 5 Non CNC file of C disk and U disk is displayed Note The file name which consists of O 4 digits CNC is considered to be CNC format file 11 2 Introduction of general file operation function 11 2 1 Open and close file folder lt Move the cursor to the folder will be opened 5 FILE LIST 00043 N00000 B ES U pa i 00000 CNC E 00010 CNC y E 00001 CNC ll 00011 CNC 2 E 00002 CNC E 00012 CNC A ll 00003 CNC lil 00013 CNC o li 06004 CNC 0014 ll 00005 CNC est S 0886 CNC 00007 CNC Bil 00008 CNC INPUT FILE INFO NOTE CHG C U SHIFT UNWRAP FOLDER EDIT Msoooo Too Hoo Press key to open the folder The list which the file locates is displayed in the first line long list is scrolling display FILE LIST 00043 NOO000 B 00008 FILE INFO 108B 2009 04 02 09 34 42 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO C DISK R EDIT SAAHA TOO Hae Press key to close the folder and return to the next higher level of the list 263 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual FILE L
188. ate override Manual feedrate mm min Note The manual feedrate of X axis is diameter variation per minute the feedrate defined by GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram is memorized when the power is turned off Related parameter Data parameter No 073 for speed lower limit of acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter No 074 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant in manual feed 2 4 3 MPG Step feed MPG feed This GSK980MDa can move positively or negatively in X Y Z 4th or 5th axis by current increment in the MPG mode Only one of the axis can be moved at one time Step feed This GSK 980MD can move positively or negatively for X Y Z 4th or 5th axis by current increment in the Step mode One of the axis can be moved only at one time Only one mode is effective for the MPG or step mode at one time it is up to Bit3 of CNC bit parameter No 001 This NC offers 4 steps 0 001mm 0 01mm 0 1mm and 1mm MPG step increment The actual MPG step increment series the selection of increment and current effective axis or the like 24 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder Related parameter Data parameter No 073 for initial or terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter No 074 for exponential acceleration or deceleration t
189. aterials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDa standard PLC programs S 5 4 1 Step Feed o ie E Set the BIT3 of the bit parameter No 001 to 0 and press key to enter the Step mode it y displays as follows S RELATIVE POS DAHA NaBgnB 00 617 GIG Gbg Gel 640 649 694 G95 00000 NO0000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 STEP 0009 Tal Hae F 160 5 b Msg STEP INC 8 6801 FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 106 4 1 1 Increment selection Orxan Lao A NAO Tm m7 nx Fl Press key to select the move increment the increment will be shown in the page Op Pria 1101001 rcc Note In the EDIT or REF modes L P Bsj 10508 utom MDI modes rapid override will be changed by pressing the above mentioned keys In Graxa Eren ATL ximo Primo nepa 250 150 100 J and keys together these keys are valid otherwise they are invalid keys are invalid In the AUTO or the MANUAL mode press rapid move key 207 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 4 1 2 Moving direction selection o i i iti Press eX or key once X axis can be moved negatively or positively by a step increment other axises are the same 4 2 MPG Handwheel Feed 0
190. ati iii aa teases eve aea ds 272 1 2 1 GSK980MDa external dimensions senem eene 272 1 2 2 Installation conditions of the cabinet ssseeeeen 272 1 2 3 Protection methods against interferenCe ooooccnnonccccnnnocccnnnnoncnnnnanrnnnonananncnnnnnncnnnnnno 272 2 lConnectiontoJDrnvesunit eset te In tese t d D ERR EM M CERE RU RU vende 275 2 1 1 Drive interface definition 275 2 1 2 Command pulse and direction signals sseeeene 275 21 3 Drive unit alarm signal eerte ferte rer ere eet eee carae 275 2 1 4 Axis enable signal ENn tee 276 2 1 5 Pulse disable signal SE Meiren ae paan nea a aae ee a EE EE narran nn 276 2 As FA IKOE O TATE UNA a OA PE E eie nett i OTT 276 2 1 7 Connection to drive unit 20 0 cee cseceeeceseeeeeceseeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeneseagaeeseeaaeeceeneeeeseneetans 277 2 2 Connection of Ata ci A is 278 2 2 1 4th axis interface 0efinitioN oooononccccnnnoccccnonanncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnn nano nnnnnnnno nn nnnnnnn rra nana 278 2 2 2 Connection of 4 axis interface as linear axis sse 279 2 2 3 Connection of 4 axis interface as rotary axis 280 2 3 Connection of spindle port eh tee e ee rm i et e tee 280 2 3 1 Definition of signal vecino rte e c dinde rer ania eh 280 2 3 2 Spindle zero sigrial t diee iue piede tnt ede Pte eed ees 280 23 8 Linear axis 5 eene eai erede ieee edie 281 2 9 4 Connected withi inverter eneee aaa aeaaea a T
191. ative feed In case of that handwheel CW is for negative feed CCW for positive feed it may exchange the A B signals of the handwheel terminals also you can modify the HNGX HNGY HNGZ HNG4 HNG5 of the bit parameter N2019 4 2 3 Explanation items 1 The correspondence between the handwheel scale and the machine moving amount is as following table Moving amount of each handwheel scale Handwheel increment 0 001 0 0100 0 100 1 000 Specified coordinate value 0 001mm 0 010mm 0 100mm 1 000mm 2 The rotation speed of the handwheel should be less than 5 r s if it is over that the scale may be not coincide with the moving amount 3 The handwheel axis selection key is valid only in the MPG mode 209 lt o c 3 4 F O Ke gt 9 p o gt G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION In MDI mode the operations of parameter setting words input and execution can be performed Note The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDa standard PLC programs 5 1 Code Words Input Select MDI mode to enter the PRG STATE page to input an block GOO X50 Z100 the steps are as follows 1 Press key to enter MDI mode 2 Press key to enter
192. ator cann t light up It is shown in Fig 2 36 24V CNC Machine ULN2803 output Fig 2 36 289 M SUNIoA gt m 4 A D et O 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e To drive inductive load relay etc To use ULN2803 output to drive an inductive load it requires to connect a freewheeling diode near the coil to protect output circuit and deduce interference It is shown in Fig 2 37 24V CNC Machine ULN2803 output Fig 2 37 2 9 Machine Zero e Relative signal DECX X axis deceleration signal PCX X axis zero signal DECY Y axis deceleration signal PCY Y axis zero signal DECZ Z axis deceleration signal PCZ Z axis zero signal DEC4 4 axis deceleration signal PC4 4 axis zero signal DEC5 5 axis deceleration signal PC5 5 axis zero signal CNC diagnosis E so PAPES DEC ee DEG Corresponding PE CN61 34 CN61 31CN61 14CN61 34 CN61 4 pin out as e eee 0 0 8 Corresponding CN15 1 CN14 CN13 3 CN12 CN11 3 pin out 0 3 3 e Bit parameter p ERE A A ae DECI 1 Deceleration signal is on with 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is performed 0 Deceleration signal is off 24V for deceleration when machine zero return is performed LL T Me TC AAA ZMX 1 X axis machine zero return type C 0 X axis machine zero return type B ZMY 1 Y axis machine zero return type C 290 ZMZ ZM4 ZM5 ZCX ZCY ZCZ ZC4 ZC5
193. axis actual rapid traverse rate value set by parameter No 059xrapid override Y axis actual rapid traverse rate value set by parameter No 060xrapid override Chapter 7 Auto Operation Z axis actual rapid traverse rate value set by parameter No 061xrapid override Note 2 When the rapid override is F0 the rapid traverse rate is set by bit parameter No 069 7 1 6 Spindle override adjustment While the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage output in Auto mode it can be adjusted o D 8 OVERRIDE 9 8 Press the or key in to adjust the spindle override for the spindle speed it can realize 8 level real time override adjustment between 50 120 P h h time th ress the key each time the feedrate override ascends a level till 12096 P h h time th ress the key each time the rapid override decends a level till 5096 Note 1 The actual output analog voltage analog voltage by parameterxspindle override Example When the bit parameter No 101 is set to 9999 No 100 to 645 execute 9999 command to select the spindle override 70 the actual output analog voltage 10x70 7V by spindle override S c 3 D E O jo D je le jun 7 2 DNC running This CNC system has a DNC function by the connection of the DNC communication software with this system the high speed high capacity program can be performed in this system E In Auto mode press the 9 Jkey it enters the DNC mode Then pre
194. ay Operatio __ Passwor Program Item Function Operation key Display Parameter n mode dlevel on off page switch 2 2k 3 2X Search program name A 2 defined IM Level program I 2 3 4 Search for bit parameter Correspo data G Parameter no nding lt parameter or pitch M page oi S the data D parameter le PLC state PLC ES PLC data address No state y searching mA PLC data Q Program Level DeletDelete the DELETE Edit On content 2 3 4 ion character mode where the Edit Level cursor is in CANCEL Program On mode 2 3 4 content Move the cursor to the head Singl block Edit P pus O ingle OC i rogram n 2 DELETE HA deletion of the line mode content Multi block order Level Edit Program On deletion 2 3 4 DELETE mode content number Segment Level p CHANGE DELETE Edit Program bos On eletion 19 character mode content 195 5K C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Operatio __ Passwor Program Item Function Operation key Display Parameter n mode dlevel on off page switch Delete one program name Level Edit Program On program 2 3 4 DELETE mode content Ld Delete all 999 Edit Level lt Program On lo programs mode 2 3 4 c DELETE content 3 o o Change program name Edit Program Level B al e n a program name ALTER mode content 2 3 4 S om MACRO E EDIT DupliDu
195. because all of the data in previous block are cancelled the above value specified is applied when the F is omitted Although the P value is commanded but it is not needed for this hole machining so the P value is saved The Z is different compared with the previous hole and the hole position just moves along the X axis G85X ZR P The Z and R P values separately specified by N0070 and N0060 G89 X Y D the F value specified in NOO20 are taken as hole machining data which are used for G89 hole machining G1121 J F D The fine milling hole machined by G89 is performed by G112 GOX Y Z positioning for a rectangle machining 88 Chapter 3 G Command G134 Start machining the rectangle ZRIJK UD YI JKUD Begins machining the second rectangle X Y IJKUD Begins machining the 3rd rectangle SWIN OA The fine milling inside the machined rectangle groove is to be G138X Y R Z I 7 7 performed the corresponding data are needed JK UDF Cancel the hole machining mode and data except for F the GO1 cutting feed is performed by XY Note Address I J K and U of canned cycle G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are not saved as canned cycle modal data so the I J and K values need to be specified in each block or the alarm will be generated G01X Y E a o e o El 3 e 3 15 6 Examples for canned cycle and tool
196. builder Though this system is employed with integrated operator panel the functions of the keys on the panel are defined by PLC program ladder diagram It should be noted that the keys functions described herein are for the standard PLC program ladder diagram Refer to the user manual from machine tool builder for function and meaning of keys on control panel This manual is subject to change without further notice GENERAL Volume Programming Introduces product specification types command codes and format of programs Volume Operation Describes the operation methods of GSK980MDa CNC Milling Machine Volumelll Installation Describes the methods for installation connection and setting of GSK980MDa CNC Milling Machine Appendix Describes standard ladder diagram functions and lists the alarm codes GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Safety Responsibility Manufacturer Responsibility Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and or controlled on design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories Be responsible for the provided information and advice for the users User Responsibility Be trained with the safety operation of CNC system and familiar with the safety operation procedures Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding changing
197. by system data parameter No 030 when the power is turned on for the system an F value is invariable after the F command is performed The feedrate is O after the FO is executed The F value is invariable when the system is reset or emergency stop The feed override is memorized when the power is turned off Related parameter System data parameter No 029 the exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant for cutting and manual feed System data parameter No 030 the lower value of exponential acceleration or deceleration on cutting feed System data parameter No 031 The upper limit value for cutting feedrate X Y and Z axes Note The cutting feedrate becomes uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1 rev min in G95 mode the actual feedrate has following error when the spindle speed fluctuates In order to guarantee the machining quality it is recommended that the spindle speed can not be lower than spindle servo or the lowest speed of effective torque introduced by inverter during machining 3 19 G98 G99 Format G98 G99 Function G98 Tool returns to the initial plane when the hole machining is returning G99 Tool returns to the point R plane when the hole machining is returning Explanation 92 Chapter 3 G Command Modal G command G98 Return to initial plane G99 Return to point R plane E fa Initial point level Initial point level 3 E a e 2is Pd s v U f o E 2 M 1 Q 1
198. cceleration or deceleration at the meeting point of the path for the adjacent two cutting feed blocks when the BIT5 of the bit parameter No 007 is set to 0 A contour error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed path when the positioning is not enough accurate at the meeting point of the two paths In order to avoid this kind of error the exact stop command G04 can be inserted between the two blocks or the BIT5 of the CNC bit parameter No 007 is set to 1 Now the previous block is decelerated to zero speed and it is positioned to the end of the block and then the next cutting feed block is performed The following block can be performed because each block is accelerating from the initial speed and then decelerating to zero at last If the program time is increasing it may cause the lower machining efficiency The SMZ of bit parameter No 007 is set to O the transition between two adjacent blocks is processed according to the table 2 3 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 O Table 2 3 Previous block Rapid Cutting Without Next block Position feed move Rapid positioning Cutting feed Without move Note X The subsequent block is performed after the previous block is accurately positioned at the end of the block O Each axis speed is transmitted according to the acceleration or deceleration between the adjacent blocks an arc transition is formed at the meeting point of the too
199. chining process G81 G98 R 1 Z 2 F 3 M99 5 2 Variables An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value for example G01 and X100 0 With a custom macro program numerical value can be specified directly or using variables for example G 101 X 102 When variables are used the variable value can be changed by programs or using operation on the MDI panel 120 Chapter 5 Macro Program Representation and using methods of variables Differ from argument data variables are considered as the carrier of data for example 1 101 are variables A100 B200 are arguments Data of arguments A100 B200 should be transferred to variable 1 and 2 When using or programming macro programs numerical value can be specified directly such as G01 X100 or using variables such as G 01 X 07 When variables are used the variable value can be changed by programs or using operation on the panel The address value of a macro body can be specified by variables The variable value can be set by the main program or be assigned the calculated value when executing the macro body Multiple variables can be identified by numbers 1 Variable representation A number sign followed by a variable number is shown as follows zi i72 1 2 3 4 For example 5 109 1005 2 Omission of decimal point When a variable value is defined in a program the decimal point can be omitted For
200. d valid ey number at the same time Setting range 2 5 Define the name of the 4 axis A 65 B 66 C 67 Define the name of the 5 axis A 65 B 66 C 67 Setting range 65 67 65 A 66 B 67 C Total tool number selection Setting range 1 32 Reset output time Setting range 16 4080 Cunit ms Serial communication baudrate Setting range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Cunit bit s M euinjoA Block No increment for block No auto insertion Setting range 1 100 gt o rr A D et O 5 3 2 Parameter description by function sequence 3 2 1 Axis control logic Dose AS DIRS 1 A Direction signal DIR is high level as the 5 axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as the 5 axis moves negatively DIR4 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as the 4 axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as the 4 axis moves negatively DIRZ 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as Z axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as Z axis moves negatively DIRY 71 Direction signal DIR is high level as Y axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as Y axis moves negatively DIRX 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as X axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as X axis moves negatively 314 Chapter 3 Parameter J ALM5 1 the 5 axis low level alarm signal ALM5 0
201. defaulted and inconsistent with the running mode of this block the corresponding modal function should be executed to continue the next step O 4 Press jkey to enter the Auto mode then press KIN to start the program 235 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 7 1 5 Adjustment of the feedrate override rapid override In Auto mode the running speed can be altered by adjusting the feedrate override rapid override with no need to change the settings of the program and parameter WW F OVERRIDE Press the or key in it can realize 16 level real time feedrate adjustment Press the key each time the feedrate override ascends a gear level till 150 Press the key each time the feedrate override decends a gear level till 0 Note 1 The actual feedrate value is specified by F in program feedrate override O Adjustment of the feedrate override lt 2 lt 3 co F le Le O E o 5 adjustment Note2 Actual feedrate value specified by Fx feedrate override e Adjustment of rapid override It can realize the 4 level real time rapid override Fo 25 50 100 adjustment by pressing the MV 96 R OVERAIDE 9 CEN 18 Press the key each time the rapid override ascends a level till 100 Press the key each time the rapid override decends a level till FO Note 1 The max rapid traverse speeds of X Y Z axis are set by bit parameter No 059 No 060 lt No 061 respectively X
202. dle encoder interface The connection of GSK980MDa to spindle encoder is shown in Fig 2 23 twisted pair cables are used to connection 283 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual pur a E A Qa Q 9 GSK980MDa CCN21 Encode terminals 3 MPZ Z 4 MPZ Z 5 MPB B 6 MPB B 7 MPA Y A 8 MPAt A A 11 OV V OV PA A 5V metal shell Fig 2 23 Connection of GSK980MDa to encoder 2 5 Connection to Handwheel 2 5 1 Handwheel interface definition 13 GND 26 12 GND 25 Signal Explanation 11 GND 24 z i Di 10 GND 24 X65 HA HA Handwheel A phase signal o 9 X6 3 22 X64 HB HB Handwheel B phase signal AS ee O O 3 s X62 2 X6 0 X6 5 PLC adress M E 24V EE 6 X6 1 19 Direct current EE 5 X6 0 18 24V VCC GND 74 4 HB 17 24V hg 3 HB 16 5V mA 2 HA 15 5V a 1 HA 14 5V 3 Fig 2 24 CN31 handwheel interface 3 line DB26 male socket 2 5 2 Signal explanation HA HA HB HB are the input singals of handwheel A and B phases Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 25 284 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals R93 470R U55 XHA TLP181 Na Ne XHA R96 470R U57 XHB TLP181 Ne Na XHB Fig 2 25 Handwheel signal circuit The connection of GSK980MDa to handwheel is shown in Fig 2 26 GSK980MDa CCN31 Handwheel GSK980MDa CCN31 Handwheel 1 HA AA 1 HA A 3 HB
203. ds B 2 HA M A ll Ov i Ov 3 HB Bt 14 5V 5V 4 HB A B 2 HA null 14 5V 5V 4 HB 11 OV m ov metal shell metal shell null 5 Signle input double input E Fig 2 26 Connection of GSK980MDa to handwheel 2 6 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC gt m p D et o 5 2 6 1 Communication interface definition Signal Explanation 1 6 s 2 RXD 7 RXD For date reception 3 TXD 8 TXD For date transmiting 4 O 9 GND For signal groundin 5 GND o su g Fig 2 27 CN51 communication interface DB9 female socket 2 6 2 Communication interface connection The communication between GSK980MDa and PC can be done via RS232 interface GSK980MDa communication software needed The connection of them is shown in Fig 2 28 285 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSK980MDa CN51 PC RS232 interface 3 TXD y 2 RXD 2 RXD d 3 TXD 5 GND 5 GND metal shell zi metal shell Fig 2 28 Connection of GSK980MDa to PC The communication of a GSK980MDa to another GSK980MDa can be made via their CN51 interfaces and the connection of them is shown in Fig 2 29 GSK980MDa CN51 GSK980MDa CN51 3 TXD 2 RXD 2 RXD 3 TXD 5 GND 5 GND metal shell So metal shell Fig 2 29 Communication connection of GSK980MDa to GSK980MDa 2 7 Connection of Power Interface GSK PB2 power box is applied in this GSK980MDa which involves 4 groups of voltage 5V 3A 12V1A 12V 0 5A 24VCO 5A and its co
204. e milling CW Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove external fine milling CCW Rectangle fine milling 3 15 1 2 Canned circle explanations Rapid feed Rectangle groove external fine milling CW Generally a canned cycle consists of a sequence of the following operations see the right figure Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y Operation 2 Rapid traverse to point R plane Operation 1 Operation 3 Hole machining Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of hole Operation 5 Retraction to point R plane Operation 6 Rapid traverse to the initial Point 3 15 1 3 G90 G91 The data mode corresponded with G90 and G91 are different The point R plane and the absolute position machined at the bottom of the hole are specified by R and Z values when the 58 Operation4 Operation 2 PointR gt Operation3 0 Y Start and end points L lt Operation 7 2 s Rapid traverse feedrate Q E Cutting feed Operation 6 Chapter 3 G Command command is G 90 The specified R value is the distance relative to the initial plane and the Z value is the distance relative to the R point plane when the command is G91 See the Fig 13 1 B G90 Absolute command G91 Incremental command Point R plane Point Z at the bottom of hole Initial point level Absolute Point R Point Z R
205. e 1 If the G140 or G141 is specified in the canned cycle it is indicated that the rectangle serial punching will be performed The rectangle data are defined according to specified X Y coordinates and J value in a program and the serial punching cycle is performed 84 Chapter 3 G Command according to the punch mode canned cycle command Note 2 The command value of maximum punching number A and B at each side is 9999 the command is disabled when it is negative The decimal part will be rounded off if the command is decimal if the A or B is not specified then 0 is a default Note 3 The rectangle is defined by the current start point the end of the 1st side and the length of the 2nd side the default is current start point if the end of 1st side is not specified the alarm will be generated if the length namely the J is not specified of 2nd side is not specified Note 4 The returned levels are all R point plane in serial punching the corresponding plane will be retracted according to G98 G99 specified in a block when the last hole is performed Note 5 Canned cycles such as G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G136 G137 G138 and G139 have no serial punching functions Note 6 The command words G140 G144 A B and J are only effective in current block The alarm will be generated if the G140 and G141 are specified without the canned cycle punching The A B and K will be ignored if A B and K are specified instead of the G
206. e Additional Axis is Linear AXiS ooooconoocononcnconncnonncnonccnoncncononcnnnncnon enne enne n cnn nr rennen nennen 107 VII Contents 4 6 The additional axis is rotation axis eee eene nennen eerte nnne nnne nnne 108 4 7 The zero return D of rotation axis sessesseseeeeeseeeeenrene enne ener EEE trennen tenere ens 110 4 8 Lheib nction of ESAS RR RR ERA e RR GR REATO eautameanne 111 CHAPTER 5 MACRO PROGRAM ississssssccessssentnssssssesstcecssarsscssennsvesavsssesscesasdactesnsescsacessensesdesscsnstscecsvacesesaes 116 1 Macto Calli aeta tanq n RR ORDER QD RR IQUIQUE 117 5 2 VarlablES 120 A A A ett totem ettet eia datus 125 5 2 2 Local Variables o ooonccnnccncccncccoconocenonenonenonenenenonenonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnenns 125 5 2 3 Common Variable concordar etnias e ERR Eee E RAE EHEREER Re XR e RARA 126 5 2 4 System Variables cree bate e ge edd dl ha enge due cee Ada eels 127 5 3 Arithmetic and Logic Op ration secs nr ea eene enne ncnn rn cnn nn rennen inneren enn 130 5 3 1 Tranditional Formats kiiit e ana eee 131 5 3 2 Macro Statement eiin da eria a aaa a EEE Eora aaen AEETI E DAAA EREE DENE DA Ea nee 135 5 3 3 Priority of Operation S sirean a aa ou e epe cet 137 5 3 4 Bracket Nesting ssssssssseee Hem nnne nnns 138 5 4 Branch and Repetition ooooooccnoonocoooncnonncnoncnconononnnnononnonon conan eene enne a rentre a rennes en nnne n nnne nnn 138 5 4 1 U
207. e M and MF codes are delivered at the beginning of positioning see the Fig 13 1 A for the operation 1 The next hole machining can be performed till the ending signal FIN occurs 6 When the canned cycle is applied if the tool compensation C is current state the tool compensation information C is then temporarily cancelled and saved the tool compensation C status is restored when the canned cycle is cancelled 7 If the tool length offset commands G43 G44 and G49 are specified in a canned cycle block Then the offset is performed when the point R plane is positioned operation 2 The tool length offset commands are disabled after the canned cycle is entered till it is cancelled 87 WnjoA D a o e o 3 3 5 e SWIN OA v 3 o e o 3 3 5 e 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 8 The cautions for the operation of canned cycle a Single block When the canned cycle operation is performed by using the single block mode normally it is separately stopped at the terminal of the movements 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 in the Fig 13 1 A And the single block is somewhat different according to corresponding canned cycle action at the bottom of a hole For example the single block is stopped when the dwell is applied The operation at the bottom of the hole for fine milling and rough milling are divided into multiple single stop So it is necessary to startup for several times to
208. e and efficient work please read this manual carefully before installation and operation Warning and Precaution A Accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please read this manual carefully before operation Special caution The power supply fixed on in the cabinet is exclusively used for the CNC system made by GSK It can t be applied to other purposes or else it may cause serious danger This manual is reserved by end user CAUTIONS Cautions m Transportation and Storage Packing box over 6 layers in pile is not allowed Never climb the packing box neither stand on it nor place heavy objects on it Do not move or drag the products by the cables connected to it Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and display screen Avoid dampness insolation and drenching Open package Inspection Confirm that the products are the required ones Check that the products are not damaged in delivery Confirm that the parts in packing box are in accordance with the packing list Contact us in time if any inconsistence shortage or damage is found B Wiring Only qualified personnel can connect the system or check the connection The system must be earthed and the earth resistance must be less than 0 12 The earth wire cannot be replaced by a neutral wire zero wire The connection must be correct and firm to avoid any fault or unexpec
209. e by one 1 In Program Preview mode must be in non running state PRG PREVIEW ERRE 00001 00003 00005 O0008 00020 00125 00214 00254 01212 01234 02036 3 p e po D a 3 02589 03654 Dagga 00000 GO G54 G90 XO YO ZO Kl0 Y10 male T 10 N39 EDIT 00214 NO00000 MEM SIZE 40 OMB MEM USED 222KP PRG AMOT 14 PRG SIZE 61B 50000 TOO Hae 2 Press t 9 ej CIA to move the cursor to the program name to be selected change PRG SIZE NOTE content as the cursor moves 3 Press to open the program 6 4 4 Select file by using file list 1 On file list page Edit mode is operation mode 228 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management FILE LIST 00005 NO00000 5 00001 CNC B 00002 CNC B 00003 CNC Bil 00005 CNC INPUT FILE INFO LIB T 2009712728 10 10 31 NOTE CHG SEEK USB EOB OPEN EDIT 50000 TOO Hae Uit 2 Select program to be opened by pressing or key 3 Open program by pressing key S lt 3 D i9 o D o O 3 6 5 Execution of the Program After the program to be executed is selected by the method in Section 6 4 of this part select the Auto mode then press key or press external cycle start key the program will be executed automatically 6 6 Rename of the Program 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode m 2 Press address key El and key in the
210. e different to the programming speed when using this function And it may also differ as regard to the linear segment with the same programming speed The deviation is not more than 15mm min between the actual output speed and the programming speed on the condition that the programming speed F is less than 1200mm min AVGL 1 When SMZ 0 linear smoothing is valid i e smoothing transition function is valid 0 Linear smoothing transition function is invalid SMZ 1 To execute next block till all moving blocks executed 0 For smooth transition between blocks ZC5 1 Deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PC5 of 5 axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return 0 Deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PC5 of 5 axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return ZC4 1 Deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4th axis are in parallel connection a proximity switch taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal during machine zero return M eunjoA 0 Deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4th axis are connected independently independent deceleration signal and zero signal are required during machine zero return 5 m 4 D et 5 ZCZ 1 Deceleration signal DECZ and one rotation signal PC
211. e displayed by the CNC coordinate Calculation formula CMR x360 E Z M CMD ax L Zp CMR command multiplier coefficient data parameter N2049 Ne050 Ne051 Ne052 N2053 CMD command frequency division coefficient data parameter Ne054 Ne055 Ne056 N2057 N2058 Q pulse volume motor rotation angle for a pulse L lead 9 min input command unit of CNC 0 0001 for all axes of GSK980MDa ZM gear teeth of lead screw ZD gear teeth of motor If the electronic gear ratio numerator is greater than the denominator the allowed CNC max speed will decrease For example the data parameter No 051 CMRZ 2 Ne056 CMDZ 1 so the allowed Z axis max speed is 8000mm min If the electronic gear ratio numerator is not equal to the denominator the allowed CNC M euinjoA positioning precision will decrease For example when the data parameter No 051 CMRZ 1 and N2056 CMDZ 5 the pulse is not output as the input increment is 0 004 but a pulse is output if the input increment is up to 0 005 5 m 4 D et 5 In order to ensure the CNC positioning precision speed index and match with digit servo with electronic gear ratio function it is suggested that the CNC electronic gear ratio is set for 1 1 or the electronic gear ratio calculated is set to the digital servo When matching with the step drive choose the drive unit with step division function as far as possible and properly select mechanical tra
212. e eene nenne rne nnne rne nnne rn 226 6 3 Deletion of the Program cert erre e eder Deere ede dede Dru ed dores 226 6 3 1 Deletion a single program cccccccnnccnnncnononononononononnnonononnnonononnnononennnennnennncnnncnnnnss 226 6 3 2 Deletion of all programs ssssssssssseseeeee em eene emen nnn enne 227 6 4 Selection of the Program sssssssssssssssssssseeeee eene enne nn nnne nenne nre nns rsen nnne 227 6 4 1 Search method t tete HER EAR E X ERE CE SERRE ERR a enanas 227 64 2 Scanning method aa A dz 228 0 4 3 Cursor method Anta eer fee gei ti i pepe PORE Red dao edd 228 6 4 4 Select file by using file list ssesssssssssssseeeeeenen nennen 228 6 5 Execution of the Program ssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeen enne en a akaa tnr rne nnne 229 6 6 Rename of the Program ssssssssssssssssssseneneeeeen enne nemeeren eren en rennes rsen nennen nens 229 6 7 Copy ot the Program u c tesi tette ate 229 6 8 Program positioning sssssssssssee eene nennen nnne 230 6 9 Program preview oe Re Ee A eee Ee escort bdo igo release ia 230 CHAPTER 7 AUTO OPERATION dieere ete rante sina mte Rasa sna sna lan ka inaa riaka aaia 232 CAPO RUN MH E EEEE 232 7 1 1 Selection of the program to be run ene 232 72D 2 Progtram start eren it pt iib Dre t a pe t e e eta et 233 7 1 3 Stop of the auto TUN sms rent t t ote a tere ke Re HE EENE
213. e gear teeth 11131 Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle encoder gear teeth Setting range 1 255 X axis backlash offset Y axis backlash offset Z axis backlash offset 4 axis backlash offset 5 axis backlash offset Setting range 0 2000 Unit 0 001mm Interval of X axis screw pitch error compensation Interval of Y axis screw pitch error compensation M eunjoA Interval of Z axis screw pitch error compensation Interval of 4 axis screw pitch error compensation Interval of 5 axis screw pitch error compensation Setting range 10000 999999 Unit 0 001mm gt o sp D et X axis machine zero offset MENE Setting range 99999 99999 Unit 0 001mm 311 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Setting range 9999999 9999999 Unit 0 001mm 5 7 7 o E E 6 Econ 4 M euinjoA Z machine coordinate of 3rd reference point 4 machine coordinate of 3rd reference point u013e e3su 1i 6 5 machine coordinate of 4th reference point Setting range 9999999 9999999 Unit 0 001mm Tq T 2 Initial value of cutting feedrate when power on Setting range 10 15000 Unit mm min 1 71 4 Feedrate of dry run Setting range 10 99999999 Unit mm min 312 Chapter 3 Parameter Arc radius error limit Setting range 0 1000 Unit 0 001mm On arc code G02 G03 if error exceeds the difference excuting limit b
214. e machine and 3rd and 4h reference points are returned The command word P2 can be omitted when the machine 2nd reference point is returned Explanation G30 which is a non modal G command X Xaxis coordinate for intermediate point Y Y axis coordinate for intermediate point Z Zaxis coordinate for intermediate point One of the command address X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted see the following figure Command Function G30 Pn X Machine nth reference point return for X axis Y and Z axes in the original position G30Pn Y Z Machine nth reference point return for Y and Z axes X axis in the original position G30 3 axes in the original position the block G30 Pn X_ Y Z_ X Y and Z axes return to the machine nh reference Note 1 n is 2 3 or 4 in above table Note 2 Deceleration and zero signals check are not needed when the machine 2nd gra and 4t reference points are returned to 46 Chapter 3 G Command Command action process see the following figure an instance of machine 2 d reference point return 1 Positioning to intermediate point of the specified axis from current position at a rapid traverse rate from point A to point B 2 Positioning to the 2 d reference position set by data parameter No 94 and No 96 at the setting speed by data parameter No 150 and No 152 from point B to point R2 3 When the reference point returns if the machine is unlocked the Bit O and Bit 1 of the re
215. e of Z axis against current point for G91 F Cutting feedrate 3 1 4 Address definition Usage of the address in system is as follows Address Function Rounding Value range 999 Decimal Punching number of 1 and 3rd side for eM m Absolute value for part A rectangle serial punch G140 G141 P negative omitted 4th 5th axis axis name address 9999 999 9999 999 Round off e Decimal Punching number of 2nd and 4th side for P dE e T rectangle serial punch G140 G141 Pos Nan cM Ed B negative omitted Radius for arc serially punch G142 143 9999 999 9999 999 Round off 4th 5th axis axis name address 9999 999 9999 999 Round off 9999 999 9999 Decimal Punching number for arc serially punch Absolute value for part C G142 143 i negative omitted 4th 5th axis axis name address 9999 999 9999 999 Round off D Tool radius offset number 0 32 Decimal 30 Chapter 3 G Command alarm Unused G94 feed per minute 0 15000 ee efficiency G95 feed per rotation 0 0001 500 Round off Tooth pitch in G74 G84 unit G21 mm r G20 inch r Manu Roung pr G command in Decimal G code system alarm Length offset number 0 32 Decimal alarm A Decimal Operation command in G65 0 99 alarm Distance from arc start point to center point in 9999 999 9999 999 Round off X direction 9999 999 9999 999 G110 G115 radius value of circ
216. e others queue in sequence If the alarm log messages areover 200 the last one will be cleared Fi V CANCEL 2 Manual clearing of warn log under the 2 level authority press key it may clear all the warn log messages 4 Alarm clearing If multiple alarms are issued only one alarm where the cursor locates could be reer cleared by pressing key each time In alarm interface it clears all alarms and warnings Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display rn by pressing and keys 5 The current alarm page is as florrows CNC ALARM 00003 N00000 CNC ALM 3 PLC ALM 0 PLC WARN 6 ooo 42 MN CTR WARN 431 K axis driver is not ready MDI ESP ALM 50000 TOO HOM Current page CNC ALARM 00003 NOO000 CNG ALE 2 PLC ALM PLC WARN 8 B 431 CTR WARN 432 Y axis driver is not ready KDI 5000A TOO Hee Page after pressing RESET key 6 Clearing PLC warning If multiple warnings are issued only one warning where the cursor meb r cancel locates could be cleared by pressing fd or key each time In Alarm interface it clears cbc CANCEL and keys 1 3 5 Setting interface e pers is a compound key press key in other page it enters setting interface press it SETTING again it enters the G54 G59 interface press it three times it enters Graphic interface Press EN all alarms and warnings by pressing d key repeatedly it switches among
217. e restores 3 3 Coordinate system setting command G92 and coordinate system selection command 3 G54 G59 a N5 Programmed path G92 block Fig 6 22 Temporary compensation vector by G92 Note SS is indicated as the point stopped for twice in Single block mode e Automatic return to the reference point G28 If G28 is specified in compensation mode the compensation will be cancelled at an intermediate position The compensation mode is automatically restored after the reference point is returned G28 Intermediate position S Reference point Programmed Tool center path path Fig 6 23 Temporarily cancel compensation vector by G28 156 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation G28 Intermediate position Programmed Tool center Reference point path path Fig 6 24 G29 temporarily cancel compensation vector e Canned cycle If the canned cycle command is specified in compensation mode the compensation will be temporarily cancelled in the canned cycle operation 1 The compensation mode is automatically restored after the canned cycle is terminated 6 2 7 Exceptional case When the inner corner machining is less than tool radius When the inner corner machining is less than tool radius the inner offset of a tool will cause over cut The tool stops and alarm occurs after moving at the beginning or at the corner in previous block But if the switch of Single block is ON the tool will be stopped at the end of the previ
218. e the rectangle The interpolation direction is the one for the fine milling arc in the command explanation 2 The commands Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the value of Q and P are reserved as canned cycle modal value For example A finished rough milling rectangle groove is performed by the fine milling by the command G138 in canned cycle See the following figure G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G138 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 180 J50 K30 U5 F800 D1 The rectangle outside finish milling is performed under the canned cycle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled it returns from the point R plane M30 3 15 3 Continous Drilling Continuous equal interval drilling cycle is performed in the way that canned cycle is called according to the specified linear rectangular or arc path Parameters related to continuous drilling 82 Chapter 3 G Command E EPUSSIBET ES A E Ee d LPTK 1 Locating with GO1 in line interval drill 0 Locating with GOO in line interval drill RPTH 1 Locating with G01 in circle and rectangle interval drill SWIN OA 0 Locating with GOO in circle and rectangle interval drill BRCH 1 the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G98 G99 0 the return plane when continuous drilling is selected by G99 E a o e o 3 3 5 e 3 15 3 1 Line series punch L function L holes machining cycle should be perf
219. ection of 4 axis interface to drive unit gt o p A D et 5 2 2 Connection of 4th axis 2 2 1 4th axis interface definition Signal Explanation M T CP4 CP4 Command pulse signal 1 CP4 c 9 CP4 o 7 2 DIR4 10 DIR4 DIR4 DIR4 Command direction signal 3 PC4 11 GND PC4 Zero signal O p Bs ja B es ALMA Drive alarm signal 6 SETA 14 GND EN4 Axis enable signal 7 EN4 15 GND 8 RDYA ZSDA SET4 Pulse disable signal Fig 2 11 Interface CN14 DB15 female 278 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals 2 2 2 Connection of 4 axis interface as linear axis DA98B DAO1B drive GSK980MDa CN 14 anit signal interface 1 CP4 1 30 PULS 9 CP4 5l PULS 2 DIRA Y 29 SIGN 10 DIR4 14 SIGN 5 ALMA 5 ALM 3 POR u 36 CZ 231 SON 11 ov 32 DG 4 24 37 CZ 38 COM Metal shell Metal shell DA98 A drive unit GSK980MDa CN14 signal interface i CP44 18 PULS 9 CP4 V4 6 PUS 2 DIR4 an 19 SIGN 10 DIR4 v 7 SIGN 5 ALMA 3415 AM lt 3 PC4 AL 5 CZCOM 2 21 SO 3 11 ov 3 DG d 4 24 2 CZ Metal shell 10 RSTP ES 4 DG 17 DG 22 FSTP 5 Metal s
220. ecuted i e assign Sin 30 to 101 Sample program The sample program below finds the sum of number 1 to 10 09500 101 0 Initial value of the variable to hold the sum 102 1 initial value of the variable as an addend N1 IF 102 GT 10 GOTO 2 Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than 10 101 101 102 calculation to find the sum 102 102 1 Next addend GOTO 1 Branch to N1 N2 M30 End of program Sum of number 1 to 10 139 SWIN OA E a fo e Q 9 3 3 5 e SWIN OA U A o e 9 3 3 gt o GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5 4 4 Repetition WHILE Statement Specify a conditional expression after WHILE While the specified condition is satisfied the program from DO to END is executed If not program execution proceeds to the block after END Example AWHILE Conditional expression DOm m 1 2 3 Program If the condition is If the condition not fulfilled is fulfilled END m Explanations While the specified condition is fulfilled the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed If the specified condition is not fulfilled program execution proceeds to the block after END The same format as the IF statement applies Anumber after DO and a number after END are identification numbers for specifying the range of execution The number 1 2 and 3 can be used When a number other than 1 2 and 3 is used
221. ed the coordinate system is the one set by parameter No 13 bit 17 Whether the relative position varies with coordinate system depends on status parameter Ne005 PPD when PPD 0 it changes when PPD 1 it does not change When the workpiece coordinate system function is determined usually G92 is not 56 Chapter 3 G Command needed to set coordinate system if G92 is used coordinate system 1 6 will be moved Do not confuse with G92 and G54 G59 unless workpiece coordinate systems G54 G59 are to be moved When G54 G59 are in the same block with G92 G54 G59 are disabled Workpiece coordinate system can be modified in the program run The new coordinate system is effective till the system is restarted 160 O Tool position 100 t y 100 B M x 100 200 If it performs G92 X100 Y100 commands when the tool is positioned a t 200 160 in the G54 coordinate system the offset vector A for workpiece coordinate system 1 is X Y And the other workpiece coordinate systems offset for vector A 3 15 Compound Cycle Command 3 15 1 Brief for canned cycle Generally the canned cycle is a machining movement completion from one block with G function to the completion of multi block specified Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs With a canned cycle a frequently used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function without canned cycles multiple b
222. ed block in DNC transmission software then press RESET key on panel to continue PC software transmission Press cycle start key to continue execution 240 Chapter8 Machine Zero Operation CHAPTER 8 MACHINE ZERO RETURN OPERATION 8 1 Machine Zero The machine coordinate system is a basic coordinate system for CNC coordinate calculation It is an inherent coordinate system of the machine The origin of the machine coordinate system is called machine zero or mechanical reference point It is defined by the zero return switches fixed on the machine Usually the switch is fixed on the positive max Strokes of X Y Z axes 8 2Machine Zero Return Steps 1 Press key it enters the Machine zero mode the bottom line of the screen page shows REP the figure is as follows RELATIVE POS 00000 NOO0000 00000 NOOOO00 GOA G17 G90 G54 G21 G40 G49 G94 G98 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 PART CNT 0 CUT TINE 0 00 00 REF 50000 TOO Hae ES g 2 Press or or key to select the machine zero of X Y or Z axis 3 The machine moves along the machine zero direction and returns to the machine zero via the S lt 3 D o jo D o p O 3 FO100 5 G NSO JOG FS 1268 ACT fF FED OVRI 150 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 100 deceleration signal zero signal detection And the axis stops with the machine zero finish indicator lighting up mT 9 T 4 XO YO ZO 4hO Machine zero finish indicators Note1
223. el block i d i Hu DECB Binary decode LBL Program skip numbering series first level END1 mo eve Program IMpB Jump CALL Subprogram call END2 Second level SP Subprogram program end numbering 1 2 Program Execution 1 2 1 Program Execution Sequence The current program can only be run in automatic mode GSK980MDa cannot run more than 1 program at the same time so only one program can be performed at a time The cursor is ahead of the first block when a program is opened and can be moved in EDIT mode In automatic mode when the machine is in stop state the cycle start signal ica key on the panel or external cycle start signal enables the program to be run from the block where the cursor is located Usually blocks are executed in sequence programmed in advanced Program stops running till MO2 or M30 is executed The cursor 7 SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual G5k moves along with program execution The program execution sequence or state will be changed in following conditions cher el e Program running stops when key or the Emergency Stop button is pressed Program running stops when the CNC alarm or PLC alarm occurs e When the system is switched in EDIT or MDI mode program stops running after the current block is executed After switching to automatic mode again when ca key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal
224. elative Fig 13 1 B Absolute and incremental commands for canned cycle 3 15 1 4 Returning point level G98 G99 SWIN OA D a o e o 3 3 5 e Tool can be returned to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 and G99 during returning See the following figure Fig 13 1 C Normally the initial hole machining is used by G99 the last machining is used with G98 The initial level will not be changed when the hole machining is done by G99 G98 Return to initial level G99 Return to point R plane Initial point level Initial point level idi E I Id ec Rd e Point R A Fig 13 1 C Levels for initial and point R 59 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 O CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K Note The initial point level is an absolute position for hole machining axis direction which is indicated from the canned cycle cancellation to start 3 15 1 5 Canned cycle cancellation There are two ways for canned cycle cancel are listed below 1 Canceling the canned cycle with the G80 2 The canned cycle is cancelled by the G00 G01 G02 and G03 command in group 01 1 When the canned cycle is cancelled by the command G80 if the GOO G01 G02 and G03 of the 01 group are not specified then the reserved modal command G00 or G01 performs motion before using canned cycle For example N0010 G01 X0 YO Z0 F800 The modal command is G01 before
225. en M29 is executed 0 Spindle does not perform zero return when M29 is executed 305 M eunjoA gt o sp D et 5 M euinjoA gt m 4 A D et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual RTPCP 1 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G73 mode 0 Rigid tapping is the high speed deep hole cycle G83 mode RTCRG 1 Do not wait for G61 0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled 0 Do wait for G61 0 to be 1 as excuting next program block after rigid tapping cancelled RCS4 1 4th Cs function is valid power on 0 4th Cs function is invalid power on Note Only when the rotary axis function is valid ROT4 1 can the RCS4 be set valid ROSA ROT4 Set the type of 4th near Rotary Rotary vaia mou o 3 9 posee pe qp E pom AAI S1 A41S0 Selecte increment system of 4th A4IS1 A4ISO Increment System of 4TH 0 0 Same to the X Y Z 0 1 IS A 1 0 IS B 1 1 IS C RRT4 1 Zero mode D is used on 4th rotary axis power on 0 Zero mode A B C are used on 4th rotary axis power on RRL4 1 4th rel coor cycle func is valid power on 0 4th rel coor cycle func is invalid power on RAB4 1 4th rotates according to symbol direction 0 4th rotates according to nearby rotation ROA4 1 4th abs coor cycle func is valid power on 0 4th abs coor cycle func is invalid power on Note 1 Parame
226. ennen ener enne 9 3 19 698 G99 ini tee oT otii e etie 92 3 20 Chamfering FUNCION caia teer tdem dee Het E gere tested tiet igit 93 3 20 1 Linear chamfering sssssssssssssseseseeeeeee nennen enne nnne nenne 93 3 20 2 Circular chamfering sss eene nemen enne 95 3 20 3 Exceptional Cases iittala Badin eink Sane 97 3 21 RIGID TAPA Ge eo do 98 SILVA Rigid Tap PING iia uod dieere tede e na s 98 3212 Peck Rigid Tappirng ie eere pe E eee ER cee eee ade 99 3 21 3 Address Explanation mesier aa eda a aes hne nhe 101 3 21 4 Technic Specification sse eene neret nennen nes 101 3 21 5 Specify a Rigid Tapping Mode ssssssssssssssseeee enne 102 3 21 6 The cancellation of rigid tapping mode ssessssssssseeeeeee 103 A Fand G Signals scree tte een Pea Pa lens M eet uer ea ese Pres etd 104 3 21 8 Alarm Message ococcconcconcnoncnonenonenonenonenoneno nono sene tene nano tnn the hh het nhe E n hen h nenne nnne nnn 105 3 219 Program Example in ee e en e ppt eser fet Dee eate Bene 105 CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS eeeeeeee eee esee eats etn ea enata aenea tuae 106 4 1 Ge iii A ee eere etie 106 4 2 AXIS Name ess eese ete asad os eas A te A A ARR ev ER D etu ee ete EUER TERRENI 106 A SHAK IS Display oe seio ste eic t e etes t OR Ee te iet testeur 106 Ad AS anu eta reca ceci cet aer ela cv ef Teo et Y cece HM TEM est ree 107 4 5 Th
227. ent against the mid point in X axis is indicated by G91 Y The absolute coordinate of aim point in Y axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increment against the mid point in Y axis is indicated by G91 Z The absolute coordinate of aim point in Z axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increment against the mid point in Z axis is indicated by G91 One of the command address X Y and Z or all of them can be omitted see the following figure 44 Chapter 3 G Command Command Functi X Y and Z axes are in the original position the next block continued Only X axis performs the command returning from the reference point WnjoA Only Y axis performs the command returning from the reference point Only Z axis performs the command returning from the reference point Only X and Z axes perform the command returning from the reference point Only X and Y axes perform the command returning from the reference point Only Y and Z axes perform the command returning from the reference point U o e 9 3 3 e X Y and Z perform the command returning from the reference point Process for command action R Reference point A Start point C B Intermediate point _ O C Object point from reference point return 1 The command axis direction performs positioning at the intermediate point specified by G28 from point R to B the actionis 10 2 The positioning is
228. ent function is invalid command G10L3 is unallowable 029 G11 can not be programmed before G10 030 The plane is changed when tool radius compensation is performed 031 Plane switch tool length compensation and coordinate change cannot be performed 352 Appendix when chamfering 032 R value is specified in circular command but the amount of movement in the arc plane is not specified 033 When a radius is set or changed the corresponding movement amount must be specified 034 The arc data is wrong in radius compensation or compensation mode is wrong 035 G31 cannot be used in radius compensation 036 Format of chamfer is wrong or the subsequent block is not G01 G02 G03 037 The number of character is more than 256 in one block 038 The format of G20 and G21 is wrong The switch of inch or metric system must be headed 039 Radius compensation cannot be set together with chamfering 040 G40 G42 G140 G143 are disabled in single block mode MDI 041 The format of annotation is wrong unclosed bracket 042 G02 G03 G04 G31 G92 G142 G143 cannot be in the same block with G43 G44 G49 H 043 Result in a macro program is out of range data overflow 050 Skip is disabled in DNC mode 095 No sequence number is input or illegal sequence number is commanded in subprogram call 096 The depth of nested subprogram exceeds 4 level
229. entering the canned cycle N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z 50 Entering canned cycle N0030 G80 X100 Y100 Z100 The modal G01 command reserved before canned cycle performs cutting feed If the G01 is not specified in the abovementioned program N0010 but GOO the GOO performs rapid positioning for NOO30 When both command G80 and commands G00 G01 G02 and G03 are specified in block actions are performed by the latter GOO G01 G02 and GO3 For example N0010 G01 X0 YO ZO F800 The modal command is G01 before entering the canned cycle N0020 G81 X10 Y10 R5 Z 50 Entering canned cycle N0030 GOO G80 X100 Y100 Z100 The GOO performs positioning at the rapid rate and the modal command G00 is saved Note The cutting feedrate by F command is still held on even if the canned cycle is cancelled 3 15 1 6 General command format for canned cycle Once the hole machining data is specified in the canned cycle it is held until the canned cycle is cancelled So the hole machining data should be outright specified at the beginning of the canned cycle only the modified data is specified in the following canned cycle The general command format of canned cycle G X Y R Z Q P F L All commands for canned cycle are listed in above mentioned format But it is not needed to specify the above mentioned format in each canned cycle For example the canned cycle can be performed as long as the G command hole machining and any of X Y Z and R are specif
230. equirement of the machine 3 The connection is correct and secure The following page is displayed after GSK980MDa is powered on S lt 3 D i9 jo D o le 2 GSR 40 Sx FS The current position RELATIVE POS page is displayed after system auto detection and initiation are finished RELATIVE POS 00696 NODO O 00000 NODDODO bo 5 cn cos X 0 000 Y 13 776 Z 1 344 JOG 50009 TOO HOO F 160 5 b Msg JOG F 1260 FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 106 2 2 System Power Off Before power is off ensure that 1 The axes of the CNC are at halt 2 Miscellaneous functions spindle pump etc are off 3 Cut off CNC power prior to machine power cutting off Note Please see the machine builder s manual for the machine power cut off operation 199 lt o c 3 D F O Ke gt 9 a o E GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 2 3 Overtravel Protection Overtravel protection should be employed to prevent the damage to the machine due to the overtravel of the axes 2 3 1 Hardware overtravel protection The stroke switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum travel of the machine axes X Y Z 4th 5th respectively they are connected by the following figure And the MESP of bit parameter No 017 must be setted to O If the overtravel occurs the stroke switch acts to make the machine stop and the emergency
231. er 3 G Command position X Y or distance from initial point level to the point R plane is short and it is necessary to machine serially or sometimes the spindle can not reach the specified speed before the hole machining operation for delaying the time the dwell block by G04 is inserted into each hole machining which is shown as follows Insert the dwell wait for the spindle speed reaches to the normal value G86X Y ZRF G04 P For dwell time P without hole machining X Y The next hole is machined G04 P For dwell time P without hole machining X Y The next hole is machined G04 P For dwell time P without hole machining Sometimes this issue will not be considered according to different machine tool refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder 4 As stated above the canned cycle can also be cancelled only when G00 GO03 codes are read So there are two cases expresses for 0 3 for canned cycle code will be shown when they share the same block with the canned cycle G code G Goo X Y Z R Q P F K For canned cycle Goo GH X Y Z R Q P F K The X Y and Z axes are moved by G the R P Q and K are disabled the F is stored The principle which the last G code is effective when G codes of same group share the same block is met by cases above 5 When the canned cycle and miscellaneous function are specified at the same block Th
232. er Compensation approximates to the zero so it is necessary to maintain the compensation amount The transit point between N1 and N2 is P1 and the transit point between N2 and N3 is P2 P1 and P2 are shared a same point In the same way in the compensation mode if the two same points may occur the compensation value will be maintained in the retraction mode the similar start mode is divided into the previous two same points and the last two same points The alarm and corresponding explanation of Circular arc data error in cutter compensation C a The example of this alarm may occur in a circle Porgram example NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z50 N1 G01 G42 X0 YO D1 F800 N2 G02 150 N3 G91 G01 X 50 Y 50 ae ek Programmed path TJADER Tool center path EN The transit point between straight line N1 and circular arc N2 is P1 the transit point between circular N2 and straight line N3 is P2 and the compensation radius is r in this case the circular after tool compensation is more than 360 T NOCERE N2 Ce ape G42 FPR Z RO EREE EFR After a block N9 G91 GO XO YO without moving is inserted between N1 and N2 in the above mentioned program the circular data error in cutter compensation C may alarm Because the point after N9 inserted which is equal to the one of N1 namely they are regarded as two same points The transit point P1 is performed treating the two same points
233. er or a laser detector Because the backlash offset can improve the machining precision only by accurate compensation it is not recommended to measure itin MPG or Step mode but the following method is suggested 334 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods e Program editting 00001 N10 G01 210 F800 G91 N20 Z15 N30 Z1 N40 Z 1 N50 M30 Setthe backlash error offset to O before measuring e Run the program by single blocks search the measuring benchmark A after 2 positioning operations record the current data move 1mm in the same direction then move 1mm reversely to point B read the current data A gt gt Reverse position Date reading positon B Fig 4 4 Schematic map of backlash measuring methods Backlash error offset value data of point A data of point B Input the calculated data to the CNC data parameter No115 Ne119 Calculation for other axes are the same as this M eunjoA Data A dial indicator data at point A Data B dial indicator data at point B Note 1 The backlash offset mode and offset frequency can be set by BDEC and BD8 of bit parameter N9011 Note 2 Check the machine backlash at regular intervals according to specific conditions to ensure machine precison gt o sp D et 5 4 8 Step MPG adjustment The MPG key on the panel can be used to select the Step mode or MPG mode which is set by the HWL of bit parameter N2001 HWL 1 MPG mode valid Step mode i
234. etaches the deceleration switch And it begins to detect the zero signals If the zero signal level changes the movement stops Then zero return indicator of the corresponding axis on the panel lights up and machine zero operation is finished e Machine zero return type C as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals D Its sketch map is shown below 297 IM eunjoA 5 m rr D et o C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Machine zero return direction i Travel switch Tongue fixed on Connect to 24V the machine slider Connect to nDEC signal Fig 2 47 2 Circuit of the deceleration signal See details in Section 2 1 6 of this chapter 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 006 and ZCn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 007 are all set to 1 the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 is set to 0 the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in follows nDEC rPC M euinjoA H Starts deceleration High speed zero retum Reverse Fd Zero return over gt m rr A m et O 5 Low speed zero return Deceleration over Starts to detect zero signal Fig 2 48 4 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return directi
235. etting macro variables part program edit operations are allowed but the CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data operations are unallowed The 5 level no password Only the machine panel operation is allowed and the operations of part program edit and selection the alteration operations of CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data tool offset data are unallowed AUTH OPERATION 00009 NOO0088 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL Resume PAR User Resume PAR 1 Test Ee A Resume PAR 2 Step UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 3 Servo Modify parameter and edit program MDI SAAHA TOO Hae After entering the authority setting page the cursor locates at the INPUT PASSWORD line It 251 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 0 4 may press the key to move the cursor to the corresponding item o Press ft key once the cursor shifts a line upward If the current cursor locates at the SET LOWER LEVEL line 1 line press ir key the cursor shifts to the UPDATE PASS line end line y key once the cursor shifts a line upward If the current cursor locates at the end U o Press line by pressing key once the cursor moves to the 1st line c 3 9 2 1 Entry of the operation level 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page move the cursor to the INPUT 3 PASSWORD line 5 2 Key i
236. etween initial point radius and end point radius alarm will be issued Retraction amount of G73 high deep hole drilling cycle Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm Cutting initial point of G83 high deep hole drilling cycle Setting range 0 32767000 Unit 0 001mm G110 G111 G134 G135 Lead of helical tool infeed Setting range 0999999 unit 0 001mm If setting value is less than 10 helical feeding is invalid for rough milling command G110 G111 G134 G135 and it feeds by linear type If setting value is more than or equal to 10 it feeds by helical type for rough milling command G110 G111 G134 G135 Rough milling command G110 G111 134 G135 helical feed function Namely for Z axis depth cutting of rough milling command G110 G111 134 G135 the tool feeds not by linear type but by helical type So the workpiece with no groove may be rough milled directedly Note 1 when the Z axis cutting depth is less than 10um each time the helical feeding is invalid Note 2 when the tool radius is less than 1mm the helical feeding is also invalid The helical feeding path is shown in follows M eunjoA Tool diameter 2r gt o p D et 5 Helical feeding lead 97 paremeter Workpiece Tool diameter 2r 313 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Movement per rotation of the 4th axis Movement per rotation of the 5th axis Setting range 1 9999999 Cunit 0 001deg Allowde
237. evant Signal E Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC e state diagnosis g Input ESP External Emergency Stop signal CN61 6 X0 5 signal 54 g e Control parameter Corresponding F210 3 F signal MESP 0 The external emergency stop function active 1 The external emergency stop function is inactive 368 Appendix e External connection for machine The external connection method of emergency stop and stroke switch is as follows take 3 axes machine for example 24V FX X Y JL Emergency Stop ESP CMN61 6 temporary limit release switch lt Logic control When the contact of emergency stop switch is closed contact signal between ESP and 24V is cut off and the CNC emergency stop alarm is generated Meanwhile the CNC ENB signal is disabled and the pulse output is stopped Other functions can be defined by PLC other than above functions by NC 5 3 14 Tri color Indicator Relevant Signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC state CNC diagnosis CLPY Yellow light CN62 31 Y2 2 Output sinal CLPG Green light CN62 32 Y2 3 4 CLPR Red light CN62 33 Y2 4 e Function description Yellow light Normal no running no alarm Green light auto running gt Red light system alarm 5 3 15 Reset and Cursor Return gt Relevant Signal a Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC z state diagnosis z Input Reset key signal on MDI panel X24 0 A signal
238. example when defining 1 123 the actual value of variable 1 is 123 000 3 Referencing variables To reference the value of a variable in a program specify a word address followed by the variable number A program with an expression lt address gt i or lt address gt i indicates that the variable value or negative value is used as address value For example Z 110 when 110 250 it is equals to Z 250 G 130 when 130 3 it is equals to G3 4 Replace variable numbers with variables When replace variable numbers with variables 9100 rather than 100 is used the 9 followed means the replacement For example when 100 105 105 500 X 9100 and X500 are equal i e X 9100 X 100 X 105 X500 X 9100 and X 500 are equal Note Program number o sequence number N and optional block skip number cannot be followed with variables For example O71 2 NZ3 121 WnjoA o e Q o 3 3 5 e SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 O GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e Variable display Macro variables 02000 N00000 No Data Data No Data 100 Null 108 000 116 Null 101 12 235 Null 117 Null 102 110100101 Null 118 Null 103 0 000 Null 119 Null 104 0 000 Null 120 Null 105 Null dd 121 Null 106 Null Null 122 Null 107 Null Null 123 Null No 108 EDIT S0000 TO1 HOO 1 On macro variable pa
239. ference point movement amount per revolution compensation position interval 60 360 45 68 The corresponding relationships between machine coordinate and compensation position number are as follows 109 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 315 68 60 SWIN OA v e ae g 3 gt 2 te 180 The position error may occur if the total of compensation value from position 61 68 is not 0 there is not alternative other than to set a same value at the compensation position both 60 and 68 Because the 60 and 68 are shared a same position at the circle The compensation sample is shown below NO 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Compensation 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 value HR EE VR 2 THES TRE ARE 45 lts 315 45 90 8 E ra LJ 2 E e The reverse interval compensation function of rotation axis The reverse interval compensation never changes regardless of the linear axis or rotation axis however the compensation unit of the rotation axis is 0 01 deg and the linear axis is 0 001 mm 4 7 The zero return D of rotation axis The selection axis has four zero return methods zero return method A B C and D Wherein the zero return methods A B and C are same as the one of the linear axis Only the D is a special zero return method for the rotation axis e Setting of the zero return method D 110 C
240. ference point returning end signal ZP21 are HIGH Start point A Intermediate B X Z X Machine 2 reference point R2 Note 1 After returning the machine reference point by manual or the G28 command is 2nd gra and 4th 4th performed the machine reference point return function can be employed only or the 2nd 3rd and reference point operation of G30 command the system alarm will be generated Note 2 From point A to B or from point B to R2 the 2 axes are moved at their separately rate so the path is not straight line possibly Note 3 After machine 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point returned by the G30 command the system tool length compensation cancellation is defined by bit 7 of the parameter No 22 Note 4 The 2nd 3rd and 4th reference point operation of G30 command can not be executed if the zero switch is not installed on the machine tool 2nd grd 4th Note 5 The workpiece coordinate system is set after the machine and reference point are returned 3 11 Skip Function G31 As G01 linear interpolation is performed if an external SKIP signal is valid during execution of this command execution of this command is interrupted and the next block is executed The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from the machine for example in grinding It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece Format G31 X Y Z Explanation 1 G31 which is a non modal G
241. ff nEN signal output nEN signal toOV off The interior interface circuit is shown in Fig 2 5 ULN2803 Fig 2 5 interior interface circuit for axis enable signal IM euinjoA 2 1 5 Pulse disable signal SETn gt m rr A m et O 5 nSET signal is used to control servo input disable which can enhance the anti disturbance capability between CNC and drive unit This signal is at low level if there is pulse output from CNC high resistance if not The interior interface circuit of it is shown in Fig 2 6 ieee JESE 5 10 24v gt S 5 ma 4 SETn 74HC 14 50 7 LN2802 Fig 2 6 Interior interface circuit for pulse disable signal 2 1 6 Zero signal nPC The one rotation or approach switch signal is taken as zero signal for machine zero return Its interior connection circuit is shown in Fig 2 7 2776 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals PCa U40 RES TLP181 GND Fig 2 7 Zero signal circuit Note nPC signal uses 24V level a The connection for NPN Hall elements taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is shown in Fig 2 8 24 Y NPN Hall element nDEC DECn nPC lt fe Fig 2 8 Connection using NPN Hall elements E o b The connection for PNP Hall elements taken as both deceleration signal and zero signal is shown in Fig 2 9 gt 24V PNP Hall element zi DECn e e PCn Fig 2 9 Connection using PNP Hall elements 2 1 7 Co
242. fied when there is no valid G command of 01 group 010 One command address is repeated in the same block 011 The input words in the same block are more than 100 012 The command value is illegal or out of permitted range 013 S command out of range 800 99 is input when spindle analog voltage control is inactive 014 when G codes of group 00 and group 12 are commanded G codes of group 01 can not be specified in the same block 015 M command for automatic gear change are commanded when spindle analog voltage control is inactive 016 The specified sequence number of tool length compensation is wrong or out of range 0 32 017 Tool number is out of range set by parameter NO 213 018 Arc data is wrong or exceeds the permitted radius error set by parameter NO 175 019 Tool group number excesses the range 1 32 in tool life management function 020 Tool radius compensation number exceed the range 0 32 021 The value of J or Kis not correct in G02 or G03 command 022 Additional axes 4th 5th axis can not perform circular interpolation 023 The specified value at F address is wrong or exceeds the range set by parameter NO 070 024 G11 is absent in the program 025 No tool is found in the current tool group in tool life management function 026 The current tool group is undefined in tool life management function 027 The number of tool in the current tool group exceeds 8 in tool life management function 028 tool life managem
243. finished can the dwell be done 41 WnjoA E a o e o 3 3 5 e GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 6 Plane Selection Command G17 G18 and G19 Format Hi G17 ua XY plane E G18 ZX plane o G19 o J YZ plane Function The plane of arc interpolation and tool radius compensation are chosen by using the G code Explanation G17 G18 and G19 are modal G commands the plane will not be changed when a block without any command inside U e e 9 3 gt e Command example G18X Z ZXplane X Y invariable plane ZX plane Note Note 1 The plane selection command can share the same block with other group G commands Note 2 The move command is regardless of the plane selection For example the Z axis is not On XY plane the Z axis movement is regardless of the XY plane in command G17 Z G17 Z_ 3 7 Conversion of Inch and MetricG20 and G21 Format G20 G21 Function The input unit either inch or metric is chosen by G code Explanation Unit system Min set unit G21 mnh G2 oom The G code should be placed in front of the program when inch and metric is switched each other Before the coordinate system is set it is specified by a single block command The following unit systems vary according to the G code for inch or metric conversion 1 Feedrate command value by F 2 Command value related to the position 3 Offset
244. for validity of smoothing transition between blocks 330 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods The larger the acceleration amp deceleration time constant is the slower tacceleration amp deceleration is the smaller the machine movement impact and the lower the machining efficiency is And vice versa If acceleration amp deceleration time constants are equal the higher the acceleration amp deceleration start end speed is the faster the acceleration amp deceleration is the bigger the machine movement impact and the higher the machining efficiency is And vice versa The principle for acceleration amp deceleration characteristicadjustment is to properly reduce the acceleration amp deceleration time constant and increase the acceleration amp deceleration start end speed to improve the machining efficiency on the condition that there is no alarm motor out of step and obvious machine impact If the acceleration amp deceleration time constant is set too small and the start end speed is set too large it is easily to cause drive unit alarm motor out of step or machine vibration When the bit parameter Ne007 BIT3 SMZ gt 1 the feedrate drops to the start speed of the acceleration amp deceleration at the cutting path intersection then it accelerates to the specified speed of the adjacent block to obtain an accurate positioning at the path intersection but this will reduce the machining efficiency When SMZ 0 the adjacent cutting path trans
245. four mechanical spindle shifts function Counting the corresponding analog voltage value specified by the speed based upon the current set value corresponding to data parameter No 101 No 104 of the top speed output analog voltage is 10V of the spindle shift when the S command is performed then output the voltage value to spindle servo or inverter so that the consistency of actual speed and required speed of the spindle are controlled The analog voltage output is OV when the CNC is switched on The output analog voltage value is invariable Unless the cutting feed in constant linear speed control and the absolute value of X axis absolute coordinate value are changed after the S command is executed The analog voltage output is OV when the command SO is executed And the analog voltage output value is invariable when the CNC is reset or at emergent stop The parameter related to spindle speed analog voltage control 20 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes Data parameter No 099 the output voltage offset for spindle top speed the output analog voltage is OV Data parameter No 100 the voltage offset for the zero spindle speed the output analog voltage is 10V Data parameter No 101 No 104 The top speed for spindle 1 4 shifts the output analog voltage is 10V euinjoA 2 2 3 Spindle override The spindle actual speed can be modified by using spindle override when the spindle speed analog voltage control is effective the actual speed modified by s
246. g 004 Dy ole is 885 a g Dyes 0 006 8 0 als 007 0 8015 0 UNIT 001 mm NO 000 MDI 50000 TOO Hae DATA INPUT The same as above key in Z30 by sequence in the prompt line PE key to finish the alteration The page is as follows 250 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore SCREW PITCH PARAMETER 00000 NO00000 O A CAE A CO O SS CA UND _000 12 0 30 0 008 0 0 0 0 001 0 0 0 0 009 0 0 0 0 002 0 0 0 0 010 0 0 0 0 003 0 0 0 0 ell 0 0 0 0 004 0 0 0 0 012 0 0 0 0 005 0 0 0 0 013 0 0 0 0 006 0 0 0 0 014 0 0 0 0 007 0 0 0 0 015 0 0 0 0 UNIT 0 001 mm NO 000 MDI So000 TOO HOO 9 2 The Password Setting and Alteration To prevent the part programs CNC parameters from malignant alteration this GSK980MD provides an authority setting function that is graded for 4 levels By decending sequence they are machine builder 274 level equipment management 37 level technician 4 level machining operation 5th level lt 2 c 3 D O o D E Ss o gt The 2 level Modification of the CNC bit parameter data parameter pitch data tool offset data part program edit PLC ladder transmission etc are allowed The 3 level initial password 2345 the CNC bit parameter data parameter tool offset data part program edit operations are allowed The 4 level initial password 1234 tool offset data for tool s
247. g 2 16 Connection of spindle interface to drive unit 2 3 4 Connected with inverter The connection of GSK980MDa with convertor is shown in Fig 2 17 i ja CN 4 OV 5 SVC e Fig 2 17 Connection of GSK980MDoa to inverter 281 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Er 2 3 5 Connection of spindle interface as rotary axis DAPO3 spindle drive GSK980MDa CN15 unit CN1 interface 1 CP5 1 42 PULS 14 CP5 C4 98 PULS DIR5 33 SIGN 15 DIR5 34 SIGN 4 AM5 n T AIM 10 PC5 A 19 ZOUT 23 COM 4 ZOUT 9 OV 24 SON 11 24 YA 37 COM Metal shell Metal shell Fig 2 18 Connection of spindle to DAPOS3 2 3 6 Connection of spindle interface as CS axis DAPO3 spindle drive GSK980MDa CN15 unit CN1 interface 1 CP5 42 PULS 4 CP5 A 28 PULS 2 DIR5 m 33 SIGN 5 DIR5 34 SIGN lt 4 ALM5 ARM 7 ALM o 0 PC5 o ZOUT c 24 SON 3 23 CONE O 9 ov 4 Z UT nn y E 1 24 37 COM 3 SVC 14 VCMD 5 2 SVC GND Y 15 VCMD a Metal shell 4 9 SER s 25 SN P m m sTo e 41 SELO
248. g CNC System User Manual 5 gt key for 2 seconds or CHANGE M key it may skip out of the bit and back to the parameter No Example Set the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 to 1 and the other bits unchanged Move the cursor to No 004 by the steps above press and hold CHANGE press cs key to skip to a bit of the parameter the figure is as follows 5 gt key for 2 seconds or BIT PARAMETER 00000 NegaEe NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 901 00000000 009 60011111 017 00101000 002 00000010 010 60011111 018 00000000 003 00000000 011 00000000 019 10000000 604 EBi100000 012 00010011 020 00000000 005 00010001 013 10000011 021 00000000 006 X 00000000 014 68811111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000009 023 00000000 008 66811111 016 00000000 024 00000000 pee RDRN DECI PROD eek oe SCH bit7 1 0 Unused NO 004 MDI 50000 TOO Hee p E ues ove the cursor to BIT5 by pressing Or key the figure is as follows BIT PARAMETER 00000 NOO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 001 00000000 009 66011111 017 006101000 002 00000010 010 00011111 018 00000000 003 A 00000000 011 80000060 019 10000000 _ 884 aiBlooooo 012 00010611 020 00000000 005 60010001 013 100006011 021 00000000 006 00090000 014 66611111 022 00000000 007 000900000 015 10000000 023 00000000 008 66611111 016 00000009 024 00000000 or RDRN DECI ae PROD eek ae SCH bit5 1 0 DEC signal is
249. g performed and two blocks behind it in CNC Neither setup nor cancellation of the Tool compensation C can be performed in the MDI mode e The cutter radius compensation value can not be a negative normally the wearing value is negative negative value indicates for wearing e Instead of G02 or G03 the setting or cancellation of cutter radius compensation can be commanded only by using GOO or G01 or the alarm occurs CNC will cancel Tool compensation C mode when you press RESET key Corresponding offset should be specified while the G40 G41 or G42 is specified in the block or the alarm occurs When cutter radius compensation is employed in main program and subprogram the CNC should cancel compensation mode before calling or exiting sub program namely before M98 or M99 is performed or the alarm occurs Cancel the compensation mode temporarily when G54 59 G28 31 and canned cycle command are executed Restore the cutter radius compensation mode when the above commands are finished SWIN OA v o ae 9 3 gt 2 te 6 1 6 Example for application The parts are machined in the coordinate system in Fig 6 3 The tool compensation number DO7 is employed tool geometric radius is 2mm and the tool radius wearing is 0 gt e E C3 150 1150 C2 1550 1550 N1 Y axis A N11 gt Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation Perform tool setting in the mode of offset cancellation after finishi
250. g using the I J and K 40 Chapter 3 G Command Plane selection Count the radius R value again G17 vP J R G18 R 4DP K R G19 Note 3 The error between the actual tool feedrate and the specified feedrate is 2 or less The command speed is movement speed after tool radius offset along the arc Note 4 The R is effective when address I J and K are commanded with the R but the I J and K are disabled at one time Note 5 The axis not exists is specified on the set plane the alarm occurs Note 6 If the radius difference between start and end points exceeds the permitted value by parameter No 100 a P S alarm occurs 3 5 Dwell G04 Format G04 P_ or G04 X Function Axes stop the current G command mode and the data status are invariable after delaying time specified the next block will be executed Explanation G04 which is a non modal G command G04 delay time is specified by command words P_ X See the following figure table for time unit of P and X command value wem o8 X Unit 0 001 s S Available In 0 9999999 0 9999 999 Note e X can be specified by the decimal but P not or the alarm will be generated eo When the P and X are not introduced or they are negative value it means exact stop between the The P is effective when the P and X are in the same block e The operation is held on when feeding during the G04 execution Only the delay time execution is
251. ge 215 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual by pressing or ke PRG CONTENT SEGI COL 1 X C 00000 CNC pogga 00000 0 G54 G90 X0 YO Z 10 Y10 K 10 1 10 M99 N EDIT 56008 TOO HOO la numerical key and key by sequence e g Program O0001 creation PRG CONTENT SEG1 CUL C 00000 CNC DogA 00000 0 G54 G90 XO YO Z0 10110 K 10 Y 10 M99 bh 3 Key in address key lt e c 3 D F O x Co E p o E 00001 EDIT 59009 TOO HOO 4 Press key to setup the new program 216 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00001 CNC Doo01 00001 7 EDIT 59009 TOO HOQ 5 Input the edited part program one by one the character will be displayed on the screen immediately as it is input as for compound key press this key repeatedly for alternate input after a block is finished press to terminate it 6 Other blocks cab be input by step 5 above S lt 3 D i9 o D o O 3 6 1 3 Search of the character 1 Scanning To scan the character one by one by cursor O aus Press key to enter the Edit mode then press key to enter the PRG CONTENT page f cursor locates is over the total columns of the previous line the cursor moves to the previous block end at sign NE 2 or Y key the cursor shifts a line downward if the number of the column whe
252. ge Null indicates the variable is null ie undefined The mark indicates the variable value overflows of the range but the internal stored data may not overflow 2 The value of common variables 100 199 500 999 can be displayed on macro variable page or be assigned directly by inputting data on the page 3 The value of local variables 1 33 and system variables do not have display screen A value of local variable or system variable can be displayed by assigning the value to common variables 4 Variable data range integral type 2147483648 2147483647 real number type 10 102 0 or 10 40 Intergra type 2147483648 2147483647 real number type 10 107 0 or 10 10 Types of variables Variables are classified into four types by variable number Variable Type of Function Range Remark number variable 3 Null This variable is always null No HO value can be assigned to this NULL variable variable Local variable can only be used within a macro to hold data such as the results of operations When the Local 1 33 power is turned off local variables variable S are initialized to null When a macro is called arguments are assigned to local variables Common Common variables can be shared read 31100 32199 variable among different macro programs When the power is write turned off variables 122 Chapter 5 Macro Program
253. gram will be setup by CNC system after pressing key 2 Scanning method 1 Select the Edit or Auto mode 2 Press ma key to enter the PRG display page 3 Press the address key 4 Press the E or key to display the next or previous program 5 Repeat the step 3 4 above to display the saved program one by one 232 Chapter 7 Auto Operation 3 Cursor method a Select the Auto mode must in non run state b Press mm key to enter the PRG LIST page c Press tr key to move the cursor to the name of the program to be selected d Press key S E Cc 4 File open method D Select the edit or operation mode MS PROGRAM n Q 1 Press key twice to enter the page of file list D D v o si 2 Press keys to move the cursor to the file will be selected 5 m 3 Press M key to select a file 4 Press key to open the selected file Note The file can not be opened if the expanded name is not CNC 7 1 2 Program start o O 1 Press LAT_ key to select the Auto mode 2 Press key to start the program and the program execution begins Note Since the program execution begins from the block where the cursor locates before pressing the key make a check whether the cursor is located at the block to be executed If begins from the start line but the cursor is not in this line move the cursor to the line 7 1 3 Stop of the auto run 233 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling
254. h arc or the arc is tangential with line nd D The arc chamfering function is disabled when the arcs are tangent Note 1 The chamfering function can be performed only in the plane specified by G17 G18 or G19 these functions can not be performed in parallel axes Note 2 Changing the coordinate system by G92 or G54 to G59 or the block followed by performing the reference point return from G28 to G30 can not specify the chamfering Note 3 Chamfering function can not be employed in the DNC mode 3 21 Rigid Tapping The right handed tapping cycle G84 and left handed tapping cycle G74 may be performed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode In standard mode the spindle is rotated and stopped along with a movement along the tapping axis using miscellaneous functions MO3 rotating the spindle cloclwise M04 rotating the spindle counterclockwise and M05 stopping the spindle to perform tapping In rigid mode tapping is performed by controlling the spindle motor as if it were a servo motor and by interpolating between the tapping axis and spindle When tapping is performed in rigid mode the spindle rotates one turn every time a certain feed thread lead which takes place along the tapping axis This operation does not vary even during accleration or deceleration 3 21 1 Rigid Tapping Code format Left handed rigid tapping G74 X Y Z R P FD LC 98 Chapter 3 G Command Right handed rigid tapping G84 X Y Z R P FX D L C
255. h current tool compensation C 258 G02 G03 is commanded when establishing tool compensation C 259 G02 G03 is commanded when canceling the tool compensation C with G40 260 Overcut is found in the interference checking for the tool compensation C 261 Programming error result in no intersection between the line and arc path in tool compensation C 262 Programming error result in no intersection between the arc path and line in tool compensation C 263 Overflow of cutter compensation buffer due to excessive non movement commands 281 Length of linear chamfer is excessive 282 Radius of arc chamfer is excessive 283 Length of linear chamfer is excessive or arc data is wrong 284 Radius of arc chamfer is excessive or arc data is wrong 287 Length of linear chamfer is excessive or the intersection point is not no the arc 288 Radius of arc chamfer is excessive or the intersection point is not on the arc 289 The start point and end point are coincident in the arc chamfer plane which disable the chamfering 301 Parameter switch is ON 302 CNC initialization failure 303 Part program open failure 304 Part program saving failure 305 New part program creating failure 306 Illegal word is input 307 Insufficient memory capacity 308 Program number is out of range 309 Macro program writing is prohibited by current operation authority 310 PLC program open fail
256. h map is shown below H 5 Machine zero return direction a Me D D et 9 i 9 Travel switch Tongue fixed on Connect to 24V the machine slider Connect to nDEC signal 2 Circuit of the deceleration signal Control unit Fig 2 45 296 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 006 are all set for 1 ZCn n is Xv Za p axis of the bit parameter No 007 are all set for O the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 is set for 0 and the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in follows abEC nPC M Start deceleration High speed o mem Reverse s Zero return up over E Low speed zero return t ba Begins to detect zero signal Fig 2 46 Machine zero returns process A Select the Machine Zero mode press manual positive or negative zero return direction set by bit parameter N2022 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the machine zero at a traverse speed Then it touches the tongue and presses down the deceleration switch and moves forward When the tongue detaches the deceleration switch the axis slows down to zero then moves reversely and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving B As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time it moves on till the tongue d
257. hapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis The method D is only valid to the rotation axis Zero return can be performed for this rotation axis using the mode D after the 4 and the 5 axes are set to rotation axes based on the Bit6 of data parameter No 027 and No 029 are set to 1 If the 4 and 5 axes are disabled or linear axes then the Bit6 of state parameter No 027 and No 029 are invalid EARTH c p ARTA 1 The zero return mode of the 4 rotation axis is used the mode D 0 The zero return mode of the 4 rotation axis is used the mode A B and C PRATS AE AE AAA RRT5 1 The zero return mode of the 5 rotation axis is used the mode D 0 The zero return mode of the 5 rotation axis is used the mode A Band C The time sequence and process of the zero return mode D Ss Slow The process of zero return 1 Select the machine zero return mode and press the manual positive feed key the corresponding axis moves toward the zero point at the rapid traverse rate 2 When the one turn signal PC of servo axis is carried out the system is decelerated to the zero return low speed in this case check the trailing edge of PC signal 3 The system continuously and forward operates in the zero return low speed 4 When the system meets one turn signal PC of servo axis again the movement stops simultaneously the corresponding indicator of zero return end on operator panel goes on The machine zero return operation ends
258. he compensation mode cancelled Otherwise the system will give an alarm and machine stops When the cutter compensation is cancelled by G40 movement amount should be specified otherwise an alarm will occur e Inthe canned cycle G codes G40 G41 G42 codes are disabled 50 Chapter 3 G Command SWIN OA C1 700 1300 P5 900 1150 650R P4 500 1150 C2 1550 1550 v o a fb 3 3 2 ae P4 950 900 P2 250 900 p3 450 900 P7 1150 900 P9 700 650 1150 550 A Y axis P8 Example Block 1 is named start the compensation cancellation mode becomes compensation mode by G41 in this block At the end of this block tool center is compensated in the direction that tool radius is vertical to next program path From P1 to P2 Tool compensation value is specified with DO7 so set the compensation number to 7 then the G41is indicated with tool path compensation left After the compensation begins tool path compensation performs automatically when creating the workpiece as PI gt P2 P8 P9 PI NOO G92 X0 YO Z0 N01 G90 G17 G00 G41 D7 X250 0 Y550 0 The compensation value should be pre set with compensation number N02 G01 Y900 0 F150 NO3 X450 0 N04 G03 X500 0 Y1150 0 R650 0 N05 G02 X900 0 R 250 0 N06 G03 X950 0 Y900 0 R650 0 N07 G01 X1150 0 N08 Y550 0 NO9 X700 0 Y650 0 N10 X250 0 Y550 0 N11 G00 G
259. he above issues and eliminate the error the Tool compensation C should be setup When a block is read in the tool compensation C is not performed immediately but the next block is read in again Corresponding movement path is calculated according to the point of intersection of two blocks conjunction vector The tool compensation C performs more accurate compensation in figure because two blocks are read for processing in advance See the Fig 6 1 Net AMEI wey Jte n 6 1 2 Compensation value setting Fig 6 1 C type cutter radius compensation The radius value of each tool should be set before tool compensation C is applied Tool radius compensation value is set in the OFFSET page table 6 1 this page contains tool geometric radius and tool radius wear There into D is the tool compensation value when the bit 1 of bit parameter No 003 is 1 the D is compensation value input by diameter If the bit 1 of bit parameter No 003 is 0 the D is compensation value input by radius The following explanations are all indicated in radius compensation value if not especially pointed out Table 6 1 Display page for CNC cutter radius compensation value 142 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation 6 1 3 Command format G17 40 S G00 X Y Z D G18 G41 G01 G19 G42 Commands Explanation NO Geometric H Wearing H Geometric D Wearing D 001 20 020 0 030 5 000 0 020 002 10 020 0 123 0 500 0 030 S c 3 D
260. hell DY3 drive unit DF3 drive unit GSK980MDa CN14 i sional nertace GSK980MDa CN14 signal interface 1 CP4 1 CPt 1 CP4 1 CP 9 CP4 2 9 CP 9 CP4 2 CP 2 DIR4 2 DIR 2 DIR4 3 DIR 10 DIR4 10 DIR 10 DIRA 4 DIR 11 OV 14 RDY2 11 OV 9 OUT COM 12 5V N 3 EN 12 5V 8 FREE 5 ALM4 6 RDY1 5 ALM4 7 ALM COM 14 OV An 11 EN 14 0V 5 FREE Metal shell Metal shell Metal shell y Metal shell Fig 2 12 Connection of 4 axis interface to drive unit 279 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 2 2 3 Connection of 4 axis interface as rotary axis DAPO3 spindle drive GSK980MDa CN14 unit CN1 interface 1 CP4 42 PULS 9 CP4 28 PULS 2 DIR44 33 SIGN 10 DIR4 34 SIGN 5 ALM4 7 ALM 3 PC4 4 ZOUT 23 COM 11 OV 24 SON 4 24 37 COM 19 ZOUT Metal shell Metal shell Fig 2 13 Connection of 4 axis 2 3 Connection of spindle port 2 3 1 Definition of signal interface to spindle drive unit lt 2 1 CP5 CP5 CP5 Spindle pulse signal 2 2 DIRS gt 14 CP5 DIR5 DIR5 Spindle direction signal 3 GND l 15 DIR5 ALM5 Spindle alarm signal 4 ALMS gt 16 GND RDY5 Spindle is ready m 5 X5 0 17 24V PC5 Spindle zero signal m 6 X52 18 SETS SVC Output of voltage o 7 RDY5 Io ENS SET5 Spindle disable signal
261. his interface In this page it is easy to see the file list and file of CNC and USB when USB is connected At the same time opening duplication c 3 D F O D 9 a o E and deletion can be done here FILE LIST 00003 NOO000 jt pora We m G50G51 Design new 00001 CNC amp MZRDataProc i 00002 CNC m 2009 471 k 00003 CNC fm ly INPUT FILE INFO 17B 2009 12 28 10 10 31 NOTE CHG C U SHIFT EOB OPEN OUT COPY TO U FLASH EDIT Seeea TOO Hae 1 3 3 Tool offset macro variable and tool life management interface ome ome is a compound key press key once in other page to enter the TOOL OFFSET OFFSET page press en key again to enter the MACRO interface 177 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 1 OFFSET interface There are 4 tool offset pages in this interface and 32 offset numbers No 001 No 032 available dE for user which can be shown as the following figure by pressing or ES keys TOOL OFFSET 00003 NOO000 u Geo H Wear H Geo D Wear D RELATIVE 0 000 0 000 0 000 X 0 000 02 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 Y 0 000 OS 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 S 04 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 9 000 c 05 8 000 8 000 a 000 a 000 ABSOLUTE 2 06 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 X 0 000 oT 0 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 Y 0 000 08 8 000 8 000 8 000 a 000 Q Z 0 000 NO 6601 A EDIT 50000 TOO Hae 5 2
262. ied 8 Spindle rotates CW 9 Return to the initial plane if it is G98 Command Path SWIN OA G98 Mode for returning to initial plane G99 Mode for returning to R point plane Initial point level 13 ces e su D a o e o 3 3 5 e panas Spindle PontR 3 soe POSIUNeLy PointR negatively Spindle Spindle positively positively n tq Mn ent p Point Z Related Explanation 1 Tapping to the bottom of a hole it will not be returned immediately even if the P is omitted or regarded as 0 in this cycle it will be returned after a dwell time 2s and this time is set by system 2 The F is tapping modal value the last tapping F value is taken when it is omitted or alarm will be generated if it does not exist 3 The metric or inch of the F value is determined by G20 metric or G21 inch 4 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 3 Tapping cycle G84 Format G98 G99 G84 X Y R Z P F L_ Function This cycle is used to machine a thread The tapping is performed by spindle rotating positively when the bottom of a hole has been reached the spindle is retracted in the reverse direction Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the Table 13 1 7 Thereinto the F is tooth pitch The value range is 0 001 500 00mm metric 0 06 25400 tooth inch inch Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY p
263. ied additionally Q or P is not available in some canned cycle G command hole machining the command is disabled even if these data are specified they are regarded as modal data memories only 60 Chapter 3 G Command Table 13 1 7 Command explanations for canned cycle Specifying Address Explanation for command address content Hole machining Hole position Specifying the hole position with the absolute and incremental value data control is same with GOO position Unit mm See the fig 13 1 B the distance from initial point level to point R plane is specified by using the incremental value or specifying the coordinate value of the point R by absolute value Unit mm Hole depth See the fig 13 1 A the distance from R point to the bottom of a hole is specified by using the incremental value or specifying the Hole coordinate value of the hole bottom by absolute value Unit mm Refer to the canned cycle list SWIN OA Burwiwes6oig machining Specifying each cut in in G73 and G83 or translational value in G76 and data G87 Unit mm Specifying the dwell at the bottom of a hole Relation of time and the numerical specified are same with G04 Unit ms Machining cycle for L holes is performed from start start position of block to XY coordinate position A part of command of canned cycle such as G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are explained in the following ch
264. ignment 1 J G65 H01 Pl Q ZJ example G65 H01 P 101 Q125 101 125 G65 H01 P 101 Q 110 101 110 G65 H01 P 101 Q 102 101 102 2 Addition operation 1 J K G65 H02 P I Q J R K example G65 H02 P 101 Q 102 R15 101 102 15 G65 H02 P 101 Q 110 R 102 101 110 102 3 Subtraction operation 1 J K G65 H03 PHI QZJ R K example G65 HO3 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 4 Multiplication operation 1 J x K G65 H04 P I Q J R K example G65 H04 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 x 103 5 Division operation Zl J K G65 H05 PI QZJ R K example G65 HO5 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 103 Note The divisor k cannot be 0 otherwise an alarm occurs 6 OR operation 1 J OR K G65 H11 PHI Q J RZK example G65 H11 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 OR 103 7 AND operation 1 J AND K G65 H12 PI QJ R K example G65 H12 P 101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 AND 103 132 Chapter 5 Macro Program 8 XOR operation 1 J XOR K G65 H13 PHI QZJ R K example G65 H13 P4101 Q 102 R 103 101 102 XOR 103 9 Square root HL AJ G65 H21 P I QZJ example G65 H21 P4401 Q 102 101 4102 Note the radicand J cannot be negative otherwise an alarm occurs 10 Absolute value 1 J G65 H22 P I Q J example G65 H22 P 101 Q 102 101 102 101 102 11 Rounding off 1 ROUND J ROUND off the first decimal G65 H23 Pil Q
265. illing and spot drilling machining it is up after dwell at the bottom of a hole only the dwell time is specified by P the dwell will not be executed if it is not specified and the command action is same as that of G81 In the blind hole the accuracy of hole can be improved by the dwell 2 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value will be reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 6 Peck drilling cycle G83 Format G98 G99 G83 X Y R Z Q F Lo Function This cycle performs high speed peck drilling it performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole Explanation The command explanation for canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level at the rapid traverse 65 SWIN OA E a o e o 3 3 5 e GSE GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed for Q distance 4 Retract to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 5 Rapid feed to d distance to the end surface 6 Cutting feed for Q d distance 7 Cycling 4 5 and 6 to the bottom of a hole along Z axis 8 Return to the initial point or point R plane according to the G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse SWIN OA Command Path v e Q 3 3 G98 returned to the initial plane at the G99 returned to the point R plane at the Q rapid traverse rapid traverse
266. ime constant of manual feed 2 4 4 Automatic acceleration or deceleration This GSK980MDa performs automatically acceleration or deceleration in order to achieve the smooth transition of the speed at the beginning of the axis movement or before the movement stops this will diminish the impact when the movement is start or stop This GSK980MDa adopts kinds of acceleration or deceleration as follows Rapid traverse linear type front acceleration or deceleration Cutting feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration Manual feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration MPG feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration Step feed exponential type rear acceleration or deceleration Speed after Speed by acceleration ore interpolation deceleration controle Pulse signment Acceleration or Drive Interpolation deceleration controle controle Fig 2 9v Feedrate Fc Feedrate Tc Acceleration or deceleration time constant for cutting feedrate Time Tc Tc Fc feedrate Tc The acceleration or deceleration time constant of cutting feedrate Data parameter No 072 and No 074 Fig 2 11 Curves for cutting and manual feedrate When the cutting feed is performed this GSK980MDa adopts exponential rear acceleration or 25 euinjoA y o e 9 3 3 2 e GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual deceleration an arc transition will be formed for the a
267. ime t Fig 2 41 294 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals Machine zero return process A Select machine zero return mode press the manual positive or negative feed key machine zero return direction is set by bit parameter No 022 the corresponding axis moves to the machine zero by a rapid traverse speed As the axis press down the deceleration switch to cut off deceleration signal the feed slows down immediately and it continues to run in a fixed low speed B When the deceleration switch is released the deceleration signal contact point is closed again And CNC begins to detect the encoder one rotation signal if the signal level changes the motion will be stoped And the corresponding zero indicator on the operator panel lights up for machine zero return completion e Machine zero return type B as an proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals D Its sketch map is shown in follows YN Machine zero return direction 225mm Metal inductive block fixed on the machine slider PNP NC approach switch In figure usually L12 1 5 2 folds To connect to 24V width of the approach switch L2 the width of the approach switch nDEC and nPC signals 16 connect to OV connected together Fig 2 42 2 Wiring of the deceleration signal See details in Section 2 1 6 of this chapter 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis
268. immediately 2 4 4 Power off Under the dangerous or emergency situations during the machine running the machine power should be cut off immediately to avoid the accidents However it should be noted that there may be a big error between the CNC displayed coordinate and the actual position So the tool setting operation should be performed again 201 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION o A Press MANUAL Key it enters Manual mode In this mode the manual feed spindle control override adjustment operations can be performed Note The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder Diagram please refer to the respective materials by the machine builder for the function significance Please note that the following function introduction is described based on the 980MDa standard PLC programs 3 1 Coordinate axis moving lt 2 c 3 O F O Le O E o 5 In Manual mode the coordinate axis can be moved manually for feeding and rapid traverse 3 1 1 Manual feed Press feed axis and axis direction key in the direction selection ah eZ 4 EN NG areal 0 ov gt z l the corresponding axis may be moved positively or negatively and the axis stops moving if releasing these two keys and the direction selection keys of X Y Z 4th 5th axes can be hold on at a time to make the 5 axes to
269. ine continuous drilling RPTH 1 Hole locating is cutting path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling 0 Hole locating is rapid path in circle and rectangle continuous drilling NAT 1 Define the range of user macro program asin atan 0 Not define the range of user macro program asin atan BRCH 1 Plane returning is selected by G98 and G99 in continous drilling 0 Plane returning is selected by G99 in continous drilling MST 1 External cycle start signal ST invalid 0 External cycle start signal ST valid MSP 1 External stop signal SP invalid 0 External stop signal SP valid with external stop switch connected otherwise CNC shows stop MOT 1 Not detect software stroke limit 7 0 Detect software stroke limit MESP 1 Emergency stop invalid 0 Emergency stop valid ESOR ESCD 1 S code off at emergency stop 0 S code not off at emergency stop KEY1 1 Prog switch ON after power on 0 Prog switch OFF after power on HNG5 1 5th MPG ccw cw 0 5th MPG ccw cw HNG4 1 4th MPG ccw cw 0 4th MPG ccw cw HNGZ 1 Z MPG ccw cw 0 ZMPG ccw cw 304 Chapter 3 Parameter HNGY 1 Y MPG ccw cw 0 Y MPG ccw cw HNGX 1 X MPG ccw cw 0 X MPG ccw cw SPFD 1 Cutting feed stops if spindle stops 0 Cutting feed not stop after spindle stop SAR 1 Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting 0 Not detect spindle SAR
270. initial plane when the automatic operation is performed again the spindle is stopped and G88 is finished Explanation For the command explanation of the canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of hole 4 The spindle is stopped 5 P time is delayed if it is specified 6 Manual operation will be performed if the dwell is executed 7 Restoring the automatic mode retracting to initial point or point R plane according to the G98 or G99 at the rapid traverse rate 8 The spindle rotates positively gt gt o 68 Chapter 3 G Command Command Path m lt G98 Mode for returning to initial plane G99 Mode for returning to point R plane o c 3 o d s point level Hees pica ome y 4 spindle e positively E 3 Point R i Spindle e MPG feedrate ae 4 positively Spindle stops Spindle stops after dwell after dwell MPG feedrate Point Z Point Z Related Explanation The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as the canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 10 Boring cycle G89 Format G98 G99 G89 X Y R Z P F L 7 Function This cycle is used to bore a hole normally This cycle performs a dwell at the bottom of the hole the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole at the rapid traverse rate Explanation For the co
271. interface Bit paramete r Data paramete r PARAMETER Pitch paramete r CNC NC DIA 1 diagnosis l PLC PLC STATEI state pe PLC data PLC DATA 1 PLC DATA i PLC DATA n Version VERSION MESSAGE Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display 1 3 1 Position interface POSITION Press romo to enter Position interface which has four interfaces such as ABSOLUTE POS e B RELATIVE POS INTEGRATED POS and POS amp PRG and they can be viewed by a ori key 1 ABSOLUTE POS display interface The X Y Z coordinates displayed are the absolute position of the tool in current workpiece coordinate system as CNC power on these coordinates are held on and the workpiece coordinate system is specified by G92 ABSOLUTE POS 00000 NOO000 00000 NOOOO0O cao cis co coz X 0 000 Y 0 000 AL Z 0 000 PART CNT o CUT TIME 0 00 00 MDI 50000 TOO Hae FO100 5 B0 NSO PRG E 100 ACT E FED OVRI 156 RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 100 c 3 D O D 9 Ss o gt PRG F a rate specified by F code in program Note It displays PRG F in Auto MDI mode MAN F in Machine zero Manual mode HNDL INC in MPG mode STEP INC in Step mode ACT F Actual speed after feedrate override calculated FED OVRI An override that is selected by feedrate override switch SPI OVRI Adjust the spindle rotational speed by altering spindle override PART CNT Part
272. interface the keypad diagnosis state diagnosis and miscellaneous function parameters etc can be shown in this interface which can be viewed by E pressing key In CNC DIAGNOSIS page there are 2 diagnosis No rows at the page bottom the 1 row shows the meaning of a diagnosis No bit where the cursor locates the bit to be displayed can be positioned O uU by pressing or id key The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the diaosgnis No bits where the cursor locates 190 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display CNC DIAGNOSIS 00003 NO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 000 00000000 008 00011111 016 00000000 001 00000000 009 00011111 017 00000000 002 00000000 010 00000000 018 00000000 003 00001111 011 00000000 019 00000000 004 00000000 012 00000000 020 00000000 005 00000000 013 X00000000 021 00000000 006 90011000 014 00000000 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 00000000 023 00000000 ESP ex xxx DECS DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX bit7 ESP signal X0 5 NO 000 JOG so000 TOO Hae 2 PLC STATE interface In the page of this interface it orderly displays the state of address X0000 X0029 Y0000 Y0019 F0000 F0255 G0000 G0255 A0000 A0024 K0000 K0039 R0000 R0999 etc JANUS And it enters PLC STATE interface by pressing key repeatedly The signal state of PLC 5 c 3 D O D 9 o gt addresses can be viewed by pressing key In PLC STATE page there are 2 rows at
273. ion Sequence within Block When multiple words such as G X Y Z F R M S T are in one block most of M S and T words are interpreted by NC and sent to PLC for processing Other words are processed by NC directly M98 M99 M9000 M9999 and S word which specify the spindle speed in r min m min are directly processed by NC as well When G words share the same block with MOO M01 M02 and M30 M words are executed after G words and NC sends corresponding signals to PLC for processing When the G words share the same block with the M98 M99 M9000 M9998 these M words are performed by NC after G words the M signal not sent to PLC 8 Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals When G words and M S T words share the same block PLC program ladder diagram determines the execution consequence executed at the same time or G words before M S T words Refer to the manual from tool builder for relevant words execution sequence 1 3 Basic Axes Increment System euinjoA The increment system consists of the least input increment for input and least command increment for output The least input increment is the minimum unit for programming moving distance The least command increment is the minimum unit for moving the tool on the machine Both increments are represented in mm inches or deg The basic axes herein means X Y Z axes The basic increment system includes IS B and IS C types which can be selected by bit ISC of parameter NO 038
274. ircular to Circular Format U e e 9 3 3 2 O G02 G03 IP R I J K C G02 003 IP R I J K_ Function An arc is inserted between two arc interpolations which it is tangential with two circulars the data followed by the command address C is radius R2 o d Tangential pointe Tangential pointe Rl e 4 Circular to Linear Format G02 G03 IP R I J K C G01 IP Function An arc is inserted at the intersection of arc and straight line which is tangential with the arc and straight line the data following the command address C is radius 96 Chapter 3 G Command R 2 NE 3 Tangential pointe O HER CON et A 22 7 v o a fb 3 3 2 te 3 20 3 Exceptional Cases The chamfering function is ineffective or alarm is issued in the following circumstances 1 Linear chamfering A The chamfering function is ineffective when two interpolation lines is shown on the same line B If the chamfering linear length is too long and the CNC alarm occurs C If some line arc is too short the alarm occurs 2 Arc Chamfering A The arc chamfering function is disabled when two interpolation lines are shown on the same line B If the chamfering radius is excessive the CNC alarm occurs 97 SWIN OA v e e 9 3 gt 2 Q G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual C The arc chamfering function is disabled when the line is tangential wit
275. is ON the program runs from the block where the cursor is located e If the operation mode is switched to MANUAL MPG STEP MACHINE ZERO RETURN mode when the program is running the execution dwells after switching to automatic mode again when 99 97 key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON the program runs from where it stops e The execution dwells when key is pressed or external pause signal is cut off program starts running from where it stops when i3 key on the panel is pressed or external cycle start signal is ON The program dwells at the end of each block when the single block switch is on after pressing E or switching on external cycle signal program continuously runs from the next block e Blocks with mark is skipped when the skip switch is ON The object block is executed when command G65 or macro program skip GOTO is specified e When M98 or M9000 M9999 command is performed the corresponding subprogram or macro program is called M99 is executed at the end of the subprogram or macro program after returning to the main program the subsequent block the one after the block in which the subprogram is called is executed return to a specified block if it is commanded by M99 e When M99 command is specified in the middle of a main program which is not called by other programs the current program is repeatly executed after returning to the head of the program 1 2 2 Word Execut
276. is lower than or equal to the 3 level 32 4 5 lt 2 c 3 D O o D E Ss o gt level the password level is not changed if repower the CNC system If previous level is higher than the 3 level 0 1 or 2 level it defaults the 3 level 9 2 2 Alteration of the password Steps for password alteration 1 After entering the PASSWORD SETTING page enter the password by the methods in Section10 3 2 2 Mowe the cursor to the ALTER PASSWORD line DATA INPUT 3 Key in the new password and press key 4 The CNC system prompts PLEASE INPUT USER PASSWORD AGAIN the page is as follows AUTH OPERATION 00000 NOO0000 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL gt INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Modify parameter and edit program MDI IMAGE STORED 50000 TOO Hae 253 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual DATA INPUT 5 After reinputting the password press key if the two passwords input are identical CNC prompts PASSWORD UPDATED So the password alteration is successful AUTH OPERATION 00000 NAAAAA CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS PASSWORD UPDATED Modify parameter and edit program MDI soooo TOO Hag Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo
277. is used to set and display the life data of a group which are displayed by order 18 T LIFE MANAG 00003 NO00000 Tool Group 01 No Offset Life Used Mode State Group al MDI soo00 TOO Hae There are 3 display types for tool group selection i Directly input the group number in the Tool Group P of the 2 page it displays the tool life 180 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display data If the group does not exist the number input will be taken as a new group number The new group number 05 and the 1 tool will be defined by system automatically ii Move the cursor to select the group number in the Defined Group No of the 1 page and it displays the group content as turning to the 2 page iii As the current group number content is displayed in the 2 page it continues to display the following group number content by turning to the next page 1 3 4 Alarm interface ALARM Press pum key to enter Alarm interface there are CNC ALARM PLC ALARM ALARM LOG I El pages in this interface which can be viewed by or key 1 PLC ALARM It displays the numbers of CNC alarm PLC alarm and the current PLC alarm No as well as PLC warning and warning No It may display 24 PLC alarm or warning No together The details for the respective alarm No can be viewed by moving the cursor The page is as follows PLC ALARM WARN 00003 NO00000 CNC ALM 0 PLE ALN 1 PLC WARN 6
278. its smoothly by the acceleration amp deceleration The feedrate does not always drop to the start speed when the previous path is finished and a circular transition non accurate positioning will be formed at the path intersection The machining surface by this path transition has a good finish and a higher machining efficiency When the stepper motor drive unit is applied the SMZ of the bit parameter Ne007 should be set to 1 to avoid the out of step When the stepper motor drive unit is applied to this system the out of step may occur if rapid traverse speed is too large acceleration amp deceleration time constant is too small acceleration amp deceleration start end speed is too large The suggested parameter setting is shown in follows the electronic gear ratio is 1 1 Data parameter Ne059 Ne063x5000 Data parameter Ne064 Ne0682350 Data parameter No071 lt 50 Data parameter No0722150 Data parameter No073 lt 50 Data parameterNe0742150 Data parameterNe075x100 When AC servo motor drive unit is applied to this system the machining efficiency can be improved by a larger start speed and smaller ACC amp DEC time constant setting If optimum ACC amp DEC characteristics are required the ACC amp DEC time constant may be set to 0 which can be got by adjusting the AC servo ACC amp DEC parameters The suggested parameter settings are as follows electronic gear ratio is 1 1 Data parameter No059 N9e063 set higher properly Data parameter Ne064 N2068 l
279. ive even if the negative value is specified If the Q value is not specified then it defaults 0 1mm If a depth to be cut is less than the Q value then cut to the bottom of the hole without tool retraction at the rapid traverse for the first time 2 To remove chips from the hole easily a small value can be set for retraction This allows drilling to be performed efficiently The tool is retracted in rapid feed the retraction amount d is set by parameter No 51 the default is 1000 unit 0 001mm 3 The command P is disabled but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 2 Left handed tapping cycle G74 Format G98 G99 G74X Y R Z P F L Function This cycle performs left handed tapping In the left handed tapping cycle the spindle rotates clockwise for tapping till the bottom of the hole has been reached then retracts by counter clockwise after dwell Explanation For canned cycle explanation see the Table 13 1 7 Thereinto the F is indicated for tooth pitch The value range are indicated as 0 001 500 00mm metric 0 06 25400 teeth inch inch Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Tapping to the bottom of a hole 4 The spindle stops 5 Pause for time P if dwell is specified 6 The spindle rotates CCW and then retracts to point R plane 62 Chapter 3 G Command 7 The spindle is stopped pause for time P if dwell is specif
280. k OR Hi j OR k G65 H11 P i Q j R k AND Hi A AND k G65 H12 P i Q j R k XOR Hi j XOR k G65 H13 P i Q j R k Square root 1 SQRT Aj G65 H21 P i Q j Absolute value 1 ABS Hj G65 H22 P i Qj Rounding off 4 ROUND 4j G65 H23 PH i Qffj Rounding up 1 FUP 4j G65 H24P i Q j Rounding down G65 H25 P i Q j Nature logarithm ASP Dn G65 H26 P i Q j Exponential function H LN j G65 H27 P i Q j Hi EXP j Sine Hi SIN Aj G65 H31 P i Q j An angle is specified Arcsine i ASIN j 4k 665 H32 P i Q j in degree 90 Cosine i COS sj G65 H33 P i Q j degrees and 30 Arccosine i ACOS 44 G65 H34 ii em minutes is Tangent f G65 H35 P i Qj represented as 90 5 Arctangent ASIAN EA G65 H36 P i Q j R k degree i ATAN j k Conversion from BCD to BIN i BIN j G65 H41 P i Qj Used for the signal Conversion from BIN to BCD i BCD j G65 H42 P i Q j exchange to and from PLC Unconditional branch GOTO i G65 H80 P i QZj R k Please note that K Equals to branch Not equals to branch Greater than branch Smaller than branch Greater than or equals to branch Smaller than or equals to branch IF i EQ j GOTO k IF i NE j GOTO k IF i GT j GOTO k IF i LT j GOTO k IF i GE j GOTO k a n nanan mm IF i LE j GOTO k G65 H81 P i Q j R k G65 H82 P i Q j R k G65 H83 P i Q j R k G65 H84 P i Q j R k G65 H85 P i Q j R k G65 H86 P i Q j R k is the skip signal in macro statement
281. l 1 There is no intersection Alarm occurs and When the tool radius value tool stops is small there is an When the compensation value is large e intersection for the arc A A x compensation when the When the compensation value is small 4 Y radius is bigger the intersection may not exist Programmed path ILL E i zz the tonl stops at the end of previous block and then the alarm occurs Center nf arc B Center of arc A Fig 6 11 Exceptional There is no intersection after the path offset 2 The arc center is consistent to the start point or end point nere SEIS The alarm will be generated Tool nose center path by the following issues G41 Programmed path N5 G91 G01 220 N6 602 210 KO N7 G03 X 10 1 10 Fig 6 12 Center ofarc is consistent to the start point or end point e Offset path with the compensation direction changed in compensation mode The compensation direction can be changed in special occasion but it cannot be changed at the beginning and the following block There are no inner side and outer side for the full compensation 150 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to Circular S Tool nose center path S c j O Programmed C v path U A i 8 UU APP p Tool nose center path Programmed L 3 D path 3 Fig 6 13a Linear to linear compensation Fig 6 136 Linear to circular compensation 3 direction changed direction changed El 3
282. l CN62 8 YO 7 CCW indicator on the machine panel Y23 1 CW indicator on the machine panel Y19 1 Spindle stop indicator on the machine Y18 0 panel M03 Command signal for CCW Command ingut M04 Command signal for CW M05 Command signal for spindle stop e Control Parameter L Li 1 Ree O RSJG 1 Output signals for spindle cooling and lubricating are on when resetting 0 Output signals for spindle cooling and lubricating are off when resetting M code execution time Delay time of spindle stop to braking output Spindle braking output time XIGNHddV e Operation Sequence Spindle operation sequence is as follows 361 gt az 3 le Z J p va GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System Spindle Stop T A Spindle CW CCW a Spindle Stop lo oa DT022 Spindle brake nn P AL Note DT022 is the delay time from the spindle stop signal issued to spindle brake signal is issued DT023 is spindle brake hold time Logic control SSTP output is validated after the CNC is power on When SSTP output is valid the executing of M03 or 04 will disable SSTP output and enable SFR or SRV output The executing of MO5 will disable SFR or SRV output and enable SSTP output Spindle braking signal SPZD output delay is set by data DT022 of PLC The delay time between the spindle stop command output and braking signal SPZD output The time for braking signal hold on is set by data DT023 of PLC Spind
283. l a custom macro program but cannot pass arguments Usually the macro program is provided by tool builders but it can also be programmed by customers It is not necessary for the customers to remermber all related commands in macro programs besides codes that call macro programs 5 5 2 Limitation e Macro statement processing in cutter compensation C mode In cutter compensation C mode G41 G42 in order to calculate the transmission point NC prereads the next block The processing way is not the same as general NC statement When a macro statement is executed as a single block it is the block that does not involve movement And in some cases it cannot correctly execute compensation strictly speaking such block involves 0 distance of movement gt Jump GOTO DO END In cutter compensation C mode when jump command GOTO DO END is specified P S alarm occurs gt When the move command adopts variables In cutter compensation C when the move command such as G01 X 101 adopts variables P S alarm occurs Because cutter compensation C mode is block preread mode the end point of the next block is essential for calculating the current transmission point position Specifying X 101 an unknown data does not enable a correct calculation of the current transmission point e Single block operation MDI In MDI mode macro programs can be specified but macro program call cannot be executed Oo Skip ep A appearing in the
284. l path Inaccurate positioning Example The BIT3 of the bit parameter is set to 0 G91 G01 100 X axis move negatively Z 200 Z axis move negatively Y 300 Y axis move negatively Z A gt Programmed path ha dgio e Actual movement tool path Fig 2 12 26 Chapter 3 G Command CHAPTER3 G COMMAND 3 1 G COMMAND BRIEF The G command is composed by the command address G and the 1 to 3 digits command value after the command G Many kinds of operations are specified such as tool movement relative to workpiece coordinate set etc See Table 3 1 for G commands G oor A Command value 00 143 the leading zero can be omitted Command address G WnjoA E a o e o 3 3 5 e The G command words can be classified into 12 groups such as 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 and 14 They share the same block except for 01 and 00 groups different groups G commands can be defined at the same block The last G command is valid when two or more same group G commands are introduced at the same block Different G command groups without common parameter command word can be defined at the same block and their functions are simultaneously valid regardless of sequence If the G command or the optional G command other than Table 3 1 is employed alarm occurs Table 3 14 G command word list Function Command word G04 G28 Dwell exact stop
285. la 42 3 7 Conversion of Inch and Metric G20 and G21 oooocnnocccconccconccconononnnncnonncnnnononncnoncnnoncnconnncnnr non nnne enn 42 3 8 Reference Point REUS et ain b ua dh ee ENTER 43 3 9 Return from Reference Point G29 assein ee erne e rrote iei aeria 44 3 10 The 2nd 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return G30 eccceessssccccceesssssscceeeceeessssssseseceeeessesssseeess 45 JAT Skip Function Gdl A A Lo Ae ace oa 47 3 12 Tool Nose Radius Compensation C G40 G41 and G42 coooconnccccoocccoooncnonnnconcncononcnonncnonncnnncnoncnnancnnnns 49 3 13 Tool Length Compensation G43 G44 G49 ssssssssssssssseseeen eene enne enitn 52 3 14 Workpiece Coordinate system G54 G59 sssssssssssssssessseeeeeee ener enne enne enne 55 345 Compound Cycle Command iii 57 3 15 1 Brief for canned cycle enne trn nnne enne 57 3 15 2 Description for canned cycle sessssssssssssseeen eene 61 3 15 3 Continous Drilling creed itt A fete eee bas esoes 82 3 15 4 Cautions for canned cycle eene 86 3 15 5 Examples for modal data specified in canned cycle 88 3 15 6 Examples for canned cycle and tool length compensation sssssss 89 3 16 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and G91 ssssssssssssssseeeeeeee ener 9 3 17 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting G92 sse eene enne entren nn 9 3 18 Feed per min G94 Feed per rev G95 sssssssssssssseessseeeeeeene enne nennen enne n
286. lane level at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Tapping to the bottom of a hole 4 Spindle stops 5 For dwell time P if it is commanded 6 Spindle returns to the point R plane in reverse direction 63 GR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GS 7 Spindle stops for dwell time P if the P is commanded 8 The spindle is rotated in the positive direction 9 Returning to the initial point level if it is G98 S Command Path c 3 G98 Mode for returning to initial point level G99 Mode for returning to point R plane o v 9 O IS jJ plnitial point level geet D 3 3 5 Spindle Spindle a positively negatively Point R E P Dwell Dwell Ru Spindle pings g negatively TREO negatively Po Point Z oint Z Related Explanation Please refer to the related explanation for G74 Counter tapping cycle 3 15 2 4 Drilling cycle spot drilling cycle G81 Format G98 G99 G81 X Y R Z F LU Function This cycle is used for normal drilling Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole the tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole in rapid traverse Explanation For the command explanation of canned cycle see the Table 13 1 7 Cycle Process 1 Positioning to the XY plane level position at the rapid traverse 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of the hole 4 Returning to the initial point or point
287. lation system 2 G02 Vireuierielles G56 Workpiece coordinate G35 Fed perrotation interpolation CW system 3 G03 Cireuianneligal G57 Workpiece coordinate G98 Return to initial plane in interpolation CCW system 4 canned cycle Go4 Dwell exact stop G58 Workpiece coordinate G99 Return to R point in canned system 5 cycle G10 Tool life G59 Workpiece coordinate 6110 Inner circle groove management system 6 roughing CCW G11 Tool life G65 Macro program macro G111 Inner circle groove management end code roughing CW M dal G17 XY plane selection G66 xm poe uS G112 Inner circle finishing CCW M dal G18 ZX plane selection G67 VAM Led dirus G113 Inner circle finishing CW call cancel T Circular outer finish milling G19 YZ plane selection G73 High speed peck drilling G114 CW Outer circle finishing G20 Inch input G74 Counter tapping cycle G115 p pping Cy CCW Rectangular groove G21 Metric input G80 Canned cycle cancel G134 n y roughing CCW G28 Reference position G81 DII cycle spot 6135 pectangila groove return drilling cycle roughing CW G29 Return arom G82 Drilling cycle stepped G136 Rectangular groove inner reference position hole boring cycle finishing CCW RUN NE Rectangular groove inner G30 reference position G83 Peck drilling cycle Cn MM finishing CW return Rect ter finishi G31 Skip function G84 Tapping cycle G138 a O pe CCW tt viis G40 Cutter G85 Boring cycle C139 Rectangul
288. le Absolute value for Round off negative 9999 999 9999 999 G134 G139 width of rectangle in X direction Absolute value for Round off negative 0 06 25400 G74 G84 inch screw unit tooth inch Absolute value for Round off negative Distance from arc start point to center point in 9999 999 9999 999 Round off Y direction G112 G113 distance from start point to 9999 999 9999 999 center point Absolute value for Round off negative 9999 999 9999 999 G114 G115 distance from start point to circle Absolute value for Round off negative 9999 999 9999 999 G134 G139 width of rectangle in Y direction Absolute value for Round off negative 9999 999 9999 999 G140 G141 length of 2nd side of rectangle Absolute value for Round off negative Distance from arc start point to the 9999 999 9999 999 Round off center point in Z direction G110 G111 G134 G135 cutting increment 9999 999 9999 999 in Absolute value for Round off XY plane each time negative 31 SWIN OA a o tel o 3 3 5 e SWIN OA 3 o e a o 3 3 5 e C GSK CNC 5K GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual G136 G139 distance from start 9999 999 9999 999 point to rectangle side in X axis direction Absolute value for Round off negative 9999 999 9999 999 The length of linear chamfering Absolute value for Round off negative Punchi
289. le brake output time If the spindle rotates in CCW or CW the alarm AO0 3 Illegal command MO3 or M04 is generated if the M04 or M03 is commanded Note 1 When the CNC external emergency stop or spindle alarm is issued the spindle rotation output signal is off and meanwhile the SSTP signal is output Note 2 When CNC is reset whether SRV or SFR output is cancelled is determined upon the bit RSJG of K0010 When RSJG 0 SRV or SFR output is closed after the CNC is reset When RSJG 1 SRV or SFR output state unchanged after the CNC is reset Note 3 The alarm A0 1 spindle alarm is generated when the spindle alarm signal X1 6 is detected by PLC Note 4 In the spindle analog volume control if the output voltage is more than 0 the spindle enable signal is valid 5 3 2 Spindle JOG Relevant signals Type Sign Meaning Correspondi PLC CNC ng pin out state diagnosis Input Signal for spindle JOG key on X25 5 signal machine panel Output Indicator for spindle JOG Y21 1 signal start up on machine panel 362 Appendix e Control parameter L qsej y j JSPD 0 Spindle JOG is effective only in JOG MPG REF modes 1 Spindle JOG is effective in any mode e Function description When holding down the Spindle JOG key on the machine panel the spindle rotates CCW and it stops rotating as soon as the key is released 5 3 3 Switch Value Control for Spindle Speed e Relevant signals
290. le is enabled C axis positive The above mentioned may occur 1 The machine coordinate value of rotation axis Type A 2 The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No 027 ROAx 1 absolute coordinate cycle function is enabled 3 The relative coordinate value in data parameter No 027 RRLx 1 relative coordinate cycle function is enabled Note 1 Refer to the Section of Installation and connection of the Parameter Explanation of Chapter Three for the parameter setting of additional rotation axis Note 2 When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the movement amount of each revolution of the additional rotation axis is expressed with 360 The pitch error compensation function of rotation axis When the additional axis is a linear axis or rotation axis Type B the pitch error compensation mode is same as the common linear axis The pitch error compensation function is performed when the additional axis is regarded as rotation axis Type A refer to the following examples Movement amount per revolution 360 Pitch error pisition interval 45 The compensation position number of reference position 60 After the above parameters are set the farthest compensation position number along the negative rotation axis which equals to the compensation position number of reference position The farthest compensation number along positive direction is shown below The compensation position number of re
291. leration amp deceleration time constant of Y axis rapid traverse Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of 4th axis rapid traverse Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of 5th axis rapid traverse Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms ms ms Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of Z axis rapid traverse ms ms ms Rapid traverse speed when rapid override is FO Setting range 6 4000 Unit mm min Axes top feedrate of cutting Setting range 10 4000 Unit mm min Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in cutting feed Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min M eunjoA i i Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of cutting Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms gt o sp D et 5 Start speed in manual feed Setting range 0 8000 Unit mm min Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of manual feed Setting range 10 4000 Unit ms Threading axes start speed Setting range 6 8000 Unit mm min E Initial speed of acc amp dec speed of CS axis Setting range 0 5000 Unit deg min Acc amp dec time constant of CS axis Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms 309 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Oy 8 1 Initial speed of linear acceleration deceleration in rigid tapping Setting range 0 5000 Unit mm min 0 8 2 Linear acc amp dec time constant in rigid tapping
292. locks are needed and canned cycles can shorten the program to save memory 3 15 1 1 Canned cycle list Operation at M e etacion Application bottom of a hole dd G73 T Intermittent feed Rapid feed High speed peck drilling cycle Dwell spindle CCW Left hand tapping cycle C Rapid fesd Rapid Teed Rapid Teed 57 SWINJOA E 3 o e 9 El 3 5 To SWIN OA U o e 9 3 3 e CGS CNC GSE Intermittent feed GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Full circle helical rough milling Rapid feed Round groove internal rough milling CCW Intermittent feed Full circle helical rough milling Rapid feed Round groove internal rough milling CW Feed Full circle fine milling Rapid feed Full circle internal fine milling CCW Feed Full circle fine milling Rapid feed Full circle internal fine milling CW Feed Full circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling CCW Feed Full circle fine milling Rapid feed External round fine milling CW Intermittent feed Rectangle rough milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal rough milling CCW Intermittent feed Rectangle rough milling Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal rough milling CW Rectangle groove internal fine milling CCW Rectangle fine milling Rapid feed Rectangle groove internal fin
293. m alarm 615 is issued 5 3 2 Macro Statement The operations listed in Arithmetic and Logic Operation table can be executed in program The expressions right to the operator contain constants and or variables that consisting of functions and operators The variables j and k in the expression can be assigned as constants The left variable the first variable can be assigned by expression The macro statement is more intuitive convienent and flexible It can perform compound operation and multinesting Sometimes a macro statement is equal to several tranditional G65H macro programs General format Please refer the statement format in the Arithmetic and Logic Operation table for editing macro statement 135 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual e Macro program editing l IBRLALT lt In program editing mode or MID mode by pressing key macro o editing state can be switched or inserted sae 3 Differences of A Processing of letter Input of special Automatic space e two states O signs a When editing spaces are Press O to switch aise 2 Special signs cannot Q Insert state automatically added to copy delete programs A g be input 3 identify the words 3 Macro editing space are not Input as a letter O Special signs can be a state automatically added input e Explanations 1 Angular unit The angular units of function SIN COS ASIN ACOS TAN and
294. machine a hole in a single block b Feed hold The feed hold is disabled between the movement 3 5 in commands G74 and G84 but the indicator of feed hold will light up But the control stops till the operation 6 If the feed hold is performed again in operation 6 then it is stopped immediately c Override The feedrate override is considered for 100 percent in the operation G74 and G84 the override change is disabled 9 When the bit 1 of parameter 3 D_R is set to 1 the D value in tool compensation page indicates diameter value 3 15 5 Examples for modal data specified in canned cycle Data Specification Explanation G00 X_M3 G00 positioning at the rapid traverse and rotating the spindle G81 X Y Z R Because it is the beginning for the canned cycle so the value needs to be specified for Z R and F The corresponding hole machining data is same to the previous hole only the position Y is different so G81Z R F can be omitted As for the hole position is shifted for Y hole machining is performed further by using the G81 The hole position needs to be moved along the X axis as for the pervious one The Z R and F of previous hole and the P specified by this hole are taken as hole machining data by the G82 The hole machining is not executed all of the hole machining data G80X Y M5 are cancelled except for the F The GO positioning is performed with XY The Z and R are needed to be specified newly
295. me time F command value is vector resultant speed of instantaneous rates in X Y and Z axes directions the actual feedrate is the product of override and F command value F command value is invariable after it is performed till the new one is executed The following G command with F command word uses the same function WnjoA v e e O 9 3 3 The value range is indicated as follows e A E 1 15000 0 001 500 Command path figure The linear interpolation is performed from point O to point A G01Xa YB ZyF O is start point A is end point L ya p y The feedrate specified by F is the tool movement speed along the line The speed of each axis is as follows Speed in X axis direction F po Speed in Y axis direction F Ext Speed in Z axis direction F Lx f Note The F initial default value is set by data parameter No 172 when the power is turned on 35 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 3 4 Arc and Helical Interpolation G02 G03 Format Circular interpolation Arc in the XY plane G02 RO G17 X Y Fo G03 IJ Arc in the XZ plane G02 RO G18 X Zo Fo G03 IK Arc in the YZ plane G02 R G19 Y Z F G03 J K Helical interpolation Arc interpolation in XY plane Z axis linear interpolation linkage G02 3 G17 X YZ Fo G03 IJ Arc interpolation in XZ plane Y axis linear interpolation linkage WnjoA v 2 o ae g 3 gt
296. meter data till the rectangle groove with programmed dimension is made out Explanation For command explanation of canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 G134 Rectangle groove rough milling in CCW G135 Rectangle groove rough milling in CW l The width of rectangle groove along the X axis direction J The width of rectangle groove along the Y axis direction K The cut width increment inside XY plane it is less than the tool radius but more than 0 W For the first cutting along the Z axis direction the distance is downward to the R reference surface it is more than O if the first cutting is over the position of the bottom of the groove then the bottom of the groove is taken as the machining position Q The cutting incremental value each time along Z axis V Distance to the end machining surface which is more than 0 when the rapid traverse 76 Chapter 3 G Command is executed U Corner arc radius if it is omitted that is no corner arc transition is not shown D Sequence number of tool radius its value range is indicated as 0 32 thereunto the 0 is default of DO The current tool radius value is taken out according to the specified sequence number SWIN OA Cycle process 1 Positioning to the XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 2 Down to the point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 W distance depth is cut downwards by cutting feedrate 4 Mill a rectangle face helically by K increment each time from cen
297. middle of an expression enclosed in brackets on the right hand side of an arithmetic expression is regarded as a division operator it is not regarded as the specified for an optional block skip code o Reset A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and subprograms and cursor returns to the first block of the main program 141 SWIN OA v e Q 9 3 3 2 O SWIN OA U A o e E 3 3 2 e 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 6 CUTTER COMPENSATION 6 1 Application for Cutter Radius Compensation 6 1 1 Brief Generally the parts machining process is programmed according to parts drawing in one point on a tool As for the tool used actually because of the processing or other requirement the tool is not an ideal point but an arc only The position offset exists between actual cutting point and ideal point when the cutting feed is performed It may cause over cut or undercut so the part accuracy will be affected So the cutter radius compensation can be used to improve the part accuracy in machining The path of part figure can be shifted by a cutter radius which this method is called B type tool compensation this is a simply method but the movement path of next block can be processed only after a block is performed so the phenomenon as over cutting will be generated at the intersection point of two blocks In order to settle t
298. mmand explanation of the canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 Cycle process 1 Positioning to XY plane at the rapid traverse rate 69 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Command Path G98 Mode for returning to initial G99 Mode for returning to point R lt o point level plane 3 p 134 3 Initial point level i d cg H 1 g i 3 NE 3 i M E M Point R Point R 4 9 Dwell ZPoint Z Dwell a eee Z Related Explanation 1 G89 Boring cycle is basically same as the G85 a dwell is applied at the bottom of a hole Dwell time is specified by P if it is not specified the dwell is not applied the command operation is same to the G85 2 The command Q is disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 11 Groove rough milling inside the round G110 G111 Format G110 G98 G99 X Y R Z I1 W QK VDF G111 Function From the beginning of the center point arc interpolations are performed helically till the round groove of programming dimension has been machined Explanation For command explanation of the canned cycle see the table 13 1 7 G110 Groove rough milling inside the round in CCW G111 Groove rough milling inside the round in CW I lis radius inside the round groove it should be more than the radius of current tool W The firstly cutting depth is from the R reference level to the undersurface along the Z axis direction
299. mmom terminal is COMCOV The connection of GSK PB2 power box to GSK980MDa CN1 interface has been done for its delivery from factory and 5 the user only need to connect it to a 220V AC power in using E The interface definition of GSK980MDa CN1 is shown below 5 st eL sey c 220 E S GND ca a 4 GSK PB2 D om GND Se 12V 24V Sg GND e BV POWER SUPPLY CN1 Fig 2 30 286 2 8 Chapter 2 Definition amp Connection of Interface Signals I O Interface Definition CN61 44 core 3 line male socket NO Address NO Address NO Address NO Address 1 X0 0 12 X1 3 DECZ 23 GND 34 X2 5 DEC5 2 X0 1 13 X1 4 24 GND 35 X2 6 3 X0 2 14 X1 5 25 36 X2 7 4 X0 3 DECX 15 X1 6 26 37 X3 0 5 X0 4 16 X1 7 27 38 X3 1 6 X0 5 ESP 17 28 39 X3 2 7 X0 6 18 29 X2 0 40 X3 3 8 X0 7 19 30 X2 1 41 X3 4 9 X1 0 20 31 X22 42 X3 5 SKIP 10 X1 1 21 GND 32 X2 3 DECY 43 X3 6 11 X1 2 22 GND 33 X2 4 DEC4 44 X3 7 CN62 44 core 3 line female socket NO Address NO Address NO Address NO Address 1 Y0 0 12 Y1 3 23 24V 34 Y2 5 2 YO 1 13 Y1 4 24 24V 35 Y2 6 3 Y0 2 14 Y1 5 25 24V 36 Y2 7 4 Y0 3 15 Y1 6 26 GND 37 Y3 0 5 Y0 4 16 Y1 7 27 GND 38 Y3 1 6 Y0 5 17 GND 28 GND 39 Y3 2 7 Y0 6 18 GND 29 Y2 0 40 Y3 3 8 Y0 7 19 GND 30 Y2 1 41 Y3 4 9 Y1 0 20 24V 31 Y2 2 42 Y3 5 10 Y1 1 21 2
300. n is ignored in canned cycle e Axis switching The Z axis tapping can only be performed in rigid mode e S code If the command speed is more than the maximum speed the alarm may occur e M29 Specify an axis movement code between M29 and G84 G74 causes alarm e P Q If they are specified in non drilling block If they are specified in a block that does not perform drilling they are not stored as modal data When Q0 is specified the peck rigid tapping cycle is not performed Specify them in tapping block they are stored as modal data when the tapping command is retracted either Q modal did it e Cancellation Do not specify a group 01 G code and G84 G74 in the same block e ACs contour control is used with rigid tapping at the same time CS axis selects a speed mode or position mode which is determined by CON G27 7 but the system is rigid tapping mode regardless of the value of CON After the rigid tapping is cancelled the rotation axis is either CS axis or common one which is determined by state parameter The C axis can not be moved in manual mode when the rigid tapping is not cancelled 3 21 5 Specify a Rigid Tapping Mode Specify M29 before G74 G84 G84 shows a sample for the following time sequence 102 Chapter 3 G Command M29 RTAP F76 3 3j3 all MES GBATA AT lic eo STR ELA HH RGTAP G61 0 Ar FIN G4 3 EHR SITE
301. n the password an sign added each time inputting a character 5 DATA INPUT 3 Press key to finish the inputting and it will enter the corresponding password level Note The length of this GSK980MD system password corresponds to the operation level which can t be added or decreased by user at will Operation Initial level Password length 3rd 5 bits Example The current CNC level is the 4 level as the following page shows The 3 level password of CNC is 12345 please alter the current level to the 3 level AUTH OPERATION 00000 NOO0000 CURRENT LEVEL 4 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL gt INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Can edit prog input macro var amp offset MDI 50000 TOO Hae 252 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore DATA INPUT Move the cursor to the INPUT PASSWORD line key in 12345 then press the key the CNC prompts Modify parameter and edit program Password passed and the current level is the 3 level The page is as follows AUTH OPERATION 00000 NO00000 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL gt INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step Resume PAR 3 Servo Modify parameter and edit program MDI IMAGE STORED 50000 TOO Hae Note When current operation authority
302. n to X50 Y50 feedrate is 300mm min modal command G1 valid X100 Linear interpolation to X100 Y50 feedrate is 300mm min the Y coordinate is not input use current value Y50 keep F300 the modal command G01 can be omitted GO X0 YO Move to XO YO at the rapid traverse rate modal G command GO valid gt M30 Example 2 O0002 GO X50 Y5 Move to X50 Y5 at the rapid traverse rate G04 X4 Time delay for 4 seconds G04 X5 Time delay again for 5 seconds non modal command G04 should be 29 C GSK CNC GSE GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual input again M30 Example 3 the first operation after the power is turned on 00003 G90 G94 G01 X100 Y100 F500 G91 G95 G01 X10 F0 01 G90 G00 X80 Y50 M30 SWIN OA G94 feed per minute gt feedrate is 500mm min G95 feed per revolution input the F value again v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e 3 1 3 Related definition The words or characters which are not specially described in this manual are as follows Start point the position before performing the current block End point the position after performing of the current block X the end point absolute coordinate of X axis for G90 the incremental value of X axis against current point for G91 Y the absolute coordinate of Y axis at the end for G90 the incremental value of Y axis against current point for G91 Z the absolute coordinate of Z axis at the end for G90 the incremental valu
303. nconditional Branch GO TO statement ssssssssssssseeee 138 5 4 2 Conditional Branch IF statement ssssssssssssssseeeeeee n 138 5 4 3 Conditional EXpresSiONis seie iad ae addaa bea Tanada nennen nnne nnn 139 5 4 4 Repetition WHILE Statement sss eene 140 5 5 Macro Statement and NC statement c ccccsccsssccesssecsstecereesenecsssevecsecesenseseuecsenecenseversneesaneecenssees 141 5 5 1 Macro Programming and Registering sssssseeee Hee 141 5 5 Z Limitation iac oec cd 141 CHAPTER 6 CUTTER COMPENSATION scscsscscssssscsscesscssssssscsecssssscsscecsecssssscecsecsssssseccecsessssessess 142 6 1 Application for Cutter Radius COMpensati0N ooccccconocicnccnnccnonconcnnnononncnnonanoncnnnonncnnnnnnonncn nono 142 NBI 142 6 1 2 Compensation value setting sssssssssssseeeene eene 142 6 1 3 Commiand format nid Ai i aa ade a 143 6 1 4 Compensation directiON oooooocococococcnincocooccnnnnoconncnnnnnnnononnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnaneninnns 143 0 15 GautlOnzcs ii eoe c Mese eh D ead b er tete ooo va tetestus 144 6 1 6 Example for application oooooooococociccninconoocccnncoconncnnonononononnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonennnnns 144 6 2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius Compensation eese 145 6 2 1 Conception for inner side or outer side sssssssss
304. ncrement for block No auto insertion Setting range 1 100 3 2 8 Precision compensation PCOMP 1 Screw pitch error compensation valid 0 Screw pitch error compensation invalid D R 1 Tool offset D value is diameter input 0 Tool offset D value is radius input CPFO CPF7 Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency The set frequency 2 xCPF7 2 xCPF6 2 xCPF5 2 xCPF4 2 xCPF3 2 xCPF2 2 xCPF1 CPFO Kpps 320 Chapter 3 Parameter o BDEC 1 Backlash compensation type B the compensation data are output by ascending or decending type and the set frequency is invalid 0 Backlash compensation type A the compensation data are output by the set frequency set by bit parameter No 010 or 1 8 of it BD8 1 Backlash compensation is done by the 1 8 of the set frequency 0 Backlash compensation is done by the set frequency CALH 71 Length offset not cancel in reference point return 0 Length offset cancel in reference point return X axis backlash offset Y axis backlash offset 4 axis backlash offset 1 5 axis backlash offset Setting range 0 2000 Cunit 0 001mm 1000 999999 unit 0 001mm gt E E 8 9 115 T 6 BE T 8 119 Screw pitch error compensation number of the 4 axis machine zero 1 i 2 Screw pitch error compensation number of the 5 axis machine zero Setting range 0255 3 2 9 Communication setting Serial communication baudrate
305. ncy Stop button may be pressed to terminate the CANCEL MDI words execution If oven key is pressed the background color of program segment will becomes black then words can be input again Note The subprogram call command M98 P etc is invalid in MDI mode 211 lt o lt 3 D i9 jo D o le 2 lt 2 c 3 F le Le O E o 5 GskK C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5 3 Parameter Setting In MDI mode the parameter value can be modified after entering the parameter interface See details in Chapter 9 of this part 5 4 Data Modification In the PRG STATE page before the inputted words will be executed if there is an error in CANCEL VM inputted words press to cancel highligt state then program segment can be a ial modified It may press key to clear all the words then input the correct words for example Z1000 will be inputted to replace Z100 in Section 5 1 of this chapter the steps are as follow pm 1 press key the page is as follows PRG STATE OAHAA N OBOAES GHG GIT G90 Ghd oo Mode of 2 cycle 291 G4 049 Q94 298 y aaga li Pel00 S 600 N30 MM A PRG F 180 ACT E A INPUT PRG SEGMENT FED OVRI 150 GHB X56 Y56 Z166 FAP OVRI 1885 SPI OVRI 1889 PART CNT 2 CUT TIME 28 88 82 MOT Seabee Tel Hae 2 press key the page is as follows 212 Chapter 5 MDI Operation
306. nd Z machine coordinate of the 2 reference point 0 001mm 4 machine coordinate of the 2 ng reference point 0 001mm h machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point 0 001mm e Signal connection The interior wiring circuit of deceleration signal is shown in Fig 2 37 M eunjoA 5 7 sp D et 5 Machine CNC DECn cC Fig 2 37 achine zero return type B by regarding servo motor one rotation signal as zero signal its sketch map is shown in follows 293 IM euinjoA gt m rr A D et o E C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Direction of returning to machine zero a Travel switch Tongue fixed on the machine carriage 24V For nDEC signal 2 The circuit of deceleration signal for three axes XDEC q System side YDEC Control unit Fig 2 40 3 Action time sequence of machine zero return When ZMn n is X Y Z 4 5 axis of the bit parameter No 006 ZCn n X Y Z 4th 5th of bit parameter No 007 and the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 are all set to 0 the deceleration signal low level is valid The action time sequence of machine zero return is shown in follows Machine zero retum path gt DEC signa P nDEC Neglected nPC signal High speed machine zero return Velocity y gt kv Deceleration ee over Start deceleration w Machine zero Low speed machine zero retum T
307. nd then enter program content display page CHANGE 2 Press pues key search is displayed at the left bottom of the screen the displayed figure is as follows 224 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00005 CNC DODOS 00005 590 GOO XO YO Z I cir r A first hole angle B angle inc H hole number 565 P9020 X100 Y50 R30 Z 50 F1800 I100 445 B30 Hb N36 W RIND A EDIT s0009 TOO Hee 3 Input annotation behind search input max 50 characters except for brackets If BOLT PROC is inputted bolt holes machining the page displayed is as follows PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00005 CNC DODOS 00005 590 GOO XO YO Z I cir r A first hole angle B angle inc H hole number 565 P9020 X100 Y50 R30 Z 50 F1800 I100 445 B30 Hb N36 W S lt 3 D i9 o D D Et O 3 FIND BOLT PROC M eed EDIT 50000 TOO Hae DATA m PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00005 CNC Do805 BOLT PROC 590 GOO XO YO Z I cir r A first hole angle B angle inc H hole number 565 P9020 X100 Y50 R30 Z 50 F1800 I100 445 B30 Hb N36 W 4 Press key program annotation setting up is finished the displayed page is as follows EDIT 5000A TOO Hae 225 lt o c 3 D F O x D m o E C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE 6 2 2 Block annotation Take contents in brackets Cand as
308. ne if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is renamed Chapter 10 Advance Operation gt Ladder diagram PLC restore and backup The ladder diagram backup Copy all ladder diagrams Idx file of the current system to U gsk980MDa_backup user of USB memory unit If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Restore the ladder diagram Copy parameter files from USB memory unit U gsk980MDa_backup user back to the CNC system to restore the ladder diagram Restore operation cannot be done if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is renamed Note Repower the CNC system after the ladder diagram restore is successful 10 3 Attentions gt Notice Ifa file or list on target path has the same name as the one will be copied it will be overwritten and replaced by the system automatically Therefore to prevent the file or list from overwriting or replacing please copy and save it separately gt It forbids doing any other operation in advance operation Once operation is performed it can S lt 3 D E i9 jo D o Er le 2 not be interrupted until it is finished gt If the file to be saved or restored is large operation time will be long Please wait gt Pull out USB if abnormal conditions occur then connect it again 261 lt e c D F O x 1 9 m
309. ne zero return Data parameter Ne094 N2098 high speed of X Y Z 4th 5th axes in machine zero return RRTA of bit parameter Ne027 and RRT5 of N2029 set the machine zero return type of the 4th and the 5th axis separately Machine zero return can be done after the validity of overtravel limit swithch is confirmed Machine zero return types A B C can be selected for basic axes X Y Z Machine zero return types A B C D can be selected for additional axes 4th 5th The machine zero is usually fixed at the max travel point and the effective stoke of the zero return touch block should be more than 25mm to ensure a sufficient deceleration distance for accurate zero return The more rapid the machine zero return is the longer the zero return touch block should be Or the moving carriage will rush through the block which may influence the zero return precision because of the insufficient deceleration distance Usually there are 2 types of machine zero return connection 1 The connection to AC servo motor schematic diagram of using a travel switch and a servo motor one rotation signal separately Machine zero return direction j Travel switcn 25mm Sn j Tongu fixed oo 24N the machine slider C signe signal eT LUC ECC OLG LOC LOLOLCE OX A Fig 4 2 332 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods By this connection type when the deceleration switch is released in machine zero return the one rotation signal of encoder should be
310. neous increment of the X axis the fx is instantaneous speed of X axis euinjoA The dy is instantaneous increment of Y axis the fy is instantaneous speed of Y axis The dz is instantaneous increment of Z axis the fz is instantaneous speed of Z axis The d4 is instantaneous increment of 4th axis the f4 is instantaneous speed of 4th axis The d5 is instantaneous increment of 5th axis the f5 is instantaneous speed of 5th axis y e Q 9 3 3 2 e Circular interpolation helical interpolation Performing the arc interpolation in selected plane the third axis performs linear interpolation so the F value is circular interpolation speed An interpolation of linear and circular arc has the following relation when the linear interpolation speed is f linear axis length f AAPP circular arc length z Feedrate along the circle between 2 arc interpolation axes is the specified one There are 16 levels feedrate override 0 150 10 per level are offered by NC The actual feedrate series the memory performed or not when the power is turned off and the method of overriding are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder The function description of GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram is as follows for reference only real time modification for the cutting feedrate The actual cutting feedrate can be adjusted in the range of command speed 0 150 here the feed
311. new program name MACRO 3 Press key Note No matter whether the program is altered or not program annotation is changed into new program name automatically after program is renamed 6 7 Copy of the Program To save the current program to a location 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode Q 2 Press address key and key in the new program No 229 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHANGE 3 Press key 6 8 Program positioning e To the position where the program stops last time by TO Search for the point where the program execution stops by TO Select edit mode to enter program content page and press conversion key input TO to search which is displayed at the left bottom Then press up or down key searching and positioning are displayed at this time the cursor will move to the position where program stops last time Position to specified block by TO num num is the block number specified by user For example TO10000 means position to the 10000 block On program content page locate to specified block by inputing TO block number Press conversion key after entering program content page input TO to search which is displayed at the left bottom and then press up or down key the cursor will move to the specified lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E program 6 9 Program preview PROGRAM In non edit mode press L key to enter program preview page In this page prog
312. ng number for linear serial punch use 9999 999 9999 999 Decimal together with the canned cycle punch Absolute value for part negative omitted Decimal Tool life management tool life value 0 999999 part omitted M miscellaneous function 0 99 Decimal alarm M code subprogram call 9000 9999 Decimal alarm Program number 0 2 Decimal alarm Tool life tool life unit Decimal 0 or other number 0 time non 0 time alarm Program number 0 9999 Delay time in G04 ms 9999999 9999999 Decimal Ignore negative alarm Decimal What kind of number reference return in G30 2 4 part omitted Skip sequence or alarm number in G65 0 9999 Decimal alarm M98 subprogram call times program name 099999999 Decimal alarm Sequence number of M99 subprogram return 0 9999 Decimal alarm 9999 999 9999 999 Specifying G73 and G83 cut in value per time Absolute value for Round off negative 999999999 Decimal The value of operation in G65 999999999 alarm Radius value of arc 9999 999 9999 999 Round off R plane value of canned cycle command 9999 999 9999 999 Round off 999999999 Decimal The value of operation in G65 999999999 alarm Analog spindle 0 9999 Decimal alarm Shift spindle 0 99 Decimal alarm 32 Chapter 3 G Command Number of tool 0 324 parameter set Decimal T value alarm Tool compensation number 0 32 Decimal alarm c 9999 999 9999 999 3 Corner radius value of arc co
313. ng the tool setting and set the tool radius D in OFFSET page Table 4 2 lt NO Geometric H Wearing H Geometric D Wearing D 2 01 2 07 pu m 2 000 0 000 Uy 08 S e 32 3 J a Programs NO G92 XO YO ZO Tool are positioned at start position X0 YO and ZO when the absolute coordinate system is specified N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250 0 Y550 0 Start up cutter the tool is shifted to the tool path by the distance specified in DO7 geometric radius of DO7 is set to 2 0mm tool wearing O then the tool radius is 2mm N2 G01 Y900 0 F150 Specifies machining from P1 to P2 N3 X450 0 Specifies machining from P2 to P3 N4 G03 X500 0 Y1150 0 R650 0 Specifies machining from P3 to P4 N5 G02 X900 0 R 250 0 Specifies machining from P4 to P5 N6 G03 X950 0 Y900 0 R650 0 Specifies machining from P5 to P6 N7 G01 X1150 0 Specifies machining from P6 to P7 N8 Y 550 0 Specifies machining from P7 to P8 N9 X700 0 Y650 0 Specifies machining from P8 to P9 N10 X250 0 Y550 0 Specifies machining from P9 to P1 N11 G00 G40 XO YO Cancels the offset mode the tool is returned to the start position XO YO 6 2 Offset Path Explanation for Cutter Radius Compensation 6 2 1 Conception for inner side or outer side Inner side and outer side will be employed in the following explanations When an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified by move commands for two blocks is over or equal to 180 it is refer
314. ngle groove inner finish milling CCW G138 Rectangle outer finish milling CW G139 Rectangle outer finish milling CCW G17 initial G command XY plane selection G18 ZX plane selection Modal G G19 02 YZ plane selection command G90 initial G command Absolute programming Modal G G91 03 Relative programming command G94 initial G command Feed per minute Modal G G95 05 Feed per revolution command G20 Data inch input Modal power 06 down memorize G21 Data metric input G40 initial G command Tool nose radius compensation cancellation G41 Tool nose radius compensation left Modal G G42 OF Tool nose radius compensation right command G43 Tool length offset in direction G44 Tool length offset in direction Modal G G49 initial G command 08 Tool length offset cancellation command G140 Rectangle path serially punch CW G141 Rectangle path serially punch CCW G142 Arc path serially punch CW Non modal G G143 93 Arc path serially punch CCW command G98 initial G command Return to initial plane in canned cycle Modal G G99 10 Return to R plane in canned cycle command G67 initial G command Macro program call Modal G G66 12 Cancel macro program call command G54 initial G command Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 14 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Modal G 28 Chapter 3 G Command G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 fa
315. nit of C axis is switched into 40mm from the 40 0 degree The required time to the end is 20 40 300 The speed of C axis is 40 0 14907 0 14907 min 0268 3 degree min Note When there is no special explanation in the subsequent narration the axis names of additional linear axes are expressed with C The cycle function of rotation axis The coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is enabled which can be 108 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis avoided the coordinate value is overflowed from the rotation axis the coordinate value will be cycled based on the setting value of data parameter No 189 No 190 the movement amount of each axis for the rotation axis When the coordinate cycle function of the additional rotation axis setting is disabled the T coordinate value may change based on the linear axis the programming command is also same 2 to the one of the linear axis Two kinds of coordinates change are shown below 3 1 When the coordinate cycle is disabled Q C axis positive 9999 E gt c pea 9999 5 The above mentioned may occur 1 The machine coordinate value of rotation axis Type B 2 The absolute coordinate value in data parameter No 027 ROAx 0 absolute coordinate cycle function is disabled 3 The relative coordinate value in data parameter No 027 RRLx 0 relative coordinate cycle function is disabled 2 When the coordinate cyc
316. nnection to drive unit The connection of GSK 980MDa to GSK drive unit is shown in Fig 2 10 2T G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Er GSK980MDa CN11 DA98 A drive unit CN12 CN13 signal interface GSK980MDa CN11 DA98B DAOIB drive unit PIT CPn o 8g TPULS CN12 CN13 signal interface 9 CPn wv 6 PULS 1 Cn 30 PULS 2 DIRn 4 19 SIGN 9 CPn 15 PULS 10 DIRn 7 SIGN TB 5 ALMn am 15 ALM O 29 SIGN 3 PCn YM 5 CZCOM 10 DIRn 14 SIGN 211 S0 5 ALMn 5 AM Lt OV 3 DG 23 SON 20 COM l o 32 DG Metal shell 10 RSTP iom UTD HE Te 38 COM Metal 22 FSTP Metal shell Metal shell Metal shell GSK980MDa CN11 DOS dave unit GSK980MDa DF3 drive unit CN12 CN13 signal interface CN11 CN12 CN13 signal interface 1 Pn 1 CR 1 CPn A 1 CP 9 CPn NA 9 CP 9 CPn 2 CP 2 DIRn o 2 DIR 2 DIRn 3 DIR 10 DIRn 10 DIR 10 DIRn 4 DIR 11 0V 14 RDY2 11 OV 9 OUT COM 12 5V v 3 EN 121 5V 8 FREE lt 5 ALMn 6 RDY1 5 ALMn 7 ALM COM 2 14 OV NA 1l EN 14 OV 5 FREE 2 Metal shell Metal shell Metal shell x Metal shell Fig 2 10 Conn
317. nsmission ratio The 1 1 electronic gear ratio should be ensured to avoid the too large difference between the numerator and the denominator of this CNC gear ratio Example Match GSK980MDa with DA98B take X axis for example set command multiplier coefficient and command frequency division coefficient to 1 Calculation formula is shown below CNC CMR _ x360 Z CMD axL Z 1 The following conclusions can be reached 9x360 Zy a x deg pulse 7 Z g pulse Drive unit Parameters 12 13 of drive unit correspond to position command pulse frequency division 329 M euinjoA gt o p A D et 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual molecule and denominator Calculation formula of drive unit gear ratio is shown as follows PxG 4xNxC P Correspondence between required pulse volume for motor rotates 3600 and CNC end P 360 0 G Electronic gear ratio of drive unit G position command pulse frequency division molecule position command pulse frequency division denominator N Set motor rev number to 1 C Wire number of feedback encoder DA98B is 2500p r The following conclusions can be reached NEO y NOS a _4xNxC 8x360 Zu _ P 360 360 L Z _10xZ ExZ Set molecule and denominator of caculated ratio to drive unit 12 13 separately 4 4 Acceleration amp deceleration Characteristic Adjustment Adjust the relative CNC parameters according to the factors such as the drive unit
318. nt the value range are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm Note When I J and K are for whole circle that they have signs according to the direction And they are positive values when I J and K share the same directions with X Y and Z axes otherwise they are negative ones Htem Specified content Command Meaming A di E S Rotating direction COW G90 mode Two axes of X Y and Z point the part Ene poni IA system G91 mode Two axes of X Y and Z Distance from start to end points X axis distance from start point to the center point with sign Y axis distance from start point to the Distance from start point J center point with sign to circle center point Z axis distance from start point to the center point with sign K wwe R reads Feedrate along the arc Clockwise and Counterclockwise are defined when XY plane ZX plane YZ plane is viewed in the positive to negative direction of the Z axis Y axis X axis in the Cartesian coordinate system see the following figure 37 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Y X lt o 603 o N 5 3 G02 O 7 Z v G18 o CW or CCW Q 9 3 The end point of an arc is specified by using the address X Y or Z and 3 is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91 The 2 f Q incremental value is the distance value from start to end points of an arc The arc center is specified by address l J and K against
319. ntents are described by list of gsk980mda backup gt Path explanations lt O Path file folder Explanation c 3 Target position for parameter and PLC file O backup and restore m usen E i o Target position for part program file backup prog E and restore a e 2 gt File specification File name Expended Remark name Parameter Paral Para2 par Case sensitive file Para3 Part program 00000 O9999 CNC Case sensitive PLC file plc plc7 ldx Case sensitive gt Operation authority Parameter Authority level 3 including level 3 Backup Part program Authority level 3 including operation level 3 Ladder diagram Authority level 3 including level 3 Parameter Authority level 3 including level 3 Restore Part program Authority level 3 including operation level 3 Ladder diagram Authority level 2 including level 2 259 lt o c 3 D F O Ke gt 9 a o E GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Note Level 2 or above authority is needed for part program operation above number 9000 10 2 Operation instructions 260 gt Key descriptions EI gt me Cursor moving Press direction keys to move the cursor DATA INPUT Menu selection Press key to select the operation item which cursor is in CANCEL Menu cancellation Press key to cancel
320. nual operations Note The following operations are also valid in Machine zero MPG Step mode S lt 3 D E O jo D o le 2 3 2 1 Spindle CCW CW stop control 5 In Manual mode the spindle rotates conterclockwise if pressing this key 230 8 STOP In Manual mode the spindle stops if pressing this key D9 COW n Manual mode the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key 3 2 2 Spindle Jog O Press and hold 9 key the spindle rotates conterclockwise release it the spindle stops 3 2 3 Cooling control H COOUNG In Manual mode press this key the coolant is switched on off 3 2 4 Lubrication control See details in Appendix for its function 205 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK 3 2 5 Spindle override adjustment In Manual mode if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output the spindle speed may be adjusted o D 8 OVERRIDE By pressing the or key in Spindle Override keys the spindle speed can be changed by real time adjusting of the spindle override that has 8 levels of 50 120 lt o c 3 O F jo Le O E o 5 206 Chapter 4 Mpg Step Operation CHAPTER 4 MPG STEP OPERATION In MPG Step mode the machine moves by a specified increment Note The keys functions of this 980MDa machine panel are defined by Ladder please refer to the respective m
321. number plus 1 when M30 or M99 in the main program is executed CUT TIME Time counting starts if Auto run starts time units are hour minute and second The parts counting and the cut time are memorized at power down and the clearing ways for them are as follows CANCEL NI PART CNT clearing press key then press key CANCEL T CUT TIME clearing press key then press key S0000 Feedback spindle speed of spindle encoder and spindle encoder must be fixed to display actual spindle speed T01 Current tool No and tool offset No 173 C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK 2 RELATIVE POS display page The X Y Z axis coordinates displayed are the current position relative to the relative reference point and they are held on at CNC power on They can be cleared at any time If X Y Z axis relative coordinates are cleared the current position will be the relative reference point When CNC parameter No 005 Bit1 1 as the absolute coordinates are set by G92 code X Y Z axis relative coordinates are identical with the set absolute coordinates RELATIVE POS 00000 NO00000 00000 NOOO00O00 cs us cs cs X 0 000 5 r im Y 0 000 Z 0 000 PART CNT 0 CUT TIME 0 00 00 ACT F FED OVRI 150 MDI 50000 TOO Hae RAP OVRI 100 SPI OVRI 166 lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E The clearing steps of X Y Z axis relative coordinates i
322. nvalid 0 Step mode valid MPG mode invalid The dirtction Of rotation for handwheel can be adjusted by parameter HNG5 1 5th handwheel ccw cw 0 5th handwheel ccw cw 335 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual HNG4 1 4th handwheel cew cw 0 4th handwheel ccw cw HNGZ 1 Z handwheel ccw cw 0 Zhandwheel cew cw HNGY 1 Y handwheel ccw cw 0 Y handwheel ccw cw HNGX 1 X handwheel cew cw 0 X handwheel ccw cw 4 9 Other Adjustment MST 1 External Cycle Start ST signal invalid 0 External Cycle Start ST signal valid MSP 1 External Dwell SP signal invalid 0 External Stop SP signal valid MOT 1 Not check software limit 0 Check software limit MESP 1 External ESP signal invalid 0 External ESP signal valid M euinjoA ESOR ESCD 1 E S code off in emergency stop gt o p A D et O 5 0 S code not off in emergency stop 336 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message CHAPTERS DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE 5 1 CNC Diagnosis This diagnosis section is used to check the CNC interface signals and internal running state and it can not be modified 5 1 1 Signal diagnosis from machine to CNC CUORE E EEE PLC fixed X0 5 X2 5 X24 X1 3 x23 X0 3 address XDEC YDEC ZDEC DEC4 DEC5 Deceleration signal of X Y Z 4th 5th axes machine zero ESP Emergency signal DIT ESAS T r TT INS IS IS O IS
323. o return 353 Data check error occurs in data retention area Standard value is restored Operate after zero return 354 Alteration of parameter is valid after re power on 355 System upgrade and renew is finished re power on to validate it 356 Current ladder diagram is changed please re power on 357 CNC files are in use confirm the machining programs 359 Alteration of serial communication parameter is valid after re power on 360 The least increment system is changed please re power on and check the range and setting of corresponding parameters 361 The least increment for additional axes should not be less than the least increment of the system IS B IS C 362 The velocity parameter is out of permitted range Modify it 363 The exceeded velocity parameter is modified Operate the machine tool after confirmation 401 The intermediate point is not specified in G29 402 The highest rotation speed is not defined please check the parameter No 101 No 104 403 Feedrate is too high 404 Feeding stop because spindle stop 405 Spindle rotation speed is too slow for thread cutting 406 Spindle rotation direction is not same with specified direction 407 Spindle speed fluctuation exceeds the range set by NO 108 408 Spindle mode switching is prohibited when Cs axis is moving 409 Reference point is not set return to 2nd or 3rd or 4th reference point is disabled 410 CS axis movement disabled as spindle is not in position c
324. o arguments and P Sample program gt G65 call bolt hole circle Chapter 5 Macro Program SWINJOA a fo e Q o 3 3 5 e Create a macro program for machining holes on a circle The radius is start angle is A holes interval is B holes number is H the center of the circle is X Y Commands can be specified in either the absolute or incremental mode To drill in the clockwise direction specify a negative value for B Format G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr li Aa Bb Hh X X coordinate of center point absolute or incremental 24 Y Y coordinate of center point absolute or incremental 25 Z Hole depth 26 R F A Coordinates of an rapid approaching point 18 Cutting feedrate 9 Circle radius 4 Drilling start angle 1 B H Incremental angle clockwise when negative value is specified 2 Number of holes 11 Macro call O0002 G90 G00 X0 YO Z100 G65 P9100 X100 Y50 R30 Z 50 F500 1100 A45 B30 H5 M30 Macro program the called program 09100 HO HAO0S ci t oat Stores G codes of 03 group IF 3 EQ 90 GOTO 1 Branches to N1 in the G90 mode 24 5001 24 Calculates the X coordinate of the center point 25 5002 25 Calculates the Y coordinate of the center point N1 WHILE 11 GT 0 DO 1 Until the number of remaining holes reaches 0 HO H 24 4 COS 1 ues Calculates the hole position on X axis
325. og voltage Speed control mode Position control mode Spindle servo controller Spindle motor Set Cs contour control axis In the 980MDa system only the additional axis the 4 or the 5 axis can be set to a Cs contour control axis But two Cs axes can not be set at the same time Before the Cs axis setting is valid this axis must be set to a rotation axis Otherwise Cs axis setting is invalid Resa T ROSA ROTA RCSA 1 The CS axis function of the 4 axis is enabled 0 The CS axis function of the 4 axis is disabled ROSA ROT4 Set the type of the 4 axis Linear Type A Type B Invalid axis rotation rotation axis axis 1 1 ROS ATAR ROSS ROS RCS5 1 The CS axis function of the 5 axis is enabled 112 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis 0 The CS axis function of the 5 axis is disabled ROS5 ROT5 Set the type of the 5 axis Linear Type A Type B Invalid axis rotation rotation axis axis ROT5 o 1 1 J 0 ROs5 o o 1 1 The switch between spindle speed control and CS contour control The NC switching of spindle control mode is performed by the CON signal of PLC In the CS contour control mode of NC the CS contour control axis as the common servo axis can be performed manually or automatically e From spindle speed control shifts to the Cs contour control Set the CON G027 7 to 1 then the spindle can be set in the Cs contour control mode
326. ogram pause Spindle CCW Spindle CW Function interlock state hold Spindle stop Cooling on Function X interlock Cooling off state hold Lubricating on Function interlock state hold Lubricating off Note The command with specified by standard PLC is valid when the power is on 2 1 8 Program stop M00 Format MOO Command function the program is stopped after executing the MOO command the pause is displayed the program will continue when the key of Cycle Start is pressed 2 1 9 Spindle CCW CW stop control M03 M04 and M05 Format M03 M04 M05 Command function MO3 spindle forward rotation CCW M04 spindle reverse rotation CW MO5 spindle stop Chapter 2 MSTF Codes Note The control time sequence and logic of M03 M04 and MO5 are specified by standard PLC program refer to the Appendix of this manual lt 2 1 10 Cooling control M08 M09 2 Format M08 3 MO9 Command function M08 cooling on MO9 cooling off Note The control time sequence and logic of M08 and M09 are specified by standard PLC program refer to the Appendix of this manual U A e Q 9 3 3 2 e 2 1 11 Lubricating control M32 M33 Format M32 M33 Command function M32 lubricating on M33 lubricating off Note The control time sequence and logic of M32 and M33 are specified by standard PLC program refer to the Appendix of this manual 2 2 Spindle Function
327. oles j Reserved button hole 46 Reserved MPG installation hole 4 X E it i om po gt A IC E a il i i 7 M Th M 4 A i Appendix 2 Dimensions for Additional Panel AP02 AP02 Aluminum alloy 100mmx260mm it can be mounted to the side of the panel its figure and dimensions are as follows 5 Reserved MPG installation hole Reserved button hole P ES f AN y E X SES K i A I I Y EQS Reserved button hole p T gt e i e I I 3 L xs Ju y Z o A 351 gt a y e Z a GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System Appendix 3 GSKComm Introduction leading in from winapp Appendix 4 Alarm Information No CONTENTS 000 Emergency stop ESP open circuit 001 The called program does not exist or is failed to open 002 G code is illegal 003 Total characters of single command is out of range 2 12 characters are allowed 004 Specified pitch F value exceeds permitted range 006 The specified block number format is wrong not at the beginning or repeated or the number exceeds permitted range 008 Addresses l J K for the center of a arc in arc command is specified to axes that beyond the selected plane 009 G command of group 00 or 01 is not input and a movement value is speci
328. ompensation value can be read and written Variable No Function 5201 5205 The first to the fifth axes external workpiece zero point offset value 5221 5225 The first to the fifth axes G54 workpiece zero point offset value 524 1 5245 The first to the fifth axes G55 workpiece zero point offset value 526 1 5265 The first to the fifth axes G56 workpiece zero point offset value 528 1 5285 The first to the fifth axes G57 workpiece zero point offset value 5301 5305 The first to the fifth axes G58 workpiece zero point offset value 532 1 5325 The first to the fifth axes G59 workpiece zero point offset value 5 3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation e Macro programs in both traditional G65 H format and statement format are compatible with GSK980MDa Users can alternatively select one of them for programming This makes programming more convenient and flexible Please strictly observe the formats and specifications in the following Arithmetic and Logic Operation table Arithmetic and Logic Operation Function Statement format Traditional G65H format Remark Definition assignment i Hj G65 H1 P i Q j Sum i j Hk G65 H2 P i Q j R k Logic operation is Subtraction Hi j k G65 H3 P i Qj R k performed on binary 130 Chapter 5 Macro Program Multiplication i j k G65 H4 P i Q j R k numbers bit by bit Division i j Hk G65 H5 P i Q j R
329. on 32 groups tool wear compensation cutter compensation C length compensation tool M command M commands redefinition unallowed M02 M29 M30 M98 M99 M9000 M9999 Other M commands are defined or disposed by PLC program Special M commands defined by standard PLC program MOO M03 M04 M05 MOS Mog M10 M11 M32 M33 T command tool number T01 T32 32 numbers at most manual tool change or auto tool change selected by the parameters auto tool change sequence set by PLC program Tool life management 32 groups 8 kinds groups of tool life management data Spindle speed control Speed switching value control S oo command is defined or disposed by PLC program the standard PLC programs S1 S2 S3 and S4 directly output The output of 81 52 S3 and S4 are closed by SO Speed analog voltage control the spindle speed per minute commanded by S codes output 0 10V voltage to spindle converter spindle stepless speed changing supports 4 spindle mechanical gears 9 kinds of basic commands 23 kinds of function commands 2 level PLC program involving up to 5000 steps 2us processing time for each step 8ms refresh cycle for the first level program Ladder diagram edit software and PLC function EN communication software downloadable Integrated machine panel 44 points input key 44 points output LED Basic l O 41 points input 36 points
330. on isset by bit parameter No 183 feed key the corresponding axis will move to the machine zero at a traverse speed Then it touches the tongue and presses down the deceleration switch and moves forward When the tongue detaches the deceleration switch the axis slows down to zero speed then moves reversely and accelerates to a fixed low speed for continuous moving B As the tongue touches the deceleration switch for the second time it begins to detect the zero signal It moves on till the tongue detaches the deceleration switch the movement stops immediately Then zero return indicator of the corresponding axis on the panel lights up and machine zero return operation is finished 298 Chapter 3 Parameter CHAPTER 3 PARAMETER In this chapter the CNC bit and data parameters are introduced Various functions can be set by these parameters 3 1 Parameter Description by sequence 3 1 1 Bit parameter The expression of bit parameter is shown in follows Parameter BIT7 BIT6 BITS BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO NO FEIE ACS 1 Analog voltage control of spindle speed 0 Switching control of spindle speed HWL 1 MPG mode 0 Step mode LIFJ 1 Tool life management group skip valid 0 Tool life management group skip invalid MDITL 1 Tool life management valid in MDI mode 0 Tool life management invalid in MDI mode LIFC 1 Tool life counting type 2 by times 0 Tool life counting type 1 by times NRC 1
331. on origin compensation original point Each axis may be set in any position from O to 255 which is set by data parameter Ne125 Ne129 depending on the mechanical requirement 343 GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Screw pitch error offset No of X machine zero Screw pitch error offset No of Y machine zero Screw pitch error offset No of Z machine zero Screw pitch error offset No of 4th machine zero Screw pitch error offset No of 5th machine zero Setting range 1000 999999 Cunit 0 001mm 6 3 4 Compensation value The axes screw pitch offset values are set in the page of screw pitch parameter Refer to the lt a following table The offset value is input by diameter with the unit 0 001mm which is irrelevant to the 2 programming by diameter or by radius Take X Y Z axes as example gt Offset No X Y Z o 000 x m Dd 001 5 2 3 o 002 3 4 1 gt 255 6 4 Cautions for Offset Setting The setting and modification of screw pitch offset can only be done atthe authority of password level 2 and switch on parameter switch Offset is not allowed if the offset interval entered is O O After the parameter of screw pitch offset is set only the machine zero is returned could the compensation be done 6 5 Examples of Offset Parameters Setting D parameter N2125 screw pitch error origin point 0 Data parameter N2120 screw pitch offset interval 0
332. on signal DIR is high level as 4 axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as 4 axis moves negatively DIRZ 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as Z axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as Z axis moves negatively DIRY 71 Direction signal DIR is high level as Y axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as Y axis moves negatively DIRX 1 Direction signal DIR is high level as X axis moves positively 0 Direction signal DIR is low level as X axis moves negatively 7 ALM5 1 5 axis low level alarm signal ALM5 0 5 axis high level alarm signal ALM5 ALMA 1 4 axis low level alarm signal ALM4 0 4 axis high level alarm signal ALMA ALMZ 1 Z axis low level alarm signal ALMZ 0 Z axis high level alarm signal ALMZ ALMY 1 Y axis low level alarm signal ALMY 0 Y axis high level alarm signal ALMY ALMX 1 X axis low level alarm signal ALMX 0 X axis high level alarm signal ALMX THE CPFO CPF7 Setting values of backlash compensation pulse frequency Set frequency 2 xCPF7 2 xCPF6 2 xCPF5 2 xCPF4 2 xCPF3 2 xCPF2 2 xCPF1 CPFO Kpps a BDEC 1 Backlash compensation type B the compensation data are output by ascending type and the set frequency is invalid 0 Backlash compensation type A the compensation data are output by the set frequency by bit parameter No 010 or 1 8 of it BD8 1 Backlash compensation
333. ong the outer side of a corner at an actuate angle a lt 90 1 Linear to Linear 2 Linear to circular 5 L Toolnosecenter path Tool nose center path Fig 6 6a Linear to linear start up from outer side Fig 6 6b Linear to circular start up from outer side d Tool movement along the outside linear to linear at an acute angle less than 1 degree a3 1 Fig 6 7 Linear to linear the corner is less than 1 degree start up from outer side 6 2 3 Tool movement in offset mode The mode after setting the cutter radius compensation and before canceling the cutter radius compensation is called offset mode Offset path of invariable compensation direction in compensation mode 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to circular 147 SWIN OA v A e e 2 o 3 3 5 e 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual a Programmed path S Tool center nose path eL Programmed path Tool center nose path p Fig 6 8a Linear to linear inside movement Fig 6 8b Linear to circular inside movement 3 Circular to linear 4 Circular to circular a Programmed path C Ci C Programmed path Tool nose center path Fig 6 8c Circular to linear inside movement Fig 6 8d Circular to circular inside movement 5 Inner side machining less than 1 degree and compensation vector amplification S Tool nose center path n Et i i
334. ontrol mode 411 Exceeds the X axis side software stroke limit 412 Exceeds the Y axis side software stroke limit 413 Exceeds the Z axis side software stroke limit 414 Exceeds the 4th axis side software stroke limit 415 Exceeds the 5th axis side software stroke limit 416 Exceeds the X axis side software stroke limit 417 Exceeds the Y axis side software stroke limit 418 Exceeds the Z axis side software stroke limit 419 Exceeds the 4th axis side software stroke limit 420 Exceeds the 5th axis side software stroke limit 356 Appendix 421 Overtravel along X axis positive direction 422 Overtravel along Y axis positive direction 423 Overtravel along Z axis positive direction 424 Overtravel along 4th axis positive direction 425 Overtravel along 5th axis positive direction 426 Overtravel along X axis negative direction 427 Overtravel along Y axis negative direction 428 Overtravel along Z axis negative direction 429 Overtravel along 4th axis negative direction 430 Overtravel along 5th axis negative direction 431 X axis driver is not ready 432 Y axis driver is not ready 433 Z axis driver is not ready 434 4th axis driver is not ready 435 5th axis driver is not ready Appendix 5 Function Configuration of Standard Ladder Diagram 5 1 Information for Ladder Diagram 5 1 1 Introduction Rang of use Configura
335. ooconiccooccoccccccconnononccnnnnocnnnannnnnnnnnnen ns 14 1 4 2 Additonal Axes in IS A Increment System ooocococccoconooocccccccconcnnnnncnnnncononcnnnnncnnnnoninnns 14 CHAPTER 2 MSTE CODES eterne th decenessdecsedaceteucshisissadesecevedaseuseetbacuevesseccensssceveaees 15 2 1 M Codes Miscellaneous FUNC ION cooooocnonncnonncoonnnconcncnnnncnnnnonon conan nnnon on eene enne entente a aa 15 2 1 1 End of Program MOZ oocccnnccnnccnncennconnnennnennnonnnnnncnnnonnnonnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennneneninoss 15 2 1 2 Rigid Tapping Designation M29 ssssseseseem HR emen 15 2 1 3 End of r n M30 iet be e e t uti reb eu it eite ebbe Cota 16 2 1 4 Subprogram Call MIS A Prado a A dna ere eres 16 2 1 5 Return from Subprogram M99 sssssssssssssseeeeneemeeneeeen nennen 16 2 1 6 Macro program call M9000 M9999 ssssssssseeeeenm eee 18 2 1 7 M command defined by standard PLC ladder diagram sssssssssse 18 2 1 8 Program stop MOO sssssssesee e meme nnnnnnnnnn nnn nnn nnsn nnne nnne nene neis 18 2 1 9 Spindle CCW CW stop control MO3 M04 and MO5 ssssssssee 18 2 1 10 Cooling control M08 M09 eren nennen 19 2 1 11 Lubricating control M32 M33 sssssssssssseeeeeenemenemenen nennen enne 19 2 2 Spindle Euncti n aceti eder TE 19 2 2 1 Spindle Speed Switch Value Control ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeee 19 2
336. oor cycle func is valid power on 0 the 4th abs coor cycle func is invalid power on jos en pes SA A ESA RCS5 1 Cs function of the 5 axis is valid power on 0 Cs function of the 5 axis is invalid power on ROS5 ROT5 Set the type of 5th Linear Rotary Rotary 8 invaia ros o 1 M SUNIOA AREA a ee E MESA SS ae BREE BARS Seer gt o p A D et O 5 RRT5 1 Zero mode D of the 5th axis power on 0 Zero mode A B C of the 5th axis power on RRL5 1 the 5th rel coor cycle func is valid power on 0 the 5th rel coor cycle func is invalid power on RAB5 1 the 5th rotation according to symbol direction 0 the 5th rotation according to nearby direction ROA5 1 the 5th abs coor cycle func is valid power on 0 the 5th abs coor cycle func is invalid power on RRT4 1 Zero mode D is used on the 5th rotary axis power on 0 Zero mode A B C are used on the 5th rotary axis power on RRL4 1 the 5th rel coor cycle func is valid power on 0 the 5th rel coor cycle func is invalid power on RABA 1 5th rotates according to symbol direction 0 bth rotates according to nearby rotation ROAA 1 the 5th abs coor cycle func is valid power on 326 Chapter 3 Parameter 0 the 5th abs coor cycle func is invalid power on Setting range 05000 Unit deg min Initial speed of acc amp dec in using CS funciton Setting range 10 10000 Unit ms
337. op signal DECX Deceleration signal of X axis SE AO ESA lt E EL BEs sew wv E PES A A A EE SKIP Skip signal DECY DEC5 Deceleration signal of Y Z 4th 5th axis Corresponding machine panel keys to X fixed address refer to the following figure 340 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message THERE ME Volume III Installation 4e 96001 uu 05 Vu Hig Vu 03 uu TAS OLX LT OLX 1T IX AT TE OL aaa KO Lgs ISN SEE dee ze Jl up P Ease oa 341 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5 2 2 Y address fixed addresses Corresponding machine panel and state indicator to Y fixed address refer to the above figure 5 3 PLC Data The PLC data includes T C DT DC D their significance is defined by user requirement M wnjoA 3 m 4 A D et O 5 342 Chapter 6 Screw Pitch Compensation CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING SCREW PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION 6 1 Function Explanation There are more or less precision errors in the screw pitch of machine
338. or If the locked its lamp lights machine is up and X Z axis output is invalid If the miscellaneous function is locked its lamp lights up and M S T function output is invalid If dry run is valid the Dry run lamp lights up for Dry run blocks program MDI command MPG mode MDI Machine zero mode MPG mode MANUAL mode Auto mode mode mode Step Auto mode DNC MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI Edit Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode mode mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Key Name Function explanation Function mode Auto mode DNC MDI mode Machine zero mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode MDI mode DNC Edit mode Qo Machine zero mode MPG Auto mode key To enter Auto mode AUTO mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit E mode Machine zero mode MDI mode key To enter MDI mode HDI MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit e Machine zero To enter Machine zero mode Machine zero mode MACHINE ZERO Edit mode key To enter Edit mode mode key mode MPG mode Step mode MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit To enter Step or MPG f Step MPG mode Machine zero mode mode one mode is mode key MPG mode Step mode selected by parameter MANUAL mode Auto mode DNC Edit mode Machine zero mode a c 3 O
339. or to the parameter No to be set E f Method 1 Press or key to enter the page containing the tL Le Or key to move the cursor to the parameter to be set press No of the parameter to be set DATA HB INPUT Method 2 Press address key A key in parameter No then press key 4 Key in the new parameter value DATA 5 Press se key the parameter value is entered and displayed 6 For security the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF after all parameters setting is finished Example Set the BIT5 DECI of the bit parameter No 004 to 1 and the other bits unchanged Move the cursor to No 004 key in 01100000 by sequence in the prompt line the figure is as follows 246 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore BIT PARAMETER 00000 NOOO00 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 901 00000000 009 06011111 017 00101000 002 X 00000010 010 06011111 018 00000000 003 00000000 011 90000000 019 10000000 004 00100000 012 00010011 020 00000000 905 00010001 013 10000011 021 00000000 006 A 00000000 014 600011111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000090 023 00000000 008 X 00011111 016 X 00000000 024 00000000 ee RDRN DECI eee PROD eek xe SCH bit5 1 0 DEC signal is low high level NO 004 61100000 MDI 50000 TOO HOO DATA INPUT Press key to finish the parameter alteration The page is as follows BIT PARAMETER 00000 NOO000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 901 00
340. orking mode CON G027 7 FSCSL F044 1 e NC spindle control mode switch NC spindle control mode switch 114 Chapter 4 Control Function of Additional Axis Relative parameter The start speed of acceleration deceleration of CS axis solution range 0 5000 Unit deg min 7 8 The acceleration deceleration time constant of CS axis Resolution range 10 4000 Unit ms e The explanation of two points same Radius compensation mode is pre read two blocks Caculate the transit point and perform a path movement taking 3 position points the start of the 1 block the intersection of the 1 and the on blocks the end of the 3 block In this case two same points may occur in the following items a The first two points are same when starting b The last two points are same when starting c The first two points are same during the compensation d The last two points are same during the compensation e The first two points are same during the retraction f The last two points are same during the retraction The two same points is regarded the point as a linear of which approximates to zero when the two same points occurs the transit point calculation can be performed based on the straight line point to straight line point straight line point to circular arc point circular arc point to straight line point and circular arc point to circular arc point po Me 115
341. ormed but the direction keys should be pressed and held on AA SS E pem ISOT 1 Manual rapid traverse valid prior to machine zero return 0 Manual rapid traverse invalid prior to machine zero return ZRSZ ZRSX ZRSY ZRS4 ZRS5 1 To select machine zero return type B C which have machine zero it needs to detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return 0 To select machine zero return type A which has no machine zero it does not detect deceleration and zero signals in machine zero return O IO LA WZRZ WZRY WZRX MZRX MZRZ MZRY MZR4 MZR5 1 The direction of zero return is negative for X Z Y A 5 axes 0 The direction of zero return is positive for X Z Y 4 5 axes High speed of machine zero return of X axis High speed of machine zero return of Y axis High speed of machine zero return of Z axis e Date parameter High speed of machine zero return of 4 axis High speed of machine zero return of 5 axis 292 Chapter 2 Definition Connection of Interface Signals X machine coordinate of the 4st reference point 0 001mm Y machine coordinate of the 4st reference point 0 001mm Z machine coordinate of 4st reference point 0 001mm 4 machine coordinate of the 4st reference point 0 001mm 5 machine coordinate of the 4st reference point 0 001mm X machine coordinate of the 2 ng reference point 0 001mm Y machine coordinate of the 2nd reference point 0 001mm
342. ormed from current plane position to end point specified by X and Y are indicated if the L word is specified in canned cycle so the current position block start and end will not be drilled the end point position is regarded as the last hole holes are equal spaced as follows i Start point Y L value setting System execution result Value is negative Ineffective the value should be positive The value is unspecified or Normal drilling cycle 1 time equals to 1 The value is 0 No change of axes the system reserves relevant cycle modal data When L gt 1 using round number The value is decimal When L 1 it is processed as L 0 not moving but reserving its modal data and relevant cycle parameter values Note 1 the maximum input value of command L is 9999 999 9999 999 Decimals is ignored and absolute value is used instead of negative value L code is effective only in current block Note 2 In continuous drilling the return planes are R point plan After the last hole is processed the return plane is specified by G98 G99 Note 3 When there is no axis position command in the specified L block it means drilling cycle is performed L times in the original place Note 4 Canned cycle command G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 has no continuous drilling function Note 5 When LO is specified no drilling will be performed 83 SWIN OA U e e 9 3
343. ositioning initial plane returned NO11 GOO X0 YO M5 Reference point return the spindle stops N012 G49 Z250 0 Tool length compensation cancellation N013 G43 Z0 H15 Initial plane tool length compensation N014 S20 M3 Spindle starts N015 G99 G82 X550 0 Y 450 0 Z 130 0 R 97 0 P30 F70 7 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N016 G98 Y 650 0 8 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned N017 G99 X1050 0 9 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N018 G98 Y 450 0 10 hole is machined after positioning initial plane returned N019 GOO X0 YO M5 Reference point return the spindle stops N020 G49 Z250 0 Tool length compensation cancellation N021 G43 ZO H31 Tool length compensation at initial plane N022 S10 M3 Spindle starts N023 G85 G99 X800 0 Y 350 0 Z 153 0 R47 0 F50 11 hole is machined after positioning point R plane returned N024 G91 Y 200 0 Y 200 0 12 and 13 are machined after positioning point R plane returned N025 GOO G90 X0 YO M5 N026 G49 ZO Reference point return the spindle stops Tool length compensation cancellation NO27 M30 Program stops Chapter 3 G Command 3 16 Absolute and Incremental Commands G90 and G91 Format lt G90 Absolute command o G91 Incremental command E o Function
344. oup 3 G90 G91 4005 Group 5 G94 G95 4006 Group 6 G20 G21 4007 Group 7 G40 G41 G42 4008 Group 8 G43 G44 G49 4010 Group 10 G98 G99 4014 Group 14 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 4107 D code 4109 F code 4111 H code 4113 M code 4114 Block sequence number 4115 Program name 4119 S code 4120 T code Position information can be read SWIN OA v 3 fo e Q o 3 3 5 e Read Variable No Function during movement Workpiece coordinate system block end 5001 5005 f P d Enabled point tool compensation value not included Machi inat t t 45021 45025 ac lie coordinate sys m curren peared position tool compensation value 129 CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K included Workpi i 45041 45045 i piece cornet Syetem current Disabled position tool compensation value included Workoi A NUT 45061 45065 orkpiece coordinate system skip signal Enabled position tool compensation value included SWIN OA 5081 5085 Tool length compensation value Disabled Note 1 The first digit from 1 to 5 represents an axis number Note 2 The tool length compensation value currently used for execution rather than the immediately preceding tool compensation value is held in variables 5081 5085 v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e e Workpiece coordinate system compensation value Workpiece coordinate system c
345. ous block When a groove less than the tool diameter is machined When the tool center moves opposite to the direction of programmed path the over cutting will be generated by the cutter radius compensation Tool stops and alarm appears after moving at the beginning of previous block or at the corner When a step less than the tool radius is machined When a program contains a step which is an arc and less than tool radius tool center path may form a opposite movement direction to the programmed path So the first vector is ignored and it moves to the end of the second vector along a straight line The program will be stopped for Single block mode the cycle continues if it is not single block mode The compensation will be executed correctly and no alarm will be generated if the step is a straight line But the uncut part is reserved When the sub program is contained in G code CNC should be in compensation cancellation mode before calling the sub program namely before the G98 is performed Offset can be applied after entering the sub program but the compensation cancellation should be applied before returning to the main program before M99 or the alarm occurs When compensation value is changed a Usually the compensation value is changed when the tool change is performed in compensation cancellation mode If the compensation value is changed in compensation mode the 157 euin oA UD 2 O Ke o 3 3
346. output Display Displayer 480x234 lattice 7 wide screen multi color LCD interface Display modes Chinese English Russian Spanish display selected by parameters machining path displayable Program edit Capacity 40MB for up to 40000 part programs custom macro program call 4 nesting levels of subprogram Edit modes full screen editing absolute incremental programming CNC system upgrade Part programs reading in USB USB Bidirectional files transfer between CNC and USB including programs parameters PLC backup and recovery Clock display Clock date and week display bidirectional transfer between CNC and PC CNC and CNC involving Serial programs parameters tool compensation data download and upgrade of Communication system software and PLC program serial ports euinjoA U A e e 9 3 3 2 e SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 2 O CGS CNC GSE GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Matching drive AC servo or step drive device by using the pulse direction signal input DA98 unit or DY3 series G Code Table Code Function Code Function Code Function Positioni Workoi nat G00 o apg G54 i di G92 Coordinate system setting traverse system 1 Workpiece coordinate G01 G55 F G94 Feed per min Linear interpo
347. ove the NC performance on their own Macro programs can be either provided by machine tool builder or defined by users 116 Chapter 5 Macro Program 5 1 Macro Call Macro call G65 G66 differs from subprogram call M98 as described below 1 With G65 or G66 an argument data passed to a macro can be specified M98 does not have this capability 2 When an M98 block contains another NC command for example G01 X100 0 M98 P the macro program P is called after the command G01 is executed On the other hand G65 unconditionally calls a macro P 3 When an M98 block contains another NC command for example GO1 X100 0 M98 P the machine stops in the single block mode On the other hand G65 does not stop the machine 4 With G65 or G66 the level of local variables changes With M98 the level of local variables does not change Non modal call G65 When G65 is specified the macro program specified at address P is called Argument data can be passed to the custom macro program Format G65P L argument Explanation P number of the program to be called L repetition count 1 by default 1 to 9999 can be specified Argument Data passed to the macro Its value is assigned to the corresponding local variables Program Data argument Custom macro Data argument assigned to local variables 1 and 2 O0001 G90 GO X50 Y 50 G01 G42 X21 Y E300 G02 X 1 Y 1 R 2 G65 P901Q A50 B20 L3 3 1
348. pecified the system immediately cancels the compensation value Note 1 In the block that tool length compensation is specified G02 G03 G04 G92 and G31 cannot be specified at the same time otherwise an alarm will occur 2 Tool length compensation command can be specified in the block in which canned cycle is specified But after the canned cycle is executed the tool length compensation is disabled and is not modal Example Normal Modal Explanation H1 10 0mm H2 20 0mm G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G44 G01 X50 Y50 Z50 G43 H1 direction H2 G44 H2 Linear interpolation setting H2 tool length G90 GOO X100 Y100 G44 H2 compensation in negative direction Z100 Position to X100 Y100 Z100 Z80 with H2 compensation offset 53 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE In the same block with G02 G03 G04 G31 G92 G43 H1 G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G49 G02 X50 R25 H2 direction lt G43 H1 o Alarm occurs E In the same block with canned cycle code gt G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G44 G81 X50 R5 Z 70 G43H1 direction o H2 G44 H2 Setting H2 tool length compensation in the negative Q G90 G00 X100 Y100 G44 H2 direction Starts the canned cycle from H2 5 Z100 3 t Specified in the canned cycle G43 H1 Setting H1 tool length compensation in the positive G90 G81 X50 R5 Z 70 di
349. pensation table and from the negative coordinate system to compensate the position No 060 Therefore the screw pitch compensation can be done when moving in the positive or the negative coordinate system of machine zero 58 59 60 6l 127 Setting CE C QE ug D 0D G6 0 4 Machine f i A coordinate system 2 I 60 000 20 000 10 000 0 10 000 670 000 Reference point The position No 060 in the screw pitch error compensation parameters corresponds to the reference point 60 compensation point 61 to a point positive10 000 moving from origin So there is a compensation point every 10 000 distance The 127th offset point is the compensation at position 670 000 While thecompensation point 59 corresponds to a point negative 10 000 moving from reference point Also there is a compensation point every 10 000 The offset point O is the compensation value at 600 000 position Therefore at compensation point N set a compensation valuewhen moving from N 61 x compensation interval to N 60 x compensation interval Above is the example of following compensation interval errors Offset interval Offset value 0 10 000 4 10 000 0 6 20 000 10 000 7 30 000 20 000 7 Machine Offset Offset Drive unit current Drive unit current coordinat parameter value command pulses command pulses after e system No before offsetting offsetting 30 000 058 7 30000 29992 20
350. performed Note 2 Canned cycle G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 has no continuous drilling function Note 3 The maximum drilling number C is 9999 the negative value is processed as absolute value the decimals are rounded Note 4 When C is not specified or equals to 0 it reaches the end point directly and no drilling will be performed 3 15 4 Cautions for canned cycle 1 The spindle should be rotated The M code should be correctly specified or the alarm will be generated the G74 by M04 G84 by M03 by using the miscellaneous function M code before the canned cycle is executed 2 Specifying any command of the X Y Z and R data the hole machining can be performed in the canned cycle of G73 G89 If neither data is contained in the block the hole machining is not performed G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 and G139 are still needed to specify the corresponding address I J and K or the alarm occurs But the hole machining is not performed when the G04 X is specified in the circumstance of X because the X indicates for time when the G04 is specified GOO X GOO rapid positioning G81X Y Z RFL Hole machining performs Without hole machining E F value is refreshed without the hole machining M Performing the miscellaneous function only 3 When the canned cycle G74 or G84 is employed in spindle rotation consolation if the hole 86 Chapt
351. pid traverse ms Acceleration amp deceleration time constant of Y axis rapid traverse ms 4 s RENE Setting range 10 4000 unit ms Rapid traverse speed when rapid override is FO Setting range 6 4000 unit mm min Axes top feedrate of cutting Setting range 10 15000 Cunit mm min Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in cutting feed Setting range 0 8000 Cunit mm min Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of cutting Setting range 10 4000 unit ms 017 Setting ran Start speed in manual feed M eunjoA ge 0 8000 Cunit mm min Exponential acceleration amp deceleration time constant of manual feed Setting range 10 4000 unit ms 3 2 3 Machine protection ESPA MO MESA AAA MST 1 3 External cycle start signal ST invalid 0 External cycle start signal ST valid MSP 1 External stop signal SP invalid 0 External stop signal SP valid with external stop switch connected otherwise CNC shows stop MOT 1 Not detect software stroke limit 0 Detect software stroke limit MESP 1 Emergency stop invalid 0 Emergency stop valid ESGP ESCD 1 S code off at emergency stop 0 S code not off at emergency stop 317 5 o sp D et G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual SOT 1 Software limit valid after zero return at power on 0 Software limit valid af
352. pid traverse rate 2 Down to point R plane at the rapid traverse rate 3 Cutting feed to the bottom of a hole 4 Perform the circle interpolation by the path of transit arc 1 v o e 9 3 3 2 Q 5 Perform the circular and linear interpolation by the path of 2 3 4 5 6 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 7 and return to the start point 7 Returning to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path Related Explanation The commands Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P values are reserved as the canned cycle modal value 80 Chapter 3 G Command For example To perform a fine milling for the finished rough milling rectangle groove with the canned cycle G136 command see the following figure WnjoA E a o e 9 El 3 5 e G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G136 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 180 J50 K30 U10 F800 D1 Perform finish milling inside the rectangle groove at the bottom of a hole in the canned cycle D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 3 15 2 16 Finish milling cycle outside the rectangle G138 G139 Format G138 G98 G99 X Y R Z J D K U F G139 Function The tool performs fine milling outside the rectangle by the specified width and direction it is returned after finishing the fine milling Explanation G138 Finish milling
353. pindle override is limited by the top speed of current spindle shift and also it is controlled by the lowest spindle limitation value and the top spindle limitation value in constant linear speed control mode This NC offers 8 level spindle override 50965 12096 the change is 10 per level The actual level and the modificative mode of the spindle override are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manualissued by the machine tool builder when attempting to use it The following description is GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram function for reference only The spindle override defined by GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram has 8 levels The spindle actual real time speed can be adjusted by using the spindle override key in the command speed range of 50956 12096 the spindle override will be memorized when the power is turned off Refer to the OPERATION of this manual for modification operation of the spindle override v e te fb 3 3 2 te 2 3 Tool Function There is no tool function in this CNC system 2 4 Feeding Function 2 4 1 Cutting feed G94 G95 F command Format G94F_ F0001 F8000 leading zero can be omitted for feedrate per minute mm min Command function The cutting feedrate is specified by mm min G94 is modal G command If the current mode is G94 that it needs no G94 any more Format G95F F0 0001 F500 leading zero can be omitted Command function The cutting feedrate is offered by
354. plicate 2 program name Edit Program Level o n catioprogram mode content 2 3 4 CHANGE n CNC DATA Edit CN Tool offset OUTPUT Tool Level 2 3 On mode C offset se E Bit DATA Edit nd Bit parameter OUTPUT parameteLevel 2 3 On mode r Data Edit OUTPUT Data On parameter mode Level 2 3 parametr Ea Pitch i Pitch D paramete On mode Level 2 parameter r Send a part program name Edit Program Level B 5 n program mode content 2 3 4 DATA OUTPUT 196 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Operatio Passwor Program Item Function Operation key d Display diese iot Parameter n mode eve on o page switch P Send all part Le 999 Edit Program Level on programs mode 2 3 4 DATA content OUTPUT Edit Level Tool offset a On mode 19 Bit i Edit b GNGP Parame mode Level 2 3 i E CN E Data D C Edit Level 2 3 On 2 parameter T rec mode o o eive Pitch Edit nr 2 eve n o parameter mode o Edit Level E Part program E HI On mode 19 Edit Tool Level DATA lic ERE mode offset 2 3 4 a State DATA Level Bit parameter OUTPUT Edit parameta 34 On mode r i Data DATA Edit Bit parameter OUTPUT d parameteLevel 2 3 On mode r CNC Pitch compens PC itch m Edit P uplo OUTPUT ation Level 2 On parameter mode ad paramete r Send a O program name Edit Program Level n program mode content 2 3 4 DATA OUTPUT Send all 4 Level ol Be On programs 999 i 2 3 4
355. press key or key if necessary to enter PASSWORD SETTING page CHANGE Press and switch to the Data Backup page Move the cursor to the desired item DATA P a Press keys together Note Don t cut off the power in the backup and restore operation of the data and no other operation is suggested to be performed before the aforesaid operation is prompted to be finished Example to restore the CNC parameter to 1y level servo standard parameter the steps are as follows Turn on the parameter switch and enter the Backup PAR page of MDI mode move the cursor to Recover Default PAR 1p level as the following figure shows 256 Chapter 9 Data Setting Backup And Restore DATA BACKUP 000600 NOO000 CURRENT LEVEL 3 Backup PAR User Resume PAR User SET LOWER LEVEL INPUT PASSWORD UPDATE PASS Resume PAR 1 Test Resume PAR 2 Step gt Resume PAR 3 Servo SUCCEEDING IN RECOVERING SERVO PAR POWER ON MDI 59090 TOO HOO E d INPUT Press a keys together the CNC system prompts SERVO PAR BACKUP RECOVERED POWER ON lt 2 c 3 D O o D E Ss o E 257 lt e c 3 D F O x Co 9 m o E GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CHAPTER 10 ADVANCE OPERATION Advance operation interface of GSK980MDa which is as follows is started by connecting CNC
356. program 3 Pull out U disk when it is open system alarm occurs U disk is not connected pe At this time plug in U disk again press key to detect U disk in MDI mode or press PJ keys to clear the alarm c 3 D E O o D 9 o gt 267 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual lt 2 lt 3 O F oO Le O E o 5 268 VOLUME III INSTALLATION C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual M wnjoA 3 m p D et O 5 270 Chapter 1 Installation Layout CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT 1 1 GSK980MDa Connection 1 1 1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout CN13 CN12 CN11 CN14 CN21 Tut 5V dh Y sh x d EE MES 5V CN61 CN62 CN15 AXIS Z AXIS Y AXIS X AXIS 4 ENCODER SA Mti S858h xh CN51 CN1 INPUT OUTPUT AXIS 5 SPINDLE On mis COM PORT POWER SUPPLY M eunjoA Fig 1 1 GSK980MDa back cover interface layout 5 o p D et O 5 1 1 2 Interface explanation Power box GSK PB2 for 5V 24V 12V 12V GND power supply CN11 X axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting X axis drive unit CN12 Y axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting Y axis drive unit CN13 Z axis 15 core DB female socket for connecting Z axis drive unit CN14 4th axis 15 core DB female soket for connecting 4th axis drive unit CN21 coder 15 core DB female socket for connecting Encoderd CN51 inverter 9 core DB male socket for connecting pc R
357. program annotation which can be put at any position of a block and displayed with green characters The page is as follows PRG CONTENT SEG1 COL 1 C 00005 CNC Do005 BOLT PROCO 590 G00 XO YO Z I cir r A first hole angle B angle inc H hole number G65 P9020 X100 Y50 R30 Z 50 F1800 1100 A45 B30 Hb G04 X3 pause 3 sec N30 W EDIT 50000 Tee Hae Related explanations 1 Because symbols and are not provided in the system block annotation can not be inputted by edit mode in the system If block annotation is needed to added edit annotation on the PC and download it to the CNC by software 2 The system is not support Chinese characters If Chinese characters are edited on PC which will be displayed as blanks in the system after it is saved in the CNC Note 1 After a program is set up if the program name annotation is not added CNC defaults program name as program name annotation Note 2 Program annotation in the CNC must be English but the CNC supports Chinese annotation display except for Chinese decimal points The way of adding Chinese annotation is as follows Edit Chinese annotation in the PC machine and then download it to the CNC by communication software 6 2 3 Alter program annotation Operation steps are the same as program annotation setting steps on section 6 2 1 of this chapter 6 3 Deletion of the Program 6 3 1 Deletion a single program Steps 1 Select the
358. qual to conditional branch 134 Chapter 5 Macro Program G65 H81 QA R Pn Pn sequence number can be variable example G65 H81 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execut in order 26 Not equal to conditional branch G65 H82 QA RAJ Pn Pn sequence number can be variable example G65 H82 101 102 C1000 When 101 does not equal to 102 branch to N1000 block or execut in order SWIN OA v e Q 9 3 3 2 O 27 Greater than conditional branch G65 H83 QA RJ Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H83 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is greater than 102 branch to N1000 block when 101s 102 execut in order 28 Smaller than conditional branch G65 H84 Ql RAJ Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H84 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is smaller than 102 branch to N1000 block or execut in order 29 Greater than or equals to conditional branch G65 H85 Qi R Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H85 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is greater than or equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execut in order 30 Smaller than or equals to conditional branch G65 H86 Q l R Pn Pn sequence number variable example G65 H86 Q 101 R 102 P1000 When 101 is smaller than or equals to 102 branch to N1000 block or execut in order 31 P S alarm issued G65 H99 Pn Pn sequence number variable alarm No n 600 example G65 H99 P15 P S custo
359. r Steps 1 Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode the page is as follows 219 lt 2 c 3 O F O Le O E o 5 GskK C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual PRG CONTENT SEGS COL 1 C 00008 CNC Do008 CNC PROGRAM 640 G49 G30 GO G90 G54 XO YO Z E56 G1 X20 220 F1500 G2 1 20 K 20 YO EDIT 50000 TOO HOO 2 Input the character to be inserted to insert G98 code before G2 in the above figure G sg s x 5 L the page is as follows input PRG CONTENT SEGS COL 5 C 00008 CNC 0008 CNC PROGRAM 40 G49 G80 0 G90 G54 XO YO Z 50 Note 1 In the Insert mode if the cursor is not located at the line head a space will be automatically generated when inserting the command address if the cursor is located at the line head the space will not be generated and it should be inserted manually ALTER MACRO Note 2 In program content edit mode or MDI mode of program state page press PER y to enter insertion or macro edit state In macro editting mode special symbols can be input are P P gt lt P g T Above symbols are frequently used for macro edit 220 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management Difference between Input special Automatic space Process of character O two states symbols In program editting Program switch duplication Special symbols
360. ram names saved in CNC are displayed in the form of list Max 36 program names can be displayed In key to display programs in other one page if programs saved are over 36 press page PRG PREVIEW 00214 N00000 09600 00001 MAE 00005 00008 00020 00125 08214 00254 01212 01234 02036 MEM SIZE 40 NP WEN USED 222KB 02589 03654 PRG AMOT 14 PRG SIZE 117B D0003 00003 GO G90 XO YO Ze 61 X50 Y50 K100 YO K50 Y 50 EDIT 50000 TOO Hae Program capacity display On top right window storage capacity displays the max capacity of program which can be saved in CNC Used capacity displays the capacity of saved program in CNC system Program 230 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management number displays the program number saved in the CNC system Program size displays the size of the currently opened program Program preview selection On top left of the window the name of currently previewed program will be displayed in blue characters on white ground Program size on top left window is the size of currently previewed program The following window displays currently previewed progam display 5 line program Usage of cursor key and conversion key When select program in a program list select the program to be previewed by cursor moving key on MDI panel If the size is very big max 36 program names can be displayed in program list Select program
361. rammed path Tool center path DECIES o inen Fig 6 17b Linear to linear acute angle outside offset cancellation acute angle outside offset cancellation d Tool movement along the corner outside at an acute angle less than 1 degree linear to linear Ca 1 153 CGSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual SWIN OA Fig 6 18 Linear to linear the included angle less than 1 degree outside offset cancellation 6 2 5 Interference check U e e 9 3 3 O Tool over cutting is called interference The interference check function can check tool over cutting in advance This interference check is performed even if the over cutting does not occur However all interference can not be checked by this function 1 Conditions for the interference 1 The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths 2 In addition to the condition above the angle between the start point and end point of the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point of the programmed path in circular machining more than 180 degrees Example Linear machining Tool center path The directions of these two paths are different 180 Programmed path Fig 6 19a Machining interference 1 154 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation Tool center path Programmed path euin oA D 2 O te 9
362. rate is memorized when the power is turned off How to operate the cutting feedrate adjustment refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION of this manual 23 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 O GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Related parameter Data parameter No 070 the upper limit value X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis are same of the cutting feedrate Data parameter No 071 the initial terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration for cutting feed Data parameter No 072 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant of cutting feed Data parameter No 073 for initial or terminal speed of exponential acceleration or deceleration in manual feed Data parameter No 074 for exponential acceleration or deceleration time constant of manual feed 2 4 2 Manual feed Manual feed This GSK980MDa can perform positive negative movement of X Y Z 4th or 5th axis by the current manual feedrate in the Manual mode X axis Y axis Z axis 4th axis and 5th axis can be moved at one time This NC offers 16 levels 0 150 10 each time manual feedrate override see the following table 2 2 The actual feedrate series and modification mode or the like in manual feeding are defined by PLC ladder diagram Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder The function description of GSK980MDa standard PLC ladder diagram is as follows for reference only Table 2 2 Feedr
363. rc 1 5 Perform the full circle interpolation by the path of arc 2 and arc 3 6 Perform circular interpolation by the path of transit arc 4 and return to the start point 7 Return to the initial point level or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command path Related Explanation 1 The interpolation direction of between transit arc and fine milling arc are different when the fine milling outside circle is performed the interpolation direction in command explanation is 75 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual the interpolation direction of fine milling arc 2 The command Q P and L are disabled in this cycle but the Q and P value are reserved as canned cycle modal value For example A finished rough milling round groove is performed by fine milling with the canned cycle G114 command see the following figure Z n Y D n SWIN OA v o ae g 3 gt 2 te r Center G90 GOO X50 Y50 Z50 GOO rapid positioning G99 G114 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 150 J60 F800 D1 Start canned cycle the fine milling cycle is performed outside the circle at the bottom of a hole D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 3 15 2 14 Rectangle groove rough milling G134 G135 Format G134 G98 G99 X Y Z R J K WE Q V U D F G135 Function From the center of the rectangle the linear cutting cycle is applied by the specified para
364. re over 10 bytes searching will fail E g to search command G2 press ower key then input G2 and operate as step 4 PRG CONTENT D0008 CNC PROGRAM G40 G49 C80 GO G90 G54 X0 YO Z E50 G1 X20 Z20 F1500 G2 I 20 G3 I 20 G4 X5 1 X0 Y20 Z0 F1000 20 YO FIND G2 EDIT ITOR SEG8 COL 1 C 00008 CNC 50000 TOO HOO 218 Chapter 6 Program Edit And Management 4 me tt tt 10 by the location relation between the character to be searched and the character where the cursor locates it displays as follows PRG CONTENT ITOR SEGS COL 1 C 00008 CNC DOAS CNC PROGRAM 40 G49 C80 GO G90 G54 XO YO Z B50 G1 X20 220 F1500 G2 1 20 G3 1 20 G4 X5 1 X0 Y20 Z0 F1000 20 YO FIND G2 EDIT 50606 TOO HOQ 5 After the searching the CNC system is still in searching state press i or key wee key to exit the searching state 6 If the character is not found the prompt of Srch fail will be displayed S lt 3 D o jo D o O 2 again the next character can be searched Or press Note During the searching it doesn t search the characters in the called subprogram 3 Method to return to the program head newer 1 In the Program Display page of the Edit mode press 1 key the cursor returns to the program head 2 Search the program head character by the methods in Section 6 1 3 of this part 6 1 4 Insertion of the characte
365. re the cursor locates is over the total columns of the next line the cursor moves to the next block end at sign after the key is pressed 3 Press key the cursor shifts a column to the right if the cursor locates at the line end it moves to the head of the next block 1 Press key the cursor shifts a line upward if the number of the column where the key is pressed 217 CiGSR CNC 5K GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 4 Press key the cursor shifts a column to the left if the cursor locates at the line head it moves to the end of the next block 5 Press key to page upward the cursor moves to the 1 line and the 1 column of the previous page if it pages to the head of the program the cursor moves to the 2 line and 1 column E 6 Press the program 2 Searching lt e c 3 D F O x 9 m o E D EDIT 1 Press To search for key to page downward the cursor moves to the 1 line and 1 column of the next page if it pages to the end of the program the cursor moves to the last line and 1 column of the specified character upward or downward from the cursor current location The steps of searching are as follows key to enter Edit mode 2 Press ras key to enter the PRG CONTENT page ower 3 Press key to enter Search mode Max 50 bytes can be input but only 10 of them can be searched If the characters a
366. rection G49 H2 G43 H1 Compensation offset with H1 enters into canned cycle G49 GO X75 Y75 Z75 G43 H1 mode HO G43 H1 The tool length compensation G49 H2 in the canned cycle is ineffective and the previous block remains G49 HO modal Cancel all the axis compensations and set HO modal Position to X75 Y75 Z75 Z75 Command Example Tool length compensation 1 2 and 3 hole machining 20MM 30MM AMAS E ctual position lt Programmed position y 0 yp gt w Compensation value Ez4MM offset H01 4 0 N1 G91 G00 X120 0 Y80 0 D 54 Chapter 3 G Command N2 G43 Z 32 0 HO1 5 cese 2 N3 G01 Z 21 0 pnis mpl 3 N4 G04 P2000 acess mative saad 4 NEGOU ZZN d em aae i caine 5 E N6 X30 0 Y 50 0 sss 6 o NZ GOIZA RU E oo E NOD ZATO S reacia 8 3 N3 x60 0 4 3010 5 ratas an 9 E N10 G01 2 25 0 successes 0 3 N11 G04 P2000 sss aD 5 N12 G00 Z57 0 HOO 4 xit 2 N13 X 200 0 Y 80 0 sse 3 N14 M30 Z X or Y axis offsets a value at offset storage positively or negatively from the original end position according to the above command Offset axes can be specified with G17 G18 and G19 offset direction can be specified with G43 and G44 Offset No corresponding to the offset is specified by H code 3 14 Workpiece Coordinate system G54 G59 Format G54X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55X Y Z 5 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56
367. red to as inner side When the angle is between 0 and 180 it is referred to as outer side 145 GGS5K CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 5K THM s eee qe 7 a 180 MM FEAR RA Am TAN XD 0 lt a 180 7 6 2 2 Tool movement in start up There are 3 steps should be performed for cutter radius compensation establishment performing and cancellation The tool movement performed from offset cancellation mode to G41 or G42 command establishment is called tool compensation establishment also called start up Note For S Land C labeled in the following figures if not especially described they should be regarded as the following meaning S Single block stop point L Linear C Circular arc a Tool movement along an inner side of a corner a2180 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to circular a Programmed path Tool center path Programmed C path Tool center path Fig 6 4a Linear to linear start up from Fig 6 4b Linear to circular start up inner side from inner side 146 Chapter 6 Cutter Compensation b Tool movement along the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 180 2290 1 Linear to linear 2 Linear to linear euin oA U O Ke o 3 3 Fig 6 5a Linear to linear start up outside Tool center path Programmed path Fig 6 5b Linear to circular Start up outside c Tool movement al
368. rently when the signal is set to 1 This signal can be locked M29 PLC has been commanded the rigid tapping mode the PMC is Iz then treated with the correspinding logic and this signal can be replaced the lock of M29 even so the FIN singl of M29 is not ignored still 3 3 21 8 Alarm Message Q Alarm S No Display Content Explanation 3 a 218 Fail to specify the tool pitch F value in G74 or G84 Fail to specify F value 230 The spindle feed can not be performed due to the S value is 0 or S code does not specify S value is O 231 IS value exceeds the maximum spindle speed S value exceeds the setting value of data allowed with rigid tapping parameter 086 232 Other axis movement codes are specified Specify a axis movement between M29 and between M29 and G74 G84 G74 G84 233 G61 0 signal is abnormal in rigid tapping mode Rigid tapping signal G61 0 is not 1 during performing in G74 G84 234 Specify M29 repeatedly Specify M29 or it is consecutively specified more than twice in rigid tapping 3 21 9 Program Example G84 shows an example for the following program O1000 Rigid tapping example GO X0 YO ZO M29 S200 G84 X10 Y10 Z 10 R 5 P2000 F2 C20 X20 C40 G80 M30 105 SWIN OA v 3 o e o El 3 5 e C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FUNCTION of ADDITIONAL AXIS 4 1 General The additional axis is determined by the s
369. rformed in MDI or an alarm will occur 2 1 5 Return from Subprogram M99 Format M99 Poooo The block No 0000 9999 when return to main program is executed the leading zero can be omitted Function in subprogram as the other commands of current block are executed the block specified by P is performed continuously when the main program is returned The nex block is performed continuously by calling current subprogram of M98 command when returning to the main program because of the P is not given If the main program is ended by using the M99 namely the current program is not called by other programs for execution the current program will be run circularly So the M99 command is disabled in MDI Example Fig 2 1shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called the P command within M99 Fig 2 2 shows that the execution route of the subprogram is called the P command is not in M99 Chapter 2 MSTF Codes euinjoA y o Q E 3 3 2 e Fig 2 1 O 0001 O 1006 G92 X100 Z100 Call G90 GI X50 Z50 M3 Sl G91 X100 Z200 G0 X0 ZO X30 Z 15 F250 Gl X200 Z200 F200 M98 P21006 GO X100 Z100 Return M5 S0 M30 Subprogram Mainprogram Fig 2 2 This GSK980MDa can calls quadruple subprogram namely the other subprogram can be called from the subprogram See Fig 2 3 Mainprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram 01001 01002 01003 01004 01005
370. rner Absolute value for Round off U negative y Corner radius value of rectangle 9999 999 9999 999 e in G134 G139 Absolute value for Round off D negative E Distance to unmachined surface in rapid 9999 999 9999 999 zi V cut of rough miling command Absolute value for Round off e G110 G111 G134 and G135 negative First cutting in value in Z direction in 9999 999 9999 999 Ww rough milling command G110 G111 G134 Absolute value for Round off and G135 negative Delay time in G04 s 9999 999 9999 999 Absolute value for Round off a negative X axis coordinate value 9999 999 9999 999 Round off Y Y axis coordinate value 9999 999 9999 999 Round off Z Z axis coordinate value 9999 999 9999 999 Round off 3 2 Rapid Positioning G00 Format G00 X Y Z Function X Y and Z axes simultaneously move to end points from start at their rapid traverse rates See Fig 3 1 Two axes move at their respective speeds the short axis arrives at the end firstly the long axis moves the rest of distance independently and their resultant paths are possibly not linear Explanation G00 which is initial G command The value ranges of X Y and Z are indicated as 9999 999 9999 999mm X Y and Z axes one of them can be omitted or all of them can be omitted When one of them is omitted it means that the coordinate value of start and end points are same The start and end points share the same position when they are omitted at the same time
371. rrent X or Z Y axis machine coordinate 3 Graphic interface There are GRAPH SET GRAPH TRACK pages in this interface which can be viewed by keys 1 GRAPH SET page In this page the coordinate system scaling and scope for graphic display can be selected GRAPH SET 00003 N00000 COOR OPT 0 OXY 1YX 2ZX 3XYZ 4YZ 5ZY 6XZ TXZY SCALE 100 CENTER 0 000 X axis value CENTER 0 000 Y axis value CENTER 0 000 Z axis value X MAX 120 000 Y MAX 120 000 Z MAX 120 000 X MIN 120 000 Y MIN 120 000 Z MIN 120 000 MDI so000 TOO Hae 187 c 3 D F O D 9 a o gt lt o c 3 D F O x 9 m o E C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GskK 2 GRAPH TRACK page In this page it displays the path within the parameters range refer to absolute coordinate of GRAPH SET page GRAPH TRACK 00003 NOOO000 ABSOLUTE 62 827 X T 10 135 Z 513 54T JOG 50000 TOO Hae 1 3 6 BIT PARAMETER DATA PARAMETER PITCH COMP interface pn is a compound key it enters BIT PARAMETER DATA PARAMETER and PITCH COMP interfaces by pressing this key repeatedly 1 BIT PARAMETER interface Press pm key it enters BIT PARAMETER interface there are 48 bit parameters which are im displayed by 2 pages in this interface and they can be viewed or modified by pressing or key to enter the corresponding page It i
372. s 097 The called program is the current program main program 098 Macro call or M98 and M99 cannot be commanded in single block mode MDI 099 Macro can not be called or M98 and M99 can not be commanded during radius compensation 100 Skip GOTO DO END is disabled during radius compensation 101 The format of macro statement is wrong 102 The label of DO or END is not 1 2 or 3 in a macro statement 103 The format of DO or END is wrong in a macro statement or jump into a cycle 104 Bracket unclosed or format error occurs in a macro statement 105 The divisor should not be zero in a macro statement 106 The format of ATAN is wrong 107 The inverse logarithm of LN is wrong lt 0 108 The radicand value should not be negative 109 The result of TAN is a infinitude 110 The operand of ASIN or ACOS is out of range 1 or 71 111 The variable type is wrong or inexistent 112 The block number called by GOTO or M99 is overflow or not exist 113 M98 or M99 can not be executed when G66 is commanded 114 G65 or G66 must be defined ahead of a block 115 G65 cannot in the same block with G43 G44 G49 116 117 G65 cannot in the same block with M00 M01 M02 M30 M98 M99 Null variable cannot be the result in a macro statement 118 119 The number of argument I J K in G65 and G66 exceeds 10 Macro program called by P in G65 G66 is out of permitted range 353
373. s as follows As is shown in this page there are 2 parameter rows at the bottom of the page the 1 row shows the meaning of a bit of a parameter where the cursor locates the bit to be displayed can be D LJ positioned by pressing L or W key The 2nd row shows the abbreviation of all the bits of a parameter where the cursor locates 188 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display BIT PARAMETER 00003 NO0000 NO DATA NO DATA NO DATA 801 00000000 009 00000000 617 60101000 002 800000011 010 66611111 018 880000000 003 80000000 011 00000000 019 180000000 004 010000800 8012 00010011 028 800000080 005 A 00010001 013 190000011 021 00000000 006 00000000 014 68611111 022 00000000 007 00000000 015 10000009 023 00000000 008 00011111 016 800000000 024 00000000 Bekk kkk kkk ALMS ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX bit7 1 0 Unused NO 009 JOG 5000A Tee Hag 2 DATA PARAMETER interface Press pou key repeatedly key if in BIT PARAMETER interface it enters DATA PARAMETER interface there are 110 data parameters which are displayed by 7 pages in this c 3 D F O D 9 a o gt interface and they can be viewed or modified by pressing key to enter the corresponding page It is as follows As is shown in this page there is a cue line at the page bottom it displays the meaning of the parameter where the cursor locates DATA PARAMETER 00003 NO0O000 NO DATA NO DA
374. s can not be performed Otherwise the system alarms So in the spindle speed control mode it is not permitted the manual operation of Cs by the PLC ladder diagram The signal shift of spindle contour control CON G027 7 Type Signal input Function This signal is used for shifting between spindle speed control mode 113 euin oA 0 O Ke o 3 3 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual and Cs contour control mode When this signal is set to 1 the spindle is shifted to the Cs contour control mode from speed control mode When this signal is set to 0 the Cs contour control mode comes back to the speed control mode The signal shift end of spindle contour control FSCSL F044 1 Type Signal output Function This signal indicates that the controlled axis has been controlled under the Cs contour Output condition Spindle speed control mode gt 0 Cs contour control mode gt 1 WnjoA U e e 9 3 gt 2 e CNC and spindle servo control unit The signal shift relationship of the spindle working Spindle servo controller The signal input o FSCSL or the spindle working Time sequence figure Input shif by the user The spindle servo work at the position mode The signal input of spindle servo working The spindle servo shifts in working mode The signal output of spindle servo working The spindle servo shifts in w
375. screw pitch values are in inches units The setting of this parameter depends on machine tool G code By selecting G20 G21 code it is able to set whether minimum input increment values are in inch or in metric Executing G21 indicates that minimum input increment values are in metric and executing G20 indicates that values are in inch eer c MAD AMS a AS SMAL 1 Spindle manual gear shift for S command 0 Spindle auto gear shift for S command M30 1 Cursor returns to beginning after M30 execution 0 Cursor not to beginning after M30 execution PPD 1 Relative coordinate set by G92 0 Relative coordinate not set by G92 PCMD 1 Axial output wave form is pulse 0 Axial output wave form is square Square output max output frequency 266KPPS Pulse output max output frequency 266KPPS Pulse width 1 y s ZM5 z 5th zero return type C 0 5th zero return type B ZM4 1 4th zero return type C 0 4th zero return type B ZMZ 1 Z zero return type C 0 Z zero return type B ZMY 1 Y zero return type C 0 Y zero return type B ZMX 1 X zero return type C 0 X zero return type B 300 Chapter 3 Parameter ma EEE CAES On the condition that blocks smoothing transition is valid more smooth velocity link and better machining quality will be obtained during the path transition from line to line or from line to arc by properly changing the linear feedrate So the actual output speed may b
376. spindle speed s 334 4 6 4 Analog voltage control for spindle speed ssss 334 AT Backlash Offset di ese n eoe ei eter eee de e ate eae Pe b vede ee ee Ee oed dae 334 4 8 Step MPGradj stmeht eere TR 335 4 9 Other Adjustment nete en Re de ie t Re t A Ee ail e b dM Ee duke rani 336 CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE sauna iio 337 SIUE Gh GN DIA S JEEP PT 337 5 1 1 Signal diagnosis from machine to CNC sesssseeeee eene 337 5 1 2 Axes moving state and data diagnosis signal of CNC sssseseeeesss 337 5 1 3 MDI panel keys diagnosis eene eene ennemi 338 5 14 GNC internal State co neri a cdi ee cere reet 339 71779 A ES 340 5 2 1 X address fixed addresses ssssssssssssssssssssee eene 340 5 2 2 Y address fixed addresses 342 5 3 PLC Data nainun an a ai Mo o op Mla uo alim Nun ls 342 CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING SCREW PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION 343 61 Function Explanatio ca edt Dele eee tetas tee t tet b a aia 343 6 2 SDeCIEICatlOTIs Zens e den ete Sete ce e eroe Dee dero Aut tete eon peti mede et etude 343 6 3 Parameter Setting i eee e me e e e t is 343 6 3 1 Screw pitch compensation eese eene eene nennen nennen 343 6 3 2 Screw pitch error Origin iii 343 6 3 3 Offset interval eati bete dit aa 344 6 3 4 Compensation ValUg 4 Sine cade aa RO D eeu 344 6 4 Cautions tor Offset Setting eee des i
377. ss the CES key to start the program DNC machining under the condition that the PC is get ready Please refer to the DNC communication software for details 7 3 Running state 7 3 1 Single block execution When the program is to be executed for the 1 time to avoid the programming errors it may select Single block mode to execute the program In Auto mode the methods for turning on single are as follows 237 C GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Q 2 Press the 999 key to make the single block indicator in State area to light up it means that the single block function has been selected In Single block mode when the current block execution is finished the CNC system stops if next block is to be executed it needs to press the key Note Even at the mid point the single block stops in G28 G29 G30 commands 7 3 2 Dry run Before the program is to be executed in order to avoid the programming errors it may select the Dry run mode to check the program And the machine runs by a constant speed other than the speed specified by the program In Auto mode the method for turning on the Dry run switch are as follows A Press LM key to make the dry run indicator in State area to light up it means that the dry lt 2 c 3 O F jo Le O E o 5 run function is selected The speed specified by the program is invalid in Dry run and actural feedrate is set by the DATA parameter No 174 7
378. ssseeee 145 6 2 2 Tool movement in start up ccc cece cece teeter reer rere Hee 146 6 2 3 Tool movement in offset MoOde oooocononoccoccccccccinncononnnononcnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnoninnnnnnnnnnnnneninnas 147 6 2 4 Tool operation in offset cancellation MOde oooccicocococccnncccnnnonononcnnnnnocnnnnanonnnnnononinnns 152 6 2 5 Interference check sssssssssssssssssssseenene ener nn nenne etre nnn 154 6 2 6 Command of compensation vector cancel temporarily sssssssssssss 156 6 2 7 Exceptional case ccc cece eter eect etree eee Heeeeeemeennennnnnnnnnnnn enne n nennen nnns 157 5K C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Contents Volume I OPERATION CHAPTER1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY 000 2 2 2 ecceseeeee cece eeeeeeee eee eens nennen nennen nnn 163 1 1 Panel DIVISION 53 522 0 edidic A au eet npa tut nare trea reati dote ih 163 11 1 State Indication oro ec eee te eee eei deter la eee Ana at 164 1 1 2 Edit keypad iie eiie en oa 164 11 3 Menu display ree XR REIR Run pr Eee reg 165 A ALA Machine panel 21 tete reet ee tt liar 166 1 2 Summary of Operation Mode ssssssssssssssseseeeeenee enne nennen nnn 169 1 3 Display Intemace CE 170 1 3 1 Position interface ree E o eter ri tete eter etit ndn LL ERR dt 173 1 3 2 Program Interface A e edet A ee Panel a ae 175 1 3 3 Tool offset macro variable and tool life management interface
379. stop key in EDIT REF STEP MPG MANUAL modes CS control mode can be switched 5 3 18 External MPG control e Relevant Signal Type Sign Meaning Pin out PLC CNC state diagnosis EHDX external MPG X choosed CN31 5 X6 0 EHDY external MPG Y choosed CN31 6 X6 1 Input EHDZ external MPG Z choosed CN31 8 X6 2 signal EMPO external X1 rate CN31 9 X6 3 EMP1 external X10 rate CN31 22 X6 4 EMP2 external X100 rate CN31 23 X6 5 e Function description Standard ladder diagram supports external MPG with 3 axes External MPG PSG 100 05E L and ZSSY2080 are suitable Refer to materials related to MPG for connection 5 4 Standard Ladder Diagram XIGNHddV 371
380. stops 5 Returning to the initial point or point R plane at rapid traverse according to the G98 or G99 6 The spindle is rotated in the positive direction 67 GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual Command Path G98 Mode for returning to start point level G99 Mode for returning to point R plane Spindle positively WnjoA Spindle positively PointR PointR a U A o e 9 3 3 O Spindle stop Initial point level Spindle stop Point Z Point Z Related Explanation 1 This cycle is used to be bore a hole The command operation is basically same with G81 only spindle rotation status is different After cut feeds to the bottom of a hole the MO5 is executed spindle stops then the point R plane is retracted at the rapid traverse the MO3 is then performed spindle rotates positively regardless of the currently spindle rotation status and the positive or negative rotation are specified before the canned cycle 2 The command Q and P are disabled in this cycle but its value is reserved as canned cycle modal value 3 15 2 9 Boring cycle G88 Format G98 G99 G88 X Y R Z P F_ L Function A dwell is performed at the bottom of a hole the spindle is stopping If the manual operation is applied now tool can be removed manually It is better to retract the tool safely from the hole regardless of any kind of manual operation It is rapidly retracted to point R or
381. system workpiece coordinate system zero offset G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 Moving of the cursor The cursor moves at the data of each coordinate system axis And the data where the cursor 186 090003 NO00000 G57 COORDINATE G58 COORDINATE ABSOLUTE A 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 T 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 G59 COORDINATE COORDINATE OFFSET MACHINE X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 DATA MDI S0000 TOO H00 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display locates are highlighted The cursor supports up and down left and right moving and the corresponding data are backlighted By pressing Page key the 1 group X axis data on the corresponding interface where the cursor locates is backlighted e Absolute data input After data key is keyed in by user the data where the cursor locates is changed to the data input by user The validity judgement of user input data is the same as that of 980TD coordinate data input in MDI mode e Relative data input ALTER MACRO After data 9 key is keyed in by user the original data where the cursor locates is changed by the sum of data newly input by user and original data Auto measurement input X Z Y meu After or amp key is keyed in by user the original data where the cursor locates is changed by the system cu
382. t 60 Data parameter Ne071 gt 50 Data parameter Ne072 lt 50 Data parameter No073250 Data parameter Ne074 lt 50 Data parameter Ne075 lt 500 The parameter settings above are recommended for use refer to the actual conditions of the drive unit motor characteristic and machine load for its proper setting 331 M eunjoA gt m rr D et O 5 M euinjoA gt o rr A D et 5 G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual EU AAA A AAA AAA AAA AAA 4 5 Machine Zero Adjustment Adjust the relevant parameters based on the valid level of the connection signal zero return type or direction applied DECI of the bit parameter N2004 valid level of deceleration signal as machine zero return ZM5 ZMX of the bit parameter Ne006 return and initial backlash direction of X Y Z 4th 5th axes machine zeroes at deceleration ZC5 ZCX of the bit parameter Ne007 itis able to set whether an approach switch taken as both deceleration and zero signals when X Y Z 4th 5 axes return to machine zero point ZNLK of the bit parameter N2011 for direction keys lock when performing zero return ZRS5 ZRSX of the bit parameter N2014 for deceleration and zero signals detection of X Y Z axes in machine zero return MZR5 MZRX of the bit parameter No22 for positive or negative zero turn of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Data parameter No089 N9093 low speed of X Y Z 4th 5th axes in machi
383. t of the operation exceeds 3 65x10 j is about 110 an overflow occurs and P S alarm is issued iii A constant can be used instead of the j variable 7 ROUND function When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command IF statement or WHILE statement the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place Example When 1 ROUND 2 is executed where 2 1 2345 the value of variable 1 is 1 0 When the ROUND function is used in NC statement address the ROUND function rounds off the specified value according to the least input increment of the address 8 Rounding up and down to an integer With CNC when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer Conversely when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the absolute value of the original number such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer Be particular careful when handling negative numbers Example Suppose that 4171 2 2 1 2 When 3 FUP 1 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 1 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FUP 2 is executed 2 0 is assigned to 3 When 3 FIX 2 is executed 1 0 is assigned to 3 5 3 3 Priority of Operations 1 Function 2 Operation such as multiplication and division AND
384. ted consequence Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid damage to the system Switch off power supply before plugging out or opening electric cabinet E Troubleshooting Cut off the power supply before troubleshooting or component replacement Check for fault when short circuit or overload occurs Restart can only be done after troubleshooting Frequent switching on off of the power is forbidden and the interval time should be at least 1 min IH 5K G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual ANNOUNCEMENT This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible However operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by one due to so many possibilities that may involve with so the contents that are not specially stated in this manual shall be considered as unallowable WARNING Please read this manual and a manual from machine tool builder carefully before installation programming and operation and strictly observe the requirements Otherwise products and machine may be damaged workpiece be scrapped or the user be injured NOTE Functions technical indexes such as precision and speed described in this user manual are only for this system Actual function deployment and technical performance of a machine tool with this CNC system are determined by machine tool builder s design so functions and technical indexes are subject to the user manual from machine tool
385. ted between two arc interpolations R2 circular arc tangent Tangential angle bisector for two circular arcs R1 circular arc tangent e Circular to linear Format G02 G03 IP R I J K L G01 P Function A straight line is inserted between the arc and linear interpolation 94 Chapter 3 G Command Arc tangente SWIN OA Bisector of angles v o ae E 3 3 2 te 3 20 2 Circular chamfering An arc is inserted between the two linear figures arc figures or linear and arc figures this is called circular chamfering Tangent transition is performed between arc and figure line The command address is C for the arc chamfering the data followed by command address C is the radius of chamfering arc The arc chamfering should be employed in command G01 G02 or G03 e 1 Linear to linear Format G01 IP C G01 IP Function An arc is inserted between two linear interpolations which it is tangential with two linear lines the data followed by command address C is radius i t Tangential pointe Suis c E p F ster Raid TRS n e 2 Linear to Circular Format G01 IP C G02 G03 IP R I J K Function An arc is inserted at the intersection of straight line and arc this arc is tangential with both the straight line and arc the data followed by command address C is radius 95 GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual WnjoA e iof Tangential points e 3 C
386. ted from the operation mode See the following figures for the display menu display interface and page layers Menu Display Display page key interface Position Pomon interface RELATIVE Pos ABSOLUTE Pos 7 INTEGRATED Pos q gt POS amp PRG A Pro PRG CONTENT content Pro state PRG STATE mas Pro previe PRG PREVIEW w Program list 170 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Menu Display Display page key interface TOOL OFFSET ool Offset 5 interface aiil e MACRO 1 MACRO 4 L interface 3 3 D e ks E S 2 o fe Tool life Tool Life 1 Tool Life n x interface alarm AARM alarm wa m Alarm log i Setting SETTING SWITCH SETTING Time amp DATE AUTH OPERATION interface G54 SET G54 G59 setting 171 lt o c 3 D F O Ke D 9 p o E C GSK CNC GSE GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 172 message Menu Display f Display page key interface een GRAPH SET GRAPH TRACK
387. tem has software limit function it is suggested that the stroke limit switches are fixed in the positive or negative axes for hardware limit The connection is shown in follows The chart is designed for X Y Z axes 24 E a Ep Switch for Emergency stop switche So the MESP of bit parameter No 17should be set to 0 And the CNC diagnostic message ESP can monitor the state of emergency stop input signal In Manual or MPG mode slowly move the axes to test the validity of stroke limit switch correctness of alarm display validity of overtravel release button When the overtravel occurs or Emergency Stop button is pressed emergency stop alarm will be issued by CNC system The alarm can be cancelled by pressing down the Overtravel button and moving reversely 4 2 Drive unit Unit Setting Set BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 009 according to alarm logic level of drive unit The BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 009 for our drive unit are all set for 1 If the machine moving direction is not consistent with the moving command modify the BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 008 BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 019 BIT4 BITO of bit parameter No 20 328 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging Methods 4 3 Gear Ratio Adjustment The data parameter No 049 No 058 can be modified for electronic gear ratio adjustment to meet the different mechanical transmission ratio if the machine travel distance is not consistent with the displacement distanc
388. ter ROA4 is valid for only rotary axis ROT4 1 Note 2 Only parameter ROA4 1 is RAB4 valid Note 3 Only parameter ROA4 1 is RRL4 valid RCS5 1 5th Cs function is valid power on 0 5th Cs function is invalid power on Note Only rotary axis function is valid ROT5 1 is RCS5 valid ROS5 ROT5 Set the type of 5th 306 Chapter 3 Parameter Unser Rotary Rotary 8 vaia El SENE MER A5IS1 A5ISO Selecte increment system of 5th ABIS1 ABISO Increment System of 5TH 0 0 Same to the X Y Z 0 1 IS A 1 0 IS B 1 1 IS C RRT5 1 Zero mode D is used on 5th rotary axis power on 0 Zero mode A B C are used on 5th rotary axis power on RRL5 71 5th rel coor cycle func is valid power on 0 5th rel coor cycle func is invalid power on RAB5 71 5th rotates according to symbol direction 0 bth rotates according to nearby rotation ROA5 1 5th abs coor cycle func is valid power on 0 5th abs coor cycle func is invalid power on M eunjoA Note1 ROAS is valid to only rotary axis ROT5 1 Note2 Only when parameter ROA4 1 is RAB4 valid Note3 Only when parameter ROA4 1 is RRL4 valid kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk Eeee AAA AAA ISC 1 Minimum increment system is IS C need restart gt o sp D et O 5 0 Minimum increment system is IS B do not need restart ABPx 1 Output axis pulse by two right angle intersection phases need restart
389. ter point to outside 5 R reference surface is retracted along the Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 6 The center of rectangle is positioned along the X and Y axes at the rapid traverse rate 7 8 9 10 U A o e 9 3 3 2 O 7 Down to distance V to the end machining surface along Z axis at the rapid traverse rate 8 Cut along Z axis for Q V depth 9 Cycling the operation from 4 8 till the surface of total cutting is performed 10 Return to the initial plane or point R plane according to G98 or G99 Command Path G99 77 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual GSE WwnjoA v o ae 9 3 gt 2 te Related Explanation The commands P and L are disabled in this cycle but the P value is reserved as canned cycle modal value For example An inside rectangle groove rough milling is specified by G134 in canned cycle see the following figure 78 Chapter 3 G Command Y 7 Initial level 50 SWIN OA U o e 9 3 gt 2 o G90 GOO X50 Y50 250 GOO rapid positioning G99 G134 X25 Y25 R5 Z 50 170 J50 W20 Q10 K5 V10 U10 F800 D1 Groove rough milling cycle inside rectangle is performed D1 5 G80 X50 Y50 Z50 The canned cycle is cancelled returning from the point R plane M30 Note If the parameter value of 97 is set for more than 10 the helical cutting feed along the Z axis will be performed by G1
390. ter power on Setting range 9999999 9999999 unit 0 001mm 3 2 4 Thread function THDA 21 Threading machining adopts exponential acceleration and deceleration 0 Threading machining adopts linear acceleration and deceleration M eunjoA Threading axes start speed Setting range 6 8000 Cunit mm min 3 2 5 Spindle control gt o p A D ot 5 ASE IAN T A ACS s 1 EIE voltage control of spindle speed 0 Switching control of spindle speed Voltage compensation for OV analog voltage output Setting range 1000 1000 unit mV Voltage offset value when spindle max speed analog voltage 10V output Setting range 2000 2000 unit mV 318 Chapter 3 Parameter Max spindle speed of 1 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 2 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 3 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Max spindle speed of 4 gear when analog voltage output is 10V Setting range 10 9999 Cunit r min Delay of spindle speed in position signal detection Setting range 0 4080 Cunit ms Max spindle speed fluctuation allowed by system Setting range 50 1000 Cunit r min spindle encoder pulses rev Setting range 0 5000 unit p r 0 Not detect spindle encoder in G74 G84 tapping Transmission ratio of encoder and spindle gear teeth Transmission ratio of encoder and encoder gear teeth
391. the 5 axis high level alarm signal ALM5 ALMA 1 the 4 axis low level alarm signal ALMA 0 the 4 axis high level alarm signal ALM4 ALMZ 1 Z axis low level alarm signal ALMZ 0 Zaxis high level alarm signal ALMZ ALMY 1 Y axis low level alarm signal ALMY 0 Y axis high level alarm signal ALMY ALMX 1 X axis low level alarm signal ALMX 0 X axis high level alarm signal ALMX RET THNGS HNGs HNGZ HNGY RGX HNG5 1 the 5th MPG ccw cw 20 the 5th MPG ccw cw HNG4 1 the 4th MPG ccw cw 0 the 4th MPG ccw cw HNGZ 1 Z MPG ccw cw 0 Z MPG cew cw HNGY 1 Y MPG ccw cw 0 Y MPG ccw cw HNGX z1 X MPG ccw cw 20 X MPG cew cw SPFD SAR THDAT VAL5 VAL4 VALZ VALY VALX Eggs ESSE HOA VAES NA A VAE VAN VAR VAL5 1 For the 5 axis move key f is positive is negative 0 For the 5 axis move key is positive fis negative VAL4 71 For the 4 axis move key is positive is negative 0 For the 4 axis move key is positive fis negative VALZ 1 For Z axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Z axis move key is positive fis negative VALY 1 For Y axis move key is positive is negative 0 For Y axis move key is positive fis negative VALX 1 For X axis move key is positive lt is negative 0 For X axis move key is positive is negative 315 M eunjoA gt o p D
392. the X Y and Z respectively The numerical value following l J and K however is a vector component from start point of an arc to the center point which is an incremental value with sign See the following figure End point x y End point Z X End point Y 7 Start point Start point Start point J K Center Center Center The F command is circular interpolation rate in helical interpolation in order to achieve the linkage interpolation between linear axis and arc the speed of linear interpolation by the gro axis has the following relationship to the F command Length of linear axis Length of circular arc Helical interpolation path is as follows 38 Chapter 3 G Command Tool path X Feedrate along the circle between 2 arc interpolation axes is the specified one J and K have signs according to the direction The circular center also can be specified by radius R other than I J and K as follows GO2X Y R GOSX Y R Now the following two arcs can be described one arc is more than 180 the other is less than 180 The arc radius which is less than 180 is specified by the positive value the arc radius which is more than 180 is specified by the negative value The radius is either positive or negative when the arc command is equal to 180 Example Arc less than 180 G91 G02 X60 0 Y20 0 R50 0 F300 0 Arc 2 more than 180 G91 G02 X60 0 Y20 0 R 50 0 F300 0 ii inne m End
393. the next block is executed Example If the value of variable 1 is greater than 10 a branch to sequence number N2 occurs If the condi IF 1 GT 10 GOTO 2 tion is not sa tisfied If the condition is satisfied N2 G00 G91 X10 0 THEN format IF conditional expression THEN macro statement 138 Chapter 5 Macro Program Ifthe specified conditional expression is satisfied a predetermined macro statement is executed Only a single macro statement is executed Example IF 1 EQ 2 THEN 23 70 If the value of 1 and 2 are the same 0 is assigned to 3 if not no execution will be performed 5 4 3 Conditional Expression Conditional expression A conditional expression must include an operator between two variables or between a variable and constant and must be enclosed in brackets An expression can be used instead of a variable Operators In 980MDa operators in the following table are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value Operator Meaning EQor Equal to NE or lt gt Not equal to GT or gt Greater than gt GE or gt Greater than or equal to 2 LT or lt Less than lt LE or lt Less than or equal to lt Example IF 3 lt gt 2 GOTO 2 it means if 3 is not equal to 2 branch to N2 block IF 101 gt 7 22 THEN 101 SIN30 it means if 101 is greater than 7 22 the expression after THEN is ex
394. the operation item which cursor is in DATA s OUTPUT vise d Operation execution Press CM to execute all operation items selected in current column Y Operation confirmation Execution needs to be confirmed please press amp key to confirm N or press key to cancel the execution gt Parameter restore and backup Backup the parameter Copy all parameter states and values to U gsk980MDa_backup user of USB memory unit in the form of file Para1 par Para2 par Para3 par If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Restore the parameter Copy parameter files from USB memory unit U gsk980MDa_backup user back to the CNC system to restore the system parameter Restore operation cannot be done if the above mentioned path is moved or altered or irregular file name is renamed Note Repower the CNC system after parameter load is successful gt Part program restore and backup Backup the part parameter Copy all part programs of current system to U gsk980MDa_backup user prog of USB memory unit in the form of file CNC If the above mentioned file does not exist set up a new one If the file exists this file will be overwritten by the new one Restore the part program Copy all part programs from USB memory unit U gsk980MDa_backup user prog back to the CNC system to restore the part program Restore operation cannot be do
395. the position of P1 is obviously differ from the above one which does not insert the N9 block So the cut circular arc path by this transit pont is absolutely differing from the path to be machined so the alamr is then generated circular arc data error in cutter compensation C b The example for a non circle may occur 159 euin oA D 2 O y 3 3 J a SWIN OA v 2 o ae g 3 gt 2 te GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual ABP GEHE PZ NO Program example NO G90 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z50 N1 G01 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 N2 G02 X50 R25 The P1 and P2 are the transit point of tool compensation as the left figure shown wherein the r is compensation radius This is a normal treatment mode for the straight line to circular arc The alarm may occur in terms of the following program NO G90 GOO X0 YO ZO N1 G01 G41 X0 YO D1 F800 without moving originally start N2 G02 X50 R25 Because the N1 block does not a movement namaly it equals to the two same points The transit points P1 and P2 are performed based on the treatment of two same points The path of two same points so the circular arc path cut by this transit point obviously differs from the actual path to be machined in this case the circular arc data error in cutter compensation C may alarm c In the calculation of arc cutter compensation C this alarm may issue if the compensation radius D is modified A
396. the unit of mm rev G95 is modal G command The G95 command can be omitted if the current mode is G95 When the CNC performs G95 F the cutting feedrate is controlled by feedrate command based on the multiplication of F command value mm rev and current spindle speed rev min The actual feedrate varies with the spindle speed The spindle cutting feedrate per revolution is specified by G95 F the even cutting line can be formed on the face of workpiece It is necessary to install spindle encoder when the G95 mode is operated The G94 and G95 are modal G commands at the same group one of them is available only 21 SWIN OA U e e 9 3 3 O GSE G GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual The G94 is initial state G command so it defaults the G94 when the CNC is switched on The following below shows the conversion formula of feed value per rev and feed value per min Fm FrxS There into Fm feed value per minute mm min Fx feed value per revolution mm r S spindle speed r min The feedrate value is set by the CNC Data parameter No 172 when the CNC is switched on the F value is invariable after the F command is executed The feedrate is 0 after FO is executed The F value is invariable when CNC is reset or at emergent stop Note In G95 mode the cutting feedrate will be uneven when the spindle speed is less than 1 rev min The following error will exist in the actual feedrate when the
397. tion Y Chinese English Russian and Spanish display selected by the parameters Y Full screen program editing 40MB program capacity for storing up to 40000 of part programs Y USB data communication CNC system upgrading machining programs reading through U disk and bidirectional transfer between CNC and U disk Y A Alarm log multi level passwords for equipment maintenance and management Y Bidirectional transfer between CNC and CNC CNC and PC upgrade of CNC software and PLC programs Y The installation dimensions and the electric ports are compatible with GSK980MD GSK980MC Specifications SWIN OA v 3 o e 2 o 3 3 5 e Controlled axes five axes X Y Z 4th and 5th for the 4th and 5th axes optional axis types linear axis or revolving axis and CS contouring control available Interpolation functions linear interpolation for X Y Z 4th and 5th axes helical interpolation for X Y and Z axes circular interpolation for arbitrary 2 axes Position command range 99999999 99999999 least command increment 1um 0 1um selected via parameters Electronic gear ratio command multiplier 1 32767 command frequency divisor 1 32767 Rapid traverse speed maximum 60000mm min Rapid traverse override FO 25 50 100 four levels real time tuning Cutting feedrate maximum 15000mm min feed per min or 500mm r feed per rotation Feedrate override 0 15096 sixteen level real time
398. tion for standard ladder diagram Software version Standard 5 1 2 Information of Current Version DESIGN GSK VERSION 09 08 13 91F5 VERIFY 91F5 REMARK GSK980MDa Standard Ladder Diagram XIGNHddV 357 gt a y e Z a G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System GSE 5 2 ADDRESS DEFINITION Standard PLC PLC Function for standard PLC CN61 address AM Remark address au address definition definition 3 pes IE puc pente AA pes M X0 7 X1 0 ae Ma RR pz DO E A X1 7 29 X2 0 L3 pe 0 1 r pes AAA X2 7 37 X3 0 7 per 1 Cs pez SiS o pes 1 Ca pea Sid CSCS ses SCS pr 1 7m we Sid 7 eno 1 1 25 28 Null 358 Appendix Standard PLC PLC Function for standard PLC CN62 address EO Remark address AS address definition definition 1 YO O COOL Cooling signal 3 4 vos sR SmdecoWsom 5 wa sw Spindle om signal 6 ws ssr Spmdesopsond WEN Y0 6 Spindle enable signal 7 8 YO 7 SPZD Spindle braking signal 9 Y1 0 GEAR1 Spindle mechanical gear signal 1 Y1 1 GEAR2 Spindle mechanical gear signal 2 Y1 2 GEAR3 Spindle mechanical gear signal 3 Y1 3 GEAR4 Spindle mechanical gear signal 4 Y1 4 Y1 6 Y1 7 Y2 0 Y2 2 Yellow Lamp Y2 3 Green Lamp 36 Y2 7 ALTO ALT output signal 37 Y3 0 Y3 1 Y3 2 Y3
399. tis RR ER ERR IE e IS 344 6 5 Examples of Offset Parameters Setting nennen nennen enne nenne 344 XV C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System APPENDIX Appendix 1 Dimensions of Additional Panel APO1 esesososososososossssssssesesososososososososseseseseseseseso 351 Appendix 2 Dimensions for Additional Panel AP02 sosososososossssesssesesesesososososososososseseseseseseso 351 Appendix4 Alarm Information sc issiciccicssscstssteccacssessceiscessetescsscadscesssoestacsseascusvessecestencosdieccssdesseacsiceseeste 352 Appendix 5 Function Configuration of Standard Ladder Diagram ss 357 5 1 Information for Ladder Diagram 5 nnde noe e endet be e tee ee a ee 357 A A e eene Pese eee nace het ee dietro rete te mese Ret 357 5 1 2 Information of Current Version sssssssssssssssees eene nennen 357 5 2 ADDRESS DEFINITION uraa a ipei a 358 5 3 FUNCTION CONFIGURATION A e vet e tive n eeu eee ee ede eee uela 361 5 3 1 Spindle CCW and CW Control essssssseeeem meer 361 eieae SIOEN OE E cote Ded eA e e t td 362 5 3 8 Switch Value Control for Spindle Speed ooooooccccnnoccccccnooncccononanccnnnnnncnnonannnnnnnnnnnos 363 5 3 4 Cycle Start and Feed Hold sesssssssseeeeeeeeeeen nennen enne 364 SIS Cooling Cont licitar t tede Eg eret egi bed d date 365 5 3 6 Lubricating Control iiie datada 365 5 3 7 Optional Block Skip
400. to reset this GSK980MDa system if there are abnormal outputs and axis actions in it 1 All axes movement stops 2 M S function output is invalid PLC ladder defines whether automatically cut off signals such E E as spindle CCW CW lubrication cooling by pressing key 3 Auto run ends modal function and state held on 2 4 2 Emergency stop During machine running if the emergency button is pressed under the dangerous or emergent situation the CNC system enters into emergency status and the machine movement is stopped immediately If the emergency button is released the emergency alarm is cancelled and the CNC S e 3 D O jo D o EL O 2 resets Its circuit wiring is shown in section 2 2 1 of this chapter Note 1 Ensure the fault is eliminated before the emergency alarm is cancelled Note 2 pressing down the Emergency button prior to power on or off may alleviate the electric shock to the machine system Note 3 Reperform the machine zero return operation to ensure the correct position coordinate after the emergency alarm is cancelled machine zero return operation is unallowed if there is no machine zero on the machine Note 4 Only the MESP of the bit parameter No 017 is set to 0 is the external emergency stop valid 2 4 3 Feed hold D Key can be pressed during the machine running to make the running pause However in thread cutting cycle running this function can not stop the running
401. top is executed proper spindle brake time should be set to stop the spindle promptly in order to enhance the machining efficiency If the brake is employed with energy consumption type too long braking time may damage the motor So the brake time is set by PLC 333 M eunjoA gt o p D et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual 4 6 3 Switch volume control of spindle speed When multiple speed motor control is used motor speed control command can be defined by ladder diagram as S_ _ Relevant parameter is shown below Bit parameter No001 ACS 0 select switching control of spindle speed 4 6 4 Analog voltage control for spindle speed This function can be obtained by the parameter setting of CNC By interface outputting OV 10V analog voltage to control inverter the stepless shift can be obtained And the related parameters are needed to be adjusted are Bit parameter N2001 ACS 1 for selection of spindle speed analog voltage control Data parameter N2099 offset compensation value as spindle speed command voltage is OV Data parameter N90100 offset compensation value as spindle speed command voltage is 10V Data parameter Ne101 N2104 Max speed limit for spindle speed gear 1 4 When CNC power on the defaulted gear is 1 for spindle Basic parameters needed to be adjusted for inverter refer to the relavant inverter manual for specific adjustment CCW or CW command mode is selected by frenauenc
402. truction design of the machine sometimes an additional axis is required for example the cycle working table rotation working table This axis can be designed as both a linear axis and rotation axis The basis controllable number of 980MDa is three axes the maximum axis is 5 axis Cs axis included Namely two additional axes are added based upon the original one the 4 and the 5 axes in this case the relative functions of additional linear axis and rotation axis can be performed 4 2 Axis Name The names of three basis axes are always X Y or Z The axis name of additional axis can be set to A B or C using data parameter No 202 and No 203 e Default axis name When the axis name does not set the axis name of the 4 one is an additional axis by default the axis name of the 5 one is C Repeated axis name When the axis name is same between the added 4 axis and the 5 axis P S alarm may issue 4 3 Axis Display When the additional axis is treated as rotation axis the least incremental of the rotation axis is 0 01 degree so the 3 digit of the decimal is displayed in unit If it is set to a linear axis the display is same as the basis three axes X Y or Z When the 4 axis is set to a linear axis the 5 is set to a rotation axis the axis is displayed at the interface of related coordinate and coordinate amp program THAT ER 06608 NOB800 00000 NOOOO00 GOA GIT G90 G54 000 000 000 000 pela s 00 M3
403. tuning Motion control Manual feedrate 0 1260mm min sixteen level real time tuning MPG feed 0 001 0 010 0 100 1 000mm four gears Acceleration deceleration type S type for rapid traverse exponential type for cutting feed Automatic chamfering 65 kinds of G codes G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G28 G29 G30 G31 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G49 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G65 G66 G67 G73 G74 G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 ESE G85 G86 G88 G89 G90 G91 G92 G94 G95 G98 G99 G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 G140 G141 G142 G143 Macro 31 kinds of arithmetic logical operations and skip can be achieved by macro Command command G65 Macro statement command eg IF WHILE GOTO Operation Seven operation modes EDIT AUTO MDI DNC MACHINE ZERO mode MPG STEP and MANUAL Tapping Tapping function lead 0 001 500mm or 0 06 25400 pitch inch Chapter 1 Programming Fundmentals Encoder tapping settable line number of encoder 0 or100p r 5000p r no detect for spindle encoder when the line number is set to 0 Rigid tapping by rotary axis Drive ratio between encoder and spindle 1 255 1 255 Precision compensation Pitch error compensation 255 compensation points per axis compensation Backlash compensation 0 2 000mm amount of each point 0 255mm Tool compensati
404. uld be no lesthan 10 C temperature rises when the cabinet inside temperature rises e Fans should be fixed in the cabinet to ventilate it The panel should be installed in a place where the coolant can t splash The external electrical interference should be taken into consideration in cabinet design to prevent it from transferring to CNC system 1 2 3 Protection methods against interference In order to ensure the CNC stable working the anti interference technology such as space electromagnetic radiation shielding impact current absorbing power mixed wave filtering are employed in CNC design And the following measures are necessary during CNC connection 1 Make CNC far from the interference devices inverter AC contactor static generator high pressure generator and powered sectional devices etc 2 To supply the CNC via an isolation transformer the machine with the CNC 272 Chapter 1 Installation Layout should be grounded the CNC and drive unit should be connected with independent grounding wires at the grounding point 3 To supress interference connect parallel RC circuit at both endsof AC coil Fig 1 4 RC circuit should approach to inductive loading as close as possible reversely connect parallel freewheeling diode at both ends of DC coil Fig 1 5 connect parallel surge absorber at the ends of AC motor coil Fig 1 6 ov 220V Y EN Fig 1 4 24V Fig 1 5 KM
405. ure 311 Software version is not conformed to PLC program 312 The first grade program for PLC program is too long 313 Fault occurs in keyboard or panel 314 Fault occurs in storage check it and repower on 315 Fault occurs in DNC com check the hardware connection and baudrate XIGNHddV 316 parameter file saving failure 317 System file error 318 Text format error 319 file pointer error in program loading 320 File pointer positioning error during program loading 321 File read error during program loading 322 Program location error 323 Invalidate the rotation axis before using Cs contouring control 324 names of 4th and 5th axis cannot be the same 355 gt a y e Z a GSE G GSR CNC GSK980MDa Milling Machine CNC System 325 2 Cs axes cannot be validate at the same time Modify the parameter 326 CNC file deletion failure 327 USB files reading and writing error connect it again 328 Files copy error 329 Files re download error 330 Program loading failure the length of block is excessive more than 255 characters 350 Parameter files open failure Set standard parameter at the factory 351 Parameter loading error Set it as standard at the factory 352 Data check error occurs in data retention area Restore the area and operate after zer
406. xis are connected independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required The deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4th axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return a proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal The deceleration signal DEC4 and one rotation signal PC4 of 4th axis are connected independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required The deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PC5 of 5th axis are in parallel connection during machine zero return an proximity switch acting as both the deceleration signal and zero signal The deceleration signal DEC5 and one rotation signal PCZ of 5th axis are connected 291 M eunjoA 5 m rr D et 5 M eunjoA gt m rtr A m et O 5 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual independently during machine zero return the indepent deceleration signal and zero signal are required EEE E AE EAS ZNLK 1 The direction keys are locked as machine zero return is performed by pressing the direction key once it moves to the machine zero automatically and stops By pressing the ned if key at the machine zero return the motion stops immediately 0 The direction keys are not locked as machine zero return is perf
407. y If the speed by programming is not consistent with that detected by the encoder it can be adjusted to be consistent with the actual one by adjusting the data parameter Ne101 Ne104 Speed adjustment method select the spindle first gear input S9999 code in MDI mode to run the spindle view the spindle speed shown on the right bottom of the screen then reinput the displayed speed value into the parameter Ne101 The other spinle gear adjustment is identical with this When entering S9999 code the voltage should be 10V SO is OV If there is an voltage error adjust bit parameter Ne099 and N2100 to correct the voltage offset value corrected by manufacturer usually not needed When the current gear is the max speed if the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than 10V set a smaller value for data parameter Ne100 when the SOO code is entered if there is still slow rotation in the spindle it means the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than OV so set a smaller value for data parameter N2099 M euinjoA gt m rr A D et 5 If the machine is not fixed with an encoder the spindle speed can be detected by a speed sensor input S9999 in MDI mode to set the speed value displayed by sensor to the data parameter No101 4 7 Backlash Offset The backlash offset is input by diameter value with the unit 0 001mm which is irrelevant to the programming by diameter or by radius It can be measured by a dial indicator a micromet
408. zero return and the deceleration signal and one rotation signal should be detected The G28 machine zero return hereafter will not detect the deceleration signal and one rotation signal but directly position to zero point e During the process of point AB and BR the two axes move at two independent speeds therefore the paths may not be linear After the execution of G28 machine zero return the bit 7 of parameter No 22 decides whether cancel cutter compensation or not e In compensation mode if command G28 is specified the compensation will be cancelled in the intermediate point The compensation mode is cancelled automatically after reference point return e f zero point switch is not equipped on the machine tool G28 command and machine zero return are disabled e The intermediate point can only be established during the movement from the intermediate point to the reference point which is followed the movement from the start point to the intermediate point e After the modification of parameters which set the zero return point manual reference point return is necessary G28 command can be executed later 3 9 Return from Reference Point G29 Format G29X Y Z Function When a rapid traverse is performed from the current point to mid point it positions to the specified position by X Y and Z at the rapid traverse rate Explanation X The absolute coordinate of aim point in X axis is indicated by G90 the aim point increm
409. zero point in X axis it returns to machine zero without detecting deceleration signal and zero signal when performing machine zero return 323 C GSK CNC GSK980MDa Milling CNC System User Manual CALH 1 Length offset not cancel in reference point return 0 Length offset cancel in reference point return MZR5 1 Machine zero return in negative the gh axis 0 Machine zero return in positive the 5 axis MZR4 1 Machine zero return in negative the 4 axis 0 Machine zero return in positive the 4 axis MZRZ 1 Machine zero return in negative Z axis 0 Machine zero return in positive Z axis MZRY 1 Machine zero return in negative Y axis 0 Machine zero return in positive Y axis MZRX 1 Machine zero return in positive X axis 0 Machine zero return in negative X axis Low speed of X axis machine zero return Low speed of Y axis machine zero return Low speed of Z axis machine zero return Low speed of the 4th axis machine zero return Low speed of the 5th axis machine zero return Setting range 10 1000 Cunit mm min High speed of X axis machine zero return High speed of Y axis machine zero return M eunjoA gt m rr A D et O 5 High speed of the 4th axis machine zero return 0 9 High speed of the 5th axis machine zero return Setting range 10 921571875 unit mm min s 4 4 s 8 The 4 axis machine zero offset 1 3 The 5 axis machine zero offset Setting range 999

GSK980MDa1 Milling Controller User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents